Mazda 2007 CX-9 Automobile User Manual

CX-9_8V83-EA-06I_Edition3 Page1

Monday, February 26 2007 7:17 PM

Black plate (1,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (2,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (3,1)

A Word to Mazda Owners

Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete customer satisfaction in mind.

To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual carefully and follow its recommendations.

An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is necessary, that's the place to go.

Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best possible service.

We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.

Mazda Motor Corporation

HIROSHIMA, JAPAN

Important Notes About This Manual

Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.

All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at

Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.

Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer vehicles.

Air Conditioning and the Environment

Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

Perchlorate

Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may contain Perchlorate Material

– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

©2006 Mazda Motor Corporation

Printed in Japan Mar. 2007(Print3)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (4,1)

How to Use This Manual

We want to help you get the most driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's manual, when read from cover to cover, can do that in many ways.

Illustrations complement the words of the manual to best explain how to enjoy your

Mazda. By reading your manual, you can find out about the features, important safety information, and driving under various road conditions.

The symbol below in this manual means

“Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen

”.

NOTE

A NOTE provides information and sometimes suggests how to make better use of your vehicle.

The symbol below, located on some parts of the vehicle, indicates that this manual contains information related to the part.

Please refer to the manual for a detailed explanation.

Index: A good place to start is the Index, an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

You'll find several WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which bodily injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (5,1)

Table of Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

Driving Your Mazda

Explanation of instruments and controls.

1

Essential Safety Equipment

Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint

systems and SRS air bags.

Knowing Your Mazda

Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment

of various parts.

Before Driving Your Mazda

Important information about driving your Mazda.

2

3

4

5

Interior Comfort

Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio

system.

In Case of an Emergency

Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.

6

7

Maintenance and Care

How to keep your Mazda in top condition.

8

Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

Specifications

Technical information about your Mazda.

Index

9

10

11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (6,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (7,1)

1


Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

Interior Overview .......................................................................... 1-2

Interior Equipment (View A) .................................................... 1-2

Interior Equipment (View B) .................................................... 1-3

Interior Equipment (View C) .................................................... 1-4

Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-5

Front .......................................................................................... 1-5

Rear ........................................................................................... 1-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

1-1




Interior Overview

Interior Equipment (View A)

Black plate (8,1)

Door-lock knob .................................................................................................. page 3-26

Power door lock switch ..................................................................................... page 3-27

Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-39

Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-35

Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-57

Headlight leveling switch .................................................................................. page 5-55

TCS-OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 5-22

Power liftgate switch ......................................................................................... page 3-30

Lighting control ................................................................................................. page 5-53

Turn and lane-change signal .............................................................................. page 5-56

Dashboard illumination knob ............................................................................ page 5-36

Instrument cluster .............................................................................................. page 5-33

Wiper and washer lever ..................................................................................... page 5-57

Ignition switch ..................................................................................................... page 5-2

Tilt wheel release lever ...................................................................................... page 3-57

Parking brake ....................................................................................................... page 5-5

1-2

The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (9,1)


Interior Overview

Interior Equipment (View B)

Audio control switches ...................................................................................... page 6-46

SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-50

Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... page 5-19

Information display .......................................................................................... page 6-123

Climate control system ........................................................................................ page 6-2

Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................................................... page 5-63

Audio system ..................................................................................................... page 6-17

Glove box ........................................................................................................ page 6-128

Accessory socket ............................................................................................. page 6-131

AT shift lever ...................................................................................................... page 5-10

Seat warmer switches ........................................................................................ page 2-10

Rear window defroster switch ........................................................................... page 5-61

Phone button .................................................................................................... page 6-103

Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 3-43

Coin box .......................................................................................................... page 6-128

Navigation System (if equipped) .......................................... Refer to the separate manual


1-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Interior Overview

Interior Equipment (View C)

Black plate (10,1)

Overhead lights ................................................................................................ page 6-121

SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-50

Seat belt ............................................................................................................. page 2-18

Rear entertainment system ................................................................................. page 6-51

Center console ................................................................................................. page 6-128

Remote fuel-filler lid release ............................................................................. page 3-42

Cup holders ...................................................................................................... page 6-125

Sunvisor ........................................................................................................... page 6-120

Moonroof switches ............................................................................................ page 3-45

Overhead console ............................................................................................ page 6-127

Rearview mirror ................................................................................................. page 3-58

Vanity mirror .................................................................................................... page 6-120

Front seat ............................................................................................................. page 2-2

Climate control system (Rear) ........................................................................... page 6-14

Second-row seat ................................................................................................. page 2-11

Third-row seat ................................................................................................... page 2-16

1-4


Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Front

Black plate (11,1)


Exterior Overview

Hood .................................................................................................................. page 3-43

Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 8-27

Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-44

Door lock ........................................................................................................... page 3-26

Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-42

Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-33

Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I


1-5




Exterior Overview

Rear

Black plate (12,1)

Liftgate .............................................................................................................. page 3-28

Rear wiper blade ................................................................................................ page 8-29

Rear window antenna ........................................................................................ page 6-17

Child safety lock ................................................................................................ page 3-28

Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-57

Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-33

Navigation System (if equipped) .......................................... Refer to the separate manual

Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-37

Rear view parking camera (if equipped) .............................. Refer to the separate manual

1-6


Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (13,1)

2


Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.

Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2

Front Seats (Manually Operated Seats) ..................................... 2-2

Front Seats (Electrically Operated Seats) .................................. 2-5

Second-Row Seats ................................................................... 2-11

Third-Row Seat ....................................................................... 2-16

Seat Belt Systems ........................................................................ 2-18

Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-18

3-Point Type Seat Belt ............................................................ 2-22

Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ....... 2-24

Center-Rear Position Seat Belt (Second-Row Seats) .............. 2-27

Seat Belt Extender ................................................................... 2-30

Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep ................................................ 2-32

Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-34

Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-34

Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-38

LATCH Child-Restraint Systems ............................................ 2-45

SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-50

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions ................ 2-50

Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-55

How the SRS Air Bags Work .................................................. 2-56

SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .......................................... 2-60

Limitations to SRS Air Bag .................................................... 2-61

Driver and Front Passenger Occupant Classification

System ..................................................................................... 2-63

Monitoring and Maintenance .................................................. 2-68

2-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (14,1)


Seats

Front Seats (Manually

Operated Seats)

WARNING

Do not modify or replace the front seats:

Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the supplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplemental restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.

Do not drive with damaged front seats:

Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong enough to inflate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy which could lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized

Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats, front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.

Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:

Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In a sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make sure the adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat forward and backward and rocking the seatback.

qSeat Slide

WARNING

Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is stopped:

Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired position and release the lever.

Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward.

2-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (15,1)


Seats

qSeat Recline

WARNING

Do not drive with the seats reclined:

Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you don't get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright.

Always sit in a passenger seat properly with the seatback upright and feet on the floor:

If your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors, sitting in the front passenger seat improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far while the vehicle is moving is dangerous as it can take off weight from the seat bottom and affect the weight determination of the front passenger sensing system. As a result the front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bag and seat belt pretensioner, which could cause result in serious injury.

Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:

The seatback plays an important role in your protection in a vehicle.

Leaving the seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers, rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever.

Then lean back to the desired position and release the lever.

Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward.

2-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (16,1)


Seats

CAUTION

When returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright position, make sure you hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the seatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.

qHeight Adjustment (Driver's Seat)

By moving the seat lever up or down, the seat bottom height can be adjusted.

Up

qHead Restraint

WARNING

Always drive with the head restraints installed when seats are being used and make sure they are properly adjusted:

Driving with the head restraints adjusted too low or removed is dangerous. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the desired position.

To lower the head restraint, press the stopcatch release, then push the head restraint down.

Down

qLumbar Support Adjustment

(Driver's Seat)

To increase the seat firmness, pull the lever forward. Push the lever backward to decrease firmness.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top is even with the top of the passenger's ears, never the passenger's neck to prevent injury.

2-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (17,1)


Seats

Front Seats (Electrically

Operated Seats)

WARNING

Do not modify or replace the front seats:

Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the supplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplemental restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.

Do not drive with damaged front seats:

Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong enough to inflate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy which could lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized

Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats, front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.

CAUTION

Ø The seat-bottom power adjustment is operated by motors.

Avoid extended operation because excessive use can damage the motors.

Ø To prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjustment when the engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a large amount of electrical power.

Ø Don't use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time.

qSeat Slide

To slide the seat, move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or back and hold it. Release the switch at the desired position.

2-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (18,1)


Seats

qSeat Recline

WARNING


Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you don't get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright.

Always sit in a front passenger seat properly with the seatback upright and feet on the floor:

If your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors, sitting in the front passenger seat improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far while the vehicle is moving is dangerous as it can take off weight from the seat bottom and affect the weight determination of the front passenger sensing system. As a result the front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bag and seat belt pretensioner, which could cause result in serious injury.

Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

Change the seatback angle by pressing the front or rear side of the reclining switch.

Release the switch at the desired position.

qHeight Adjustment (Driver's Seat)

The seat height can be adjusted by moving the switch up or down.

2-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (19,1)


Seats

qSeat Position Memory (Driver's

Seat)

í

One-touch seat position programming and call up is available on the driver's seat.

CAUTION

When calling up the seat position, do not place your hands or fingers around the seat bottom. The seat moves to the desired position automatically, and if your hands or fingers are placed around the seat bottom, it could cause injury.

Set button

Programming of the driver's seat positions is possible using the following functions: l

Programming buttons

― and the set button.

l

Operation using the advanced key/ retractable type key

Programmed seat positions can also be called up using the following functions: l

Programming buttons

― .

l


NOTE

Individual seat positions can be programmed to the number of programming buttons 3 available on the side of the driver's seat, plus one seat position for each advanced key/ retractable type key used with the vehicle.

Operation using the seat-side buttons

Programming

Seat position programming is possible when the vehicle is parked.

1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.

For each seat position adjustment method refer to the following pages:

Seat Slide (page 2-5)

Seat Recline (page 2-6)

Height Adjustment (page 2-6)

2. Press the desired programming button

― while pressing the set button until a beep sound is heard.

NOTE

Vehicle maintenance or other reasons requiring the vehicle battery to be disconnected will result in the seat position memory being erased.

In this case, re-program the seat positions.

Seat position call up

With the ignition switch in the LOCK position, and the driver's door open, press the programming button

― that has been programmed to the desired seat position.

í

Some models.

2-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (20,1)


Seats

NOTE l

Seat positions can also be called up with the ignition switch in the ON position and l l l the door closed by pressing and holding the programming button

― that has been programmed to the desired seat position.

l

If any of the following occurs, the seat position call up function cancels:

A seat adjustment switch is operated.

The vehicle is moving or starts to move.

The selected programming button

― or the set button is pressed again.


With advanced key

Lock button

Auxiliary key

Unlock button

With retractable type key

Lock button

Unlock button

Programming

One seat position can be programmed into each advanced key/retractable type key.

After the following conditions have been met, operate the seat and the advanced key/retractable type key to program the seat positions.

l

The engine switch is in the LOCK l position

(The auxiliary key/retractable type key is removed from the ignition switch)

The driver's door is open

1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.

For each seat position adjustment method, refer to the following pages:

Seat Slide (page 2-5)

Seat Recline (page 2-6)

Height Adjustment (page 2-6)

2. If the driver's door is closed, open it.

3. Press and hold the unlock button of the advanced key/retractable type key while pressing the set button until a beep sound is heard.

Seat position call up

Unlock the doors using the unlock button on the advanced key/retractable type key, and open the driver's door.

Erasing memory

After the following conditions have been met, press and hold the lock button of the advanced key/retractable type key while pressing the set button until a beep sound is heard.

l

The engine switch is in the LOCK l position

(The auxiliary key/retractable type key is removed from the ignition switch)

The driver's door is open

2-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (21,1)


Seats

NOTE

Memory will also be erased if any of the following operations are performed: l l

The advanced key/retractable type key code has been changed.

Refer to Immobilizer System (with

Advanced Key) on page 3-50.

Refer to Immobilizer System (without

Advanced Key) on page 3-52.

Refer to Immobilizer System on page 3-52.

The vehicle battery is disconnected for vehicle maintenance or other reasons.

qLumbar Support Adjustment

(Driver's Seat)

Manually operated

To increase the seat firmness, pull the lever forward. Push the lever backward to decrease firmness.

Electrically operated

The amount of lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the switch.

To increase the seat firmness, press and hold the front part of the switch to the desired position, then release it.

Press the rear part of the switch to decrease firmness.

qHead Restraint

WARNING



2-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (22,1)


Seats

To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the desired position.


NOTE

The seat temperature is regulated automatically by a thermostat. Other than turning it on or off, it cannot be adjusted.


qSeat Warmer

í

The front seats are electrically heated. The ignition switch must be in the ON position.

Press the switch to turn the seat warmer on or off. When the switch is in the ON position, the indicator light will come on.

2-10

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (23,1)


Seats

Second-Row Seats

WARNING

Do not stack cargo higher than the seatback:

Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatback is dangerous. During a sudden stop or collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles that could hit and injure passengers.

Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:

Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during sudden braking or a collision and cause injury.

Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat forward and backward and rocking the seatback:

Adjustable seats that are not securely latched are dangerous. In a sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury.

Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stopped:

Adjusting the seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Sudden braking or a collision could cause serious injury.



Leaving the seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers, rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving:

Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous.

Allowing a child to sit up on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a sudden stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint system and seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown into other occupants and cause serious injury.

NOTE

The second-row seats cannot be removed.

2-11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (24,1)


Seats

qSeat Slide

To move the seat forward or backward, raise the bar and slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar.

Make sure the bar returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward.

qSeat Recline

WARNING


Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you don't get the full protection from the seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright.

Do not recline a second-row seatback when the third row seat is occupied:

Reclining the second-row seatback when the third-row seat is occupied is dangerous.Because the clearance in the third-row seat is limited, occupants in the third-row seat could be hurt seriously on a reclined second-row seatback.

To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while pulling the lever.

Then lean back to the desired position and release the lever.

2-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by attempting to push it forward and backward.



Black plate (25,1)


Seats

CAUTION

When returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright position, make sure you hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the seatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.

qHead Restraint

Rear outboard seat

WARNING



Height adjustment

To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the locked position.



Rear center seat

WARNING



To use a head restraint, pull it up to the locked position.


2-13

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (26,1)


Seats

qArmrest

The armrest can be used (no occupant in the center seat) or placed upright.

qThird-Row Seat Access

After folding the second-row seat seatback and sliding the seat forward, you can access the third-row seat easily.

Entering/exiting the third-row seat area

Raise the lever on the side of the secondrow seat to fold the seatback forward and slide the seat forward.

After entering/exiting the third-row seat area

1. Return the second-row seatback to its upright position and lock it after sliding it backward. Make sure it is locked by attempting to lightly move it forward and backward.

2. Make sure that the center-rear seat belt is routed properly (not under the head restraint) and the seat belt guide is snapped to the head restraint.

CAUTION

Ø When folding a seatback, always hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the seatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.

Ø After entering/exiting the thirdrow seat area, return the seatback to its upright position. Otherwise, it could move unexpectedly and cause injury.

qFolding the Second-Row Seats

To create a flat luggage compartment space, fold the seatbacks forward.

Folding the seatbacks

1. Unfasten the lap portion of the center-

rear seat belt (page 2-29) and stow it into the ceiling recess (page 2-29).

CAUTION

Always unfasten the lap portion of the belt before folding the rear-left seatback. Leaving the lap portion of the belt fastened could cause damage to the seat belt, buckle and seatback.

2-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (27,1)

2. Slide the seat all the way back toward the rear of the vehicle.

3. Lower the head restraints all the way

down (page 2-13).

4. Pull the lever and fold the seatback forward.


Seats

NOTE

To create a flat luggage compartment space from the rear of the vehicle to the back of the front seats, fold the second-row and third-row

seats (page 2-17).

CAUTION

When folding a seatback, always hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever.

If the seatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.

Returning seatbacks to their original positions

1. Lift the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is secured by attempting to lightly move it forward and back.

2. Route the center-rear seat belt through the seat belt guide and fasten it. Check that all seat belts are routed properly

for passenger use (page 2-27).

2-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (28,1)


Seats

Third-Row Seat

WARNING

Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:

Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. During a sudden stop or collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles that could hit and injure passengers.



Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place by attempting to rock the seatback:

Adjustable seats that are not securely latched are dangerous. In a sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury.



Leaving the seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe injury. After returning the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers, rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving:

Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous.

Allowing a child to sit up on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a sudden stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint system and seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown into other occupants and cause serious injury.

qHead Restraint

WARNING

Always drive with the head restraints set up when the rear center seat is being used and make sure they are properly set up:

Driving with the head restraints not set up is dangerous. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

2-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (29,1)


Seats

To use a head restraint, pull it up to the locked position.


NOTE

To create a flat luggage compartment space from the rear of the vehicle to the back of the front seats, fold the second-row and third-row

seats (page 2-14).

qSplit-Folding the Third-Row Seat

To create a flat luggage compartment space, fold the seatbacks forward.

To fold third-row seat

1. Lower the head restraints all the way

down (page 2-16).

2. Pull the strap and fold the seatback forward.

To return third-row seat to its original position

1. Return the seatback to its original position by pulling its strap.

Make sure the seatback is secured by attempting to lightly move it forward and back.

2. Hold the board and fasten the strap to its original position.

3. Fasten the strap to its original position.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

2-17



Black plate (30,1)


Seat Belt Systems

Seat Belt Precautions

Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.

Your vehicle has the following types of seat belts.

Seating Position

Front seat

Driver side

Passenger side

Second-row seat

Third-row seat

Types of seat belt

3-point type seat belt with emergency locking mode retractor

3-point type seat belt with emergency locking mode retractor/automatic locking mode retractor

3-point type seat belt with emergency locking mode retractor

This belt has retractors with an inertia lock that keep the belt retracted when not in use.

The lock allows the belt to remain comfortable on the user, but it will lock in position during a collision.

Refer to Emergency Locking Mode on page 2-20.

3-point type seat belt with emergency locking mode retractor/automatic locking mode retractor

In addition to the emergency locking mode function, this belt has retractors that operate in another mode, the automatic locking mode, for the child-restraint system.

Refer to Automatic Locking Mode on page 2-21.

Refer to Installing Child-Restraint Systems on page 2-38.

We recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.

2-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (31,1)


Seat Belt Systems

WARNING

Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:

Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.

Do not wear twisted seat belts:

Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt, which could cause serious injury or death.

Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:

Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly restrained.

Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:

Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during an accident before they are used again.

Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been expended:

One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may also deploy at the same time. While it is safer to use a crash-used seat belt that was used in an accident than no seat belt at all, using a seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only function once. After they are expended, they will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the seat belt pretensioners are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision. Expended seat belt pretensioners and air bags must be replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will only limit loads on the chest once in a collision and this is another reason to have the front seat belts inspected.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

2-19

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (32,1)


Seat Belt Systems

CAUTION

Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to

“Cleaning the

Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing

” (page 8-58).

qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions

Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.

The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the stomach area.

Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.

qEmergency Locking Mode

In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return to the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it around you again.

2-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (33,1)


Seat Belt Systems

qAutomatic Locking Mode

Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode, pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child

restraint (page 2-34).

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

2-21



Black plate (34,1)


Seat Belt Systems

3-Point Type Seat Belt

NOTE

When using the center-rear seat belt, refer to

“Center-Rear Position Seat Belt” (page 2-27).

qFastening the Seat Belt

1. Grasp the tongue.

2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.

Belt

Tongue

WARNING

Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the

Seat Belt:

Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous.

Always make sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder and near your neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.

4. Position the lap belt as low as possible, not on the abdominal area, then adjust the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly against your body.

Take up slack

Keep low on hip bone

3. Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a click.

Too high

Buckle

Tongue WARNING

Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat

Belt:

The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.

2-22

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (35,1)

qUnfastening the Seat Belt

Depress the button on the buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.


Seat Belt Systems

qShoulder Belt Adjuster

í

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt if the seat belt touches your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder.

To raise the shoulder belt adjuster, push the adjuster up. To lower the shoulder belt adjuster, pull the adjuster and slide it down. Make sure the adjuster is locked.

To raise To lower

Button

NOTE

If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting properly, have it inspected at an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

To secure the outboard-third seat belts when not in use, insert the belts in their seat belt retainers.

WARNING


Seat Belt:



í

Some models.

2-23

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (36,1)


Seat Belt Systems

Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems

For optimum protection, the driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioner and load limiting systems. For both these systems to work properly you must wear the seat belt properly.

Pretensioners:

The front seat belt retractors remove slack quickly as the air bags are expanding.

For deployment details, refer to the SRS

Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-60).

In addition, the pretensioner system for the front passenger, like the front passenger air bag, is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. Any time the air bags and seat belt pretensioners have fired they must be replaced. For details, refer to the driver and front passenger occupant

classification system (page 2-63).

Load limiter:

The load limiting system releases belt webbing in a controlled manner to reduce belt force on the occupant's chest. While the most severe load on a seat belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load limiter has an automatic mechanical function and can activate in any accident mode with sufficient occupant movement.

Even if the pretensioners have not fired, the load limiting function must be checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

WARNING

Wear seat belts only as recommended in this owner's manual:

Incorrect positioning of the driver and front passenger seat belts is dangerous. Without proper positioning, the pretensioner and load limiting systems cannot provide adequate protection in an accident and this could result in serious injury.

For more details about wearing seat belts, refer to

“Fastening the seat belts

” (page 2-22).

2-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (37,1)


Seat Belt Systems

Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been expended:

One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may also deploy at the same time. While it is safer to use a crash-used seat belt that was used in an accident than no seat belt at all, using a seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only function once.

After they are expended, they will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the seat belt pretensioners are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase. Always have an Authorized

Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision. Expended seat belt pretensioners and air bags must be replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will only limit loads on the chest once in a collision and this is another reason to have the front seat belts inspected.

Do not modify the components or wiring, or use electronic testing devices on the pretensioner system:

Modifying the components or wiring of the pretensioner system, including the use of electronic testing devices is dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable which would prevent it from activating in an accident. The occupants or repairers could be seriously injured.

Properly dispose of the pretensioner system:

Improper disposal of the pretensioner system or a vehicle with nondeactivated pretensioners is dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Ask an Authorized Mazda

Dealer how to safely dispose of the pretensioner system or how to scrap a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.

NOTE l

The pretensioner system will activate in a l moderate or severe frontal, near-frontal collision or roll-over accident. The pretensioner system for the front passenger is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. It will not activate in most side or rear impacts.

Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be released when the air bags and pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate a fire. This gas normally has no effect on occupants, however, those with sensitive skin may experience light skin irritation. If residue from the deployment of the air bags or the front pretensioner system gets on the skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as possible.

2-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (38,1)


Seat Belt Systems

qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt

Pretensioner System Warning Light

If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system is working properly, the warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is cranked. The warning light turns off after a specified period of time.

A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If any of these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work in an accident.

WARNING

Never tamper with the air bag/ pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:

Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/ pretensioner could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.

qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt

Pretensioner System Warning Beep

If a malfunction is detected in both the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system and the warning light, a warning beep sound will be heard for about 1 minute.

After that, the one-minute beep will be repeated every 30 minutes.

Have your vehicle inspected at an

Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding:

Driving the vehicle with the air bag/ front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding is dangerous.

In a collision, the air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy and this could result in death or serious injury.

Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible.

2-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (39,1)

Center-Rear Position Seat

Belt (Second-Row Seats)

Before using the center-rear lap/shoulder belt make sure tongue (A) and anchor buckle (B) are fastened.

(A)

(B)


Seat Belt Systems

WARNING

Using the Seat Belt Guide:

Not using the seat belt guide is dangerous. If the seat belt guide is not used, the shoulder portion of the center-rear seat belt could be mistakenly positioned under the head restraint; position that cannot provide adequate protection in a collision and could result in the center-rear passenger being seriously injured or killed. Always make sure the shoulder portion of the centerrear seat belt is on the right side of the left-rear head restraint and guided correctly through the seat belt guide.

Seat belt guide

qFastening the Seat Belt

1. Grasp the tongue (C).

2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.

2-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (40,1)


Seat Belt Systems

3. Insert the tongue (C) into the buckle

(D) until you hear a click.

(C) (A)

(D) (B)

WARNING

Fastening the Center-Rear Seat Belt with Only One Buckle:

Fastening the center-rear seat belt with only one buckle is dangerous. If only one pair of seat belt tongue and buckle, either tongue (A) and anchor buckle (B) or tongue (C) and anchor buckle (D), is fastened, the seat belt cannot provide full protection. In a sudden stop or collision, the user could slide under the belt and suffer serious injuries. Always make sure that both pairs of seat belt tongues and buckles are fastened properly.


Seat Belt:



4. Position the lap belt as low as possible, not on the abdominal area, then adjust the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly against your body.

WARNING

Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat

Belt:

The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.

qUnfastening the Seat Belt

Depress the button on the buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Button

NOTE

If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting properly, have it inspected at an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

2-28

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (41,1)


Seat Belt Systems

qUnfastening the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt

Insert a small object such as a key in the anchor buckle (B) slot.

(A)

(B)

CAUTION

Always unfasten the lap portion of the belt before folding the left-rear seatback. Leaving the lap portion of the belt fastened could cause damage to the seat belt, buckle and seatback.

NOTE

To encourage rear seat passengers to wear their seat belts, we suggest leaving the centerrear lap position of the belt fastened at all times except when folding the rear seat forward.

qFastening the Lap Portion of the

Seat Belt

Grasp tongue (A) and insert it into the anchor buckle (B) until you hear a click. It is now secure for passenger use.

NOTE

After returning the left-rear seatback to its upright position, guide the shoulder portion of the belt correctly through the seat belt guide and fasten the lap portion of the belt.

qStowing and pulling out the

Center-Rear Position Seat Belt

The center-rear position seat belt can be stowed using the following procedure.

CAUTION

When stowing the seat belt, make sure the belt is locked securely into the recess. If the seat belt is not properly stowed, it might get caught in the seats and be damaged.

To stow the seat belt, retract the belt, put tongues (A) and (C) together and insert each tongue into the respective ceiling recess. Insert the tongues until you hear a click.

Ceiling recess

(A)

(C)

2-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (42,1)


Seat Belt Systems

To pull out the seat belt, press the area indicated in the figure upward with your finger and slide the belt forward. Then slowly pull out the seat belt from the ceiling recess.

Seat Belt Extender

If your seat belt is not long enough, even when fully extended, a seat belt extender may be available to you at no charge from your Authorized Mazda Dealer.

This extender will be only for you and for the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold in the critical moment of a crash.

When ordering an extender, only order one that provides the necessary additional length to fasten the seat belt properly.

Please contact your Authorized Mazda

Dealer for more information.

NOTE

Pulling out the seat belt all the way out will switch it to automatic locking mode. If automatic locking mode is not needed, retract the seat belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode.

2-30

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (43,1)


Seat Belt Systems

WARNING

Do not use a seat belt extender unless it is necessary:

Using a seat belt extender when not necessary is dangerous. The seat belt will be too long and not fit properly.

In an accident, the seat belt will not provide adequate protection and you could be seriously injured. Only use the extender when it is required to fasten the seat belt properly.

Do not use an improper extender:

Using a seat belt extender that is for another person or a different vehicle or seat is dangerous. The seat belt will not provide adequate protection and the user could be seriously injured in an accident. Only use the extender provided for you and for the particular vehicle and seat. NEVER use the extender in a different vehicle or seat.

Do not use an extender that is too long:

Using an extender that is too long is dangerous. The seat belt will not fit properly. In an accident, the seat belt will not provide adequate protection and you could be seriously injured.

Do not use the extender or choose one shorter in length if the distance between the extender's buckle and the center of the user's body is less than 15cm (6 in).

NOTE

When not in use, remove the seat belt extender and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt extender is left connected, the seat belt extender might get damaged as it will not retract with the rest of the seat belt and can easily fall out of the door when not in use and be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning light will not illuminate and function properly.

2-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (44,1)


Seat Belt Systems

Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep

The seat belt warning light illuminates and a beep sound will be heard if the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Conditions of operation

Condition

The driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The driver's seat belt is fastened while the warning light and the beep sound are activated.

The driver's seat belt is fastened before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Result

The warning light flashes and a beep sound will be heard for about 6 seconds.

The warning light turns off and the beep sound stops.

The warning light will not illuminate and the beep sound will not be heard.

qBelt Minder

NOTE

The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate and restore the seat belt minder.

Driver seated/Front passenger not seated

The belt minder is a supplemental warning to the seat belt warning function.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, the warning light/beep operates to give you further reminders according to the chart below.

Condition

Vehicle speed

Between 0

― 20 km/h

(0

― 12 mph)

20 km/h

(12 mph) or more

Seat belt

Indicator

Beep

: Fastened

: Unfastened

: Illuminated

: Flashing

: Beep

Once the beep sound is heard, it continues sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound period has passed.

2-32

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Driver seated/Front passenger seated

The seat belt warning function reminds the front passenger to fasten the seat belt according to the chart below.

Condition

Vehicle speed

Between 0

― 20 km/h

(0

― 12 mph)

20 km/h

(12 mph) or more

Seat belt

(Driver)

Seat belt

(Passenger)

Indicator

Beep

: Fastened

: Unfastened

: Illuminated

: Flashing

: Beep


NOTE l

To allow the front passenger seat weight l sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.

Placing packages, luggage, pets or other items on the front passenger seat may cause the front passenger seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item.

Black plate (45,1)


Seat Belt Systems

2-33

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (46,1)


Child Restraint

Child Restraint Precautions

Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use them.

You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.

Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children riding in your vehicle.

Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual child-restraint system.

A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts, both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the child is seated on the center seat.

Statistics confirm that the rear seats are the best place for all children up to 12 years of age, and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).

A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other child-restraint systems.

To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, your vehicle is equipped with the front passenger seat weight sensors. These sensors deactivate the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).

When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front passenger air bag, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.

Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear seats which are the best place for children.

For more details, refer to

“Front passenger seat weight sensors” (page 2-63).

2-34

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (47,1)


Child Restraint

WARNING

Use the correct size child-restraint system:

For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system buckled down:

An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint systems, and attach the corresponding tether anchor.

Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:

Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.

Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy:

Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.

The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.

2-35

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (48,1)


Child Restraint

Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless it is unavoidable:

In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as back as possible.

Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous:

Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors. Even with front passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat to seat a child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the childrestraint system.

Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint system.

Ø A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger seatback.

Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.

Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.

Ø The seat is washed.

Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.

Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items placed behind it.

Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the second-row seat.

Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.

Ø Any accessories increasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.

2-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (49,1)


Child Restraint

Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with side and curtain air bags:

It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint system is used. If the vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bags, the impact of inflation could cause serious injury or death to the child. Furthermore, leaning over or against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location for children. Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.

Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:

Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly restrained.

CAUTION

A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your child touches them.

NOTE

Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system, refer to

“LATCH Child-Restraint Systems” (page 2-45).

2-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (50,1)


Child Restraint

Installing Child-Restraint

Systems

Accident statistics reveal that a child is safer in the rear seats. The front passenger's seat is clearly the worst choice for any child under 12, and with rearfacing child-restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to air bags.

Some child-restraint systems now come with tethers and therefore must be installed on the seats that take tethers to be effective. In your Mazda, tethered child-restraint systems can only be accommodated in the three positions on the second-row seats.

Even if your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors (page

2-63), which automatically deactivates the

front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the safest place for a child of any age or size.

Some child-restraint systems also employ specially designed LATCH attachments; refer to

“LATCH Child-Restraint

Systems

” (page 2-45).

WARNING

Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work

Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:

Installation of a tether equipped child-restraint system in the front passenger's seat or the third-row seats defeats the safety design of the system and will result in an increased chance of serious injury if the childrestraint system goes forward without benefit of being tethered.

Place tether equipped child-restraint systems where there are tether anchors.

2-38

qSecond-Row Seats Child-

Restraint System Installation

Follow these instructions when using a child-restraint system, unless you are attaching a LATCH-equipped childrestraint system to the rear LATCH lower anchors. Refer to

“LATCH Child-

Restraint Systems

” (page 2-45).

NOTE

Follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you are not sure whether you have a LATCH system or tether, check in the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions and follow them accordingly. Depending on the type of child-restraint system, it may not employ seat belts which are in automatic locking mode.

1. When installing the child-restraint system on the second-row seat, make sure that the center-rear seat belt is routed through the seat belt guide.

2. Make sure the seatback is securely latched by pushing it back until it is fully locked.

3. Secure the child-restraint system with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

See the manufacturer's instructions on the child-restraint system for belt routing instructions.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (51,1)


Child Restraint

4. To get the retractor into the automatic locking mode, pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt until the entire length of the belt is out of the retractor.

NOTE

Inspect this function before each use of the child-restraint system. You should not be able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while the system is in the automatic locking mode. When you remove the child-restraint system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts.

6. If your child-restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, refer to the manufacturer's instructions to hook and tighten the tether strap after raising the head restraint.

Anchor bracket location

5. Push the child-restraint system firmly into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking from the retractor will be heard during retraction if the system is in the automatic locking mode. If the belt does not lock the seat down tight, repeat this step.

Tether strap position

Tether strap

Forward

2-39

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (52,1)


Child Restraint

WARNING

Use the tether and tether anchor only for a child-restraint system:

Using the tether or tether anchor to secure anything but a child-restraint system is dangerous. This could weaken or damage the tether or tether anchor and result in injury.

Always route the tether strap between the head restraint and the seatback:

Routing the tether strap on top of the head restraint is dangerous. In a collision the tether strap could slide off the head restraint and loosen the child-restraint system. The childrestraint system could move which may result in death or injury to the child.

Always attach the tether strap to the correct tether anchor position:

Attaching the tether strap to the incorrect tether anchor position is dangerous. In a collision, the tether strap could come off and loosen the child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result in death or injury to the child.

qThird-Row Seats Child-Restraint

System Installation

The third-row seats cannot accommodate

LATCH-type child-restraint systems or tethers, therefore these systems must be installed on the other seat positions such as the second-row seat. If this not possible, LATCH-type child-restraint systems or tethers should be installed using seat belts depending on whether the child-restraint manufacturer allows their use without LATCH attachments and tether anchors.

Follow these manufacturer's instructions when using a child-restraint system.

NOTE

Follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions carefully.

Depending on the type of child-restraint system, it may not employ seat belts which are in automatic locking mode.



2-40

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (53,1)


Child Restraint


3. Push the child-restraint system firmly into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking from the retractor will be heard during retraction if the system is in the automatic locking mode. If the belt does not lock the seat down tight, repeat this step.

NOTE

Inspect this function before each use of the child-restraint system. You should not be able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while the system is in the automatic locking mode. When you remove the child-restraint system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts.

qIf You Must Use the Front Seat for Children

If you cannot put all children in the rear seats, at least put the smallest children in the rear and be sure the largest child up front uses the shoulder belt over the shoulder.

NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, even with a seat weight sensor equipped vehicle.

This seat is also not set up for tethered child-restraint systems, put them in one of the rear seat positions set up with tether anchors.

Likewise the LATCH child-restraint system cannot be secured in the front passenger's seat and should be used in the second-row seats.

Don't allow anyone to sleep against the side window if you have an optional side and curtain air bag, it could cause serious injuries to an out of position occupant. As children more often sleep in cars, it is better to put them in the rear seat. If installing the child-restraint system on the front seat is unavoidable, follow these instructions when using a front-facing child-restraint system in the front passenger's seat.

2-41

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (54,1)


Child Restraint

NOTE l

To check if your front seats have side air bags: l

Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag will have a

“SRS AIRBAG” tag on the outboard shoulder of the front seats.

To check if your vehicle has curtain air bags:

Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air bag will have an

“SRS AIRBAG” marking on the window pillars along the roof edge.

WARNING

Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible if installing a front-facing child-restraint system on it is unavoidable:

As your vehicle has front air bags and doubly so if your vehicle has side air bags, a front-facing childrestraint system should be put on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable.

Even if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the child.


Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous.

Even in a moderate collision, the child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.

Even though you may feel assured that the front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.

Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with side and curtain air bags:

It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint system is used. If the vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bags, the impact of inflation could cause serious injury or death to the child. Furthermore, leaning over or against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location for children. Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.

2-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (55,1)


Child Restraint

qFront Passenger's Seat Child-

Restraint System Installation

1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.




4. Push the child-restraint system firmly into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking from the retractor will be heard during retraction if the system is in automatic locking mode. If the belt does not lock the seat down tight, repeat the previous step and also this one.

NOTE l

Inspect this function before each use of the child-restraint system. You should not be l able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while the system is in the automatic locking mode. When you remove the child-restraint system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts.

Follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions carefully.

Depending on the type of child-restraint system, it may not employ seat belts which are in automatic locking mode.

5. Make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates after installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat.

Refer to Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on page

2-63.

2-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Child Restraint

WARNING

Do not seat a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminated:

While it is always better to install any child-restraint system on the rear seat, it is imperative that a childrestraint system ONLY be used on the front passenger seat if the deactivation indicator light illuminates when the child is seated in the child-restraint system (page

2-63). Seating a child in a child-

restraint system installed on the front passenger seat with the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light not illuminated is dangerous. If this indicator light does not illuminate even when the total seated weight is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb), this means that the front passenger front and side air bags, and seat belt pretensioner are ready for deployment. If an accident were to deploy an air bag, a child in a childrestraint system sitting in the front passenger seat could be seriously injured or killed. If the indicator light does not illuminate after seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, seat a child in a child-restraint system on the rear seat and consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

2-44

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Black plate (56,1)



Black plate (57,1)


Child Restraint

LATCH Child-Restraint Systems

Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed

LATCH child-restraint systems the second-row seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH childrestraint systems must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you must use it to better assure your child's safety.

WARNING

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:

An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions.

Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:

Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.

In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint system attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the seat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is occupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.

Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:

An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint systems.

Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH childrestraint system:

Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.

2-45

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (58,1)


Child Restraint

qLATCH Child-Restraint System

Installation Procedure (Second-

Row Outboard Seats)

1. Slide the second-row seat as far back as possible.


3. Expand the area between the seat bottom and the seatback slightly to verify the locations of the LATCH lower anchors.

For rear left seat

Anchor bracket location


Tether strap

Forward

For rear right seat

NOTE

The markings above the LATCH lower anchors indicate the locations of LATCH lower anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint system.

4. Secure the child-restraint system using

BOTH LATCH lower anchors, following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instruction.

5. If your child-restraint system came equipped with a tether, that probably means it is very important to properly secure the tether for child safety. Please carefully follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing tethers.

2-46

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (59,1)

WARNING








Child Restraint

qLATCH Child-Restraint System

Installation Procedure (Second-

Row Center Seat)

The LATCH lower anchors at the center of the rear seat are much further apart than the sets of LATCH lower anchors for child-restraint system installation at other seating positions. Child-restraint systems with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed on the center seating position.

Some LATCH equipped child-restraint systems can be placed in the center position and will reach the nearest

LATCH lower anchors which are 500 mm

(19.7 in) apart. LATCH compatible childrestraint systems (with attachments on belt webbing) can be used at this seating position only if the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions state that the child-restraint system can be installed to

LATCH lower anchors that are 500 mm

(19.7 in) apart. Do not attach two childrestraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor. If your child-restraint system has a tether, it must also be used for your child's optimum safety.

1. Slide the second-row seat as far back as possible.


2-47

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Child Restraint

3. Expand the area between the seat bottom and the seatback slightly to verify the locations of the LATCH lower anchors.

Black plate (60,1)

Anchor bracket position

NOTE

The markings above the LATCH lower anchors indicate the locations of LATCH lower anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint system.

4. Secure the child-restraint system using

BOTH LATCH lower anchors, following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.

5. If your child-restraint system came equipped with a tether, that probably means it is very important to properly secure the tether for child safety. Please carefully follow the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing tethers.


Tether strap

Forward

2-48

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



WARNING







Black plate (61,1)


Child Restraint

2-49

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (62,1)


SRS Air Bags

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions

The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Please verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the

“SRS

AIRBAG

” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags are installed.

The air bags are installed in the following locations: l l l l

The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)

The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)

The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)

The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)

The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:

Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.

Seat belt usage is necessary to: l l

Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.

Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag l inflation, such as rear impact.

Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal, side collisions or roll-over accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags.

l l l

Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.

Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.

Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with a driver and front passenger occupant classification system. For details, refer to the driver and front passenger occupant

classification system (page 2-63).

Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint

system (page 2-34).

Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.

2-50

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (63,1)


SRS Air Bags

WARNING

Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:

Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.

Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be expected to inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal, side collisions or roll-over accident that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.

Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:

Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. Even if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. A sleeping child is more likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in a moderate, right-side collision. Whenever possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and size.


Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.

The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.

Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:

Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.

2-51

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (64,1)


SRS Air Bags

Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:

Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them and sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The side and curtain air bags inflate with great force and speed directly expand along the door on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.

Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air bags deploy:

Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.

Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:

Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.

Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.

Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:

Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.

Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free to deploy in the event of a side collision or roll-over accident.

Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:

Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats.

2-52

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (65,1)


SRS Air Bags

Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have inflated:

Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could get burned.

Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:

Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar, bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.

Front occupants could be seriously injured.

Do not modify the suspension:

Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.

Do not use tires or wheels other than those specified for your Mazda:

Use of any tire or wheel other than those specified for your Mazda (page 10-6) is

dangerous. Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle's accident detections system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.

Do not overload your vehicle:

Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as is could prevent the air bag crash sensor system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's door frame. Do not exceed these ratings.

Do not drive the vehicle off-road:

Driving your Mazda off-road is dangerous because the vehicle has not been designed to do such. Driving the vehicle off-road could prevent the air bag crash sensor system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.

2-53

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (66,1)


SRS Air Bags

Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:

Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim, badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda

Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and front passenger seat weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an undamaged air bag connection.

NOTE l

When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.

l

Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.

Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.

2-54

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (67,1)


SRS Air Bags

(1)

Supplemental Restraint System Components

(3)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(9)

(8)

(1) Driver seat slide position sensor (page 2-63)

(2) Side and curtain inflators and air bags

(3) Driver/Front passenger dual stage inflators and air bags

(4) Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 2-59)

(5) Crash and roll-over sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)

(6) Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-63)

(7) Front air bag sensor

(8) Side crash sensor

(9) Front seat belt pretensioner and load limiting systems (page 2-24)

(10) Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-63)

(11) Front passenger seat weight sensor control module

(12) Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-67)

(8)

(3)

2-55

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (68,1)


SRS Air Bags

How the SRS Air Bags Work

Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.

The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.

qFront Seat Belt Pretensioners

The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near frontal collisions or roll-over accidents.

qDriver Air Bag

The driver air bag is mounted in the steering wheels.

When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the driver's air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.

The driver, dual stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an impact of moderate severity the driver air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.

2-56

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (69,1)


SRS Air Bags

qFront Passenger Air Bag

The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.

The inflation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag, as mentioned above. In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the

driver and front passenger occupant classification system (page 2-63).

qSide Air Bags

The side bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.

When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the system inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side air bag inflates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window. In addition, the front passenger side air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the driver and front passenger occupant classification

system (page 2-63).

2-57

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (70,1)


SRS Air Bags

qCurtain Air Bags

The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides.

When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the curtain air bag inflates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard passenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.

In a side impact:

Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on that side only to inflate.

The only one side of curtain air bag will deploy only on the side the vehicle receives the force of the impact.

In a roll-over:

In response to a vehicle roll-over, both the curtain air bags inflate.

Both curtain air bags will deploy after the roll-over accident is detected.

2-58

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (71,1)


SRS Air Bags

qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light


A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If any of these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

The system may not work in an accident.

WARNING

Never tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized

Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:

Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.

qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep

If a malfunction is detected in both the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system and the warning light, a warning beep sound will be heard for about 1 minute. After that, the oneminute beep will be repeated every 30 minutes.

Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING


Driving the vehicle with the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a collision, the air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy and this could result in death or serious injury.


2-59

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (72,1)


SRS Air Bags

SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria

This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision.

(The illustrations are the representative case of collisions.)

A severe frontal/near frontal collision

Types of collision

A severe side collision

A roll-over/near roll-over

A rear collision

SRS equipment

Front seat belt pretensioner

Driver air bag

Front passenger air bag

Side air bag

Curtain air bag

X

*

(both sides)

X

X

*

X

*

(impact side only)

X (impact side only)

X

*

(both sides)

X (both sides)

No air bag and front seat belt pretensioner will be activated in a rear collision.

X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.

*

: The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy depending on the condition of the total seated weight on the front passenger seat.

2-60

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (73,1)


SRS Air Bags

Limitations to SRS Air Bag

In severe collisions or roll-overs such as those described previously in

“SRS Air Bag

Deployment Criteria

”, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents, the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.

Limitations to front/near front collision detection:

The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.

Impacts involving trees or poles Frontal offset impact to the vehicle

Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate

Limitations to side collision detection:

The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.

Side impacts involving trees or poles Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles

2-61

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (74,1)


SRS Air Bags

Limitations to roll-over detection:

The following illustrations are examples of accidents that may not be detected as a rollover accident. Therefore, the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not deploy.

Pitch end over end

2-62

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (75,1)


SRS Air Bags

Driver and Front Passenger Occupant Classification System

First, please read

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions” (page 2-50)

carefully.

qDriver Seat Slide Position Sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat position to the diagnostic module (SAS unit). The SAS unit is designed to control the deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering wheel.

The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a

possible malfunction (page 2-59)(Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning

Light).

qFront Passenger Seat Weight Sensors

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the supplemental restraint system. These sensors are located under both of the front passenger seat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. The

SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the total seated weight is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).

To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt pretensioner system when: l l

There is no passenger in the front passenger seat. (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate.)

The total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb). (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)

This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates according to the following table.

The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy.

2-63

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (76,1)


SRS Air Bags

Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light

This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.

If the front passenger weight sensors are normal, the indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. For a specified of time it goes out.

The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:

Total seated weight on the front passenger seat

Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light

Front passenger front and side air bags

OFF Deactivated

Front passenger seat belt pretensioner system

Deactivated Empty (Not occupied)

*

Less than approx. 30 kg

(66 lb)

Approx. 42 kg (93 lb) or more

ON

OFF

Deactivated

Ready

Deactivated

Ready

* If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, however this does not indicate a malfunction.

Curtain air bag is ready for inflating despite the chart above.

If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and does not illuminate as indicated in the above chart, do not allow a child to sit in the front passenger seat and consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

2-64

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (77,1)


SRS Air Bags

WARNING

Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:

When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lb) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury.

Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lb) could result in an air bag not deploying under the following conditions, for example:

Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with the feet.

Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat bottom.

Ø The front passenger seat occupant sits in a manner that does not place the entire weight of the occupant on the seat such as by sitting too close to the door, grasping the assist grip or the rim of the moonroof and sitting with the seatback reclined too far.

Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66 lb) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lb).

2-65

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (78,1)


SRS Air Bags

Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:

When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 30 kg (66 lb) is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately

30 kg (66 lb) could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions, for example:

Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint system.

Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.

Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with the feet.

Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.

Ø The seat is washed.

Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.

Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items placed behind it.

Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the second-row seat.

Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.

Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66 lb) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lb).

CAUTION

Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the sensors in the front seat bottoms:

Ø

Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on them.

Ø

Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.

Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:

Ø

Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.

Ø

If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page

2-43).

2-66

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (79,1)


SRS Air Bags

NOTE l

The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.

l l l

The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior changes suddenly.

The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.

If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child-restraint system on the rear seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

qDriver and Front Passenger Buckle Switches

The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

2-67



Black plate (80,1)


SRS Air Bags

Monitoring and Maintenance qConstant Monitoring

The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system: l l l l l l l l

SAS unit

Front air bag sensor

Air bag modules

Side crash sensors

Front seat belt pretensioners

Related wiring

Driver seat slide position sensor

Front passenger seat weight sensors

The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

qMaintenance

The air bag systems do not require regular maintenance. But if any of the following occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible: l

The air bag system warning light flashes.

l l l l l

The air bag system warning light remains illuminated.

The air bag system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The air bag system warning beep sound will be heard.

The air bags have deployed.

Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or does not illuminate as indicated in the chart. For more details about this indicator light and this chart, refer to

“Front passenger seat weight sensors

” (page 2-63).

2-68

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (81,1)


SRS Air Bags

WARNING

Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components:

Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a trained Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they will work in any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag or pretensioner unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any subsequent accident which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not remove interior air bag parts:

Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steering wheel or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, containing air bag parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air bag components. The air bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries.

Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer remove these parts.

Dispose of the air bag properly:

Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury can result. Ask an

Authorized Mazda Dealer how to safely dispose of an air bag or how to scrap an air bag equipped vehicle.

NOTE

If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to

“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)”

(page 9-2).

2-69

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (82,1)

2-70

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (83,1)

3

Knowing Your Mazda

Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment of various parts.

Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System ................................ 3-2

Advanced Keys

í

...................................................................... 3-2

Operation Using Advanced Keyless Functions ......................... 3-7

Operation Using Advanced Key Functions ............................. 3-13

Advanced Key Suspend Function ........................................... 3-16

Warning and Beep Sounds ...................................................... 3-16

Setting Change (Function Customization) .............................. 3-19

When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated ............................ 3-20

Doors and Locks ......................................................................... 3-21

Keys ........................................................................................ 3-21

Keyless Entry System

í

.......................................................... 3-22

Door Locks ............................................................................. 3-25

Liftgate .................................................................................... 3-28

Power Windows ...................................................................... 3-35

Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ........................................................... 3-42

Hood ....................................................................................... 3-43

Moonroof

í

............................................................................. 3-44

Security System ........................................................................... 3-50

Immobilizer System (with Advanced Key) ............................. 3-50

Immobilizer System (without Advanced Key) ........................ 3-52

Theft-Deterrent System

í

........................................................ 3-55

Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-57

Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-57

Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-57

í

Some models.

3-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (84,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System

Advanced Keys

í

The advanced keyless functions (advanced keyless entry and start system) enables the

following operations while the advanced key is being carried (page 3-7).

l l

Locking/unlocking the doors and the liftgate without operating the key.

Starting the engine without operating the key.

The advanced key enables additional functions other than those with the advanced keyless

functions (page 3-13).

l

The following operations are possible using the transmitter of the keyless entry system from a distance (Lock/Unlock/Panic/Liftgate

í button): l l l l

Locking/unlocking the doors and the liftgate.

Opening/closing the power liftgate

í

.

Opening the power windows and the moonroof.

Operating the theft-deterrent system

í

.

l l

Turning on the alarm.

Locking/unlocking the doors or starting the engine using the auxiliary key.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where your children will not find or play with them:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed. These new kinds of keys are fascinating to children. They could play with power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move.

Radio waves from the advanced key may affect medical equipment such as pacemakers:

Before using the advanced key near people who use medical equipment, ask the medical equipment manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the advanced key will affect the equipment.

NOTE l

The driver must carry the advanced key to ensure the system functions properly.

l l

Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-50) for information regarding keys and engine starting.

(With theft-deterrent system)

Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-55) for information regarding keys and the prevention of

vehicle and vehicle contents theft.

3-2

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (85,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


With power liftgate button

Panic button

Lock button

Unlock button

Power liftgate button

Auxiliary key

Operation indicator light

Key code number plate

Without power liftgate button

Panic button

Lock button

Unlock button

Auxiliary key



A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set; detach this plate and store it in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make a replacement key.

Also write down the code number and keep it in another safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

If your key is lost, consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer with the code number ready.

3-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (86,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


CAUTION

Ø Because the advanced key uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function correctly under the following conditions:

Ø

The advanced key is carried with communication devices such as cellular

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø phones.

The advanced key contacts or is covered by a metal object.

The advanced key is near electronic devices such as personal computers.

Non-Mazda genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle.

There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle.

If the vehicle is near equipment such as wireless pay devices installed at certain gas stations.

Ø The advanced key may consume battery power excessively if it receives highintensity radio waves. Do not place the advanced key near electronic devices such as televisions or personal computers.

Ø To avoid damage to the advanced key, DO NOT:

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Drop the advanced key.

Get the advanced key wet.

Disassemble the advanced key.

Expose the advanced key to high temperatures on places such as the

Ø

Ø

Ø dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.

Place heavy objects on the advanced key.

Put the advanced key in an ultrasonic cleaner.

Put any magnetized objects close to the advanced key.

NOTE l l

Battery life is about one year. Replace the battery when the KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster.

Refer to Advanced Key Battery Dead Warning on page 3-17.

Additional advanced keys can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 advanced keys can be used with the advanced keyless functions per vehicle.

3-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (87,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


qAdvanced Key Maintenance

CAUTION

Ø Make sure the battery is installed with the correct pole facing upward. Battery leakage could occur if it is not installed correctly.

Ø When replacing the battery, be careful not to bend the electrical terminals or get oil on them. Also be careful not to get dirt in the transmitter as it could be damaged.

Ø There is the danger of explosion if the battery is not correctly replaced.

Ø Replace only with the same type battery (CR2025 or equivalent).

Ø Dispose of used batteries according to the following instructions.

Ø

Insulate the plus and minus terminals of the battery using cellophane or equivalent tape.

Ø

Ø

Never disassemble.

Never throw the battery into fire or water.

Ø

Never deform or crush.

The following conditions indicate that the battery power is low: l

The KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster when the l l engine is turned off.

The system does not operate and the operation indicator light on the transmitter does not flash when the buttons are pressed.

The system's operational range is reduced.

Replacing the battery at an Authorized

Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent damage to the advanced key. If replacing the battery by yourself, follow the instruction below.

Replacing the advanced key battery

1. Pull out the auxiliary key.

2. Release the cap using a flathead screwdriver, then rotate and remove the cap.

CAUTION

Cap

Do not turn the cap excessively. The cap may be damaged.

3-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (88,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the crack and press the battery out.

4. Insert the new battery (CR2025 or equivalent) with the positive pole ( ) facing the ( ) mark on the cap.

qService

If you have a problem with the advanced keyless functions, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

If your advanced key is lost or stolen, bring all remaining advanced keys to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible for a replacement and to make the lost or stolen advanced key inoperative.

CAUTION

Radio equipment like this is governed by laws in the United States.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5. Rotate and close the cap.

Cap

6. Reinsert the auxiliary key.

3-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (89,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


Operation Using Advanced

Keyless Functions qOperational Range

The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within operational range while the advanced key is being carried.

NOTE

When the battery power is low, or in places where there are high-intensity radio waves or noise, the operational range may become narrower or the system may not operate.

Locking, unlocking the doors and the liftgate

The operational range for locking/ unlocking the doors is an area of up to 80 cm (2.6 ft) from the center of the front door handles.

The operational range for locking/ unlocking the liftgate is an area of up to

80 cm (2.6 ft) from the center of the liftgate.

Exterior transmitter

Operational range

NOTE

The system may not operate if you are too close to the windows, door handles, or liftgate.

Starting the engine

The operational range for starting the engine includes nearly the entire cabin area except for the luggage compartment.

Interior transmitter

Operational range

NOTE l l l l

The luggage compartment is out of the operational range, however, starting the engine may be possible.

The engine may not start if the advanced key is placed in the following areas: l l

Around the dashboard

In the storage compartments such as the glove box

Starting the engine may be possible even if the advanced key is outside of the vehicle and extremely close to a door and window, however, always start the engine from the driver's seat.

If the vehicle is started and the advanced key is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not restart after it is shut off and the ignition switch is turned to the lock position.

If the advanced key is detected within operational range, the operation indicator light located in the instrument cluster flashes momentarily.

3-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (90,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


qLocking, Unlocking with Request

Switch

All doors and the liftgate can be locked/ unlocked by pressing the request switch on the front doors or the liftgate while the advanced key is being carried.

Front doors

Request switch

Liftgate

Request switch

To lock

To lock the doors and the liftgate, press the request switch. A beep sound will be heard once and the hazard warning lights will flash once.

NOTE

(Without theft-deterrent system)

The hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the doors and the liftgate are locked.

(With theft-deterrent system) l

The hazard warning lights will not flash.

l

The hazard warning lights only flash when the theft deterrent system is armed or turned off, refer to the theft-deterrent

system (page 3-55).

To unlock

Driver's door request switch

To unlock the driver's door, press the request switch. A beep sound will be heard twice and the hazard warning lights will flash twice.

To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the request switch again within 3 seconds and two more beep sounds will be heard.

NOTE


The hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that the doors and the liftgate are unlocked.



l


system (page 3-55).

Front passenger door/liftgate request switch

To unlock the doors and the liftgate, press the request switch. A beep sound will be heard twice and the hazard warning lights will flash twice.

3-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (91,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


NOTE l

The request switch on the driver's door can be used to close the power windows and the l l l l moonroof.

Refer to the following pages:

Opening/Closing the Power Windows (page

3-39)

Opening/Closing the Moonroof (page 3-46)

Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are securely locked.

All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked when any door or the liftgate is open.

A beep sound is heard for confirmation when the doors and the liftgate are locked/ unlocked using the request switch. If your prefer, the beep sound can be turned off

(page 3-19).

The setting can be changed so that the doors and the liftgate are locked automatically without pressing the request

switch (page 3-19).

(Auto-lock function)

A beep sound is heard when all doors and the liftgate are closed while the advanced key is being carried. All doors and the liftgate are locked automatically after about

3 seconds when the advanced key is out of the operational range. Also, the hazard warning lights flash once. (Even if the driver is in the operational range, all doors and the liftgate are locked automatically after about 30 seconds.)

If you are out of the operational range before the doors and the liftgate are completely closed or another advanced key is left in the vehicle, the auto-lock function will not work. Always make sure that all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked before leaving the vehicle.

l l l

After unlocking doors and the liftgate by pressing the request switch, all doors and the liftgate will automatically lock if any of the following operations are not performed within about 30 seconds. If your vehicle has l a theft-deterrent system, the hazard warning lights will flash for confirmation.

A door or the liftgate is opened.

The auxiliary key is inserted into the ignition switch.

The start knob is pushed.

qStarting the Engine

Ignition switch positions

Without a traditional key, some of the ignition switch functions are different.

Start knob

LOCK (Released)

The steering wheel locks to help protect against theft.

LOCK (Depressed)

The ignition switch can be turned to the

ACC position when the KEY indicator light (green) illuminates in the instrument cluster.

3-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (92,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


WARNING

Before leaving the driver's seat, always put the key or start knob to LOCK position, set the parking brake and make sure the shift lever is in P:

Intentionally placing the key or start knob into LOCK position is much more important where you will not be removing the key to leave the vehicle and because leaving it in other positions will disable some of the vehicle security systems and run the battery down.

Leaving the driver's seat without putting the ignition switch in LOCK position, setting the parking brake and the shift lever is in P is dangerous. Unexpected vehicle movement could occur. This could cause an accident.

NOTE l

If turning the ignition switch is difficult, l jiggle the steering wheel from side to side.

The ignition switch cannot be turned from the ACC position to the LOCK position when the shift lever is not in P.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel unlocks and some electrical accessories will operate.

NOTE

The Advanced Keyless Entry System does not function in the ACC position, and the doors will not lock/unlock using the transmitter or request switches even if the advanced key is carried away from the vehicle.

ON

This is the normal running position after the engine is started. The warning lights

(except brakes) should be inspected

before the engine is started (page 5-37).

3-10

NOTE

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the sound of the fuel pump motor operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This does not indicate an abnormality.

START

The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the start knob; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked after

the engine is started (page 5-37).

Starting the engine

NOTE l

Engine-starting is controlled by the spark l l ignition system.

This system meets all Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise.

The advanced key must be carried because the advanced key carries an immobilizer chip that must communicate with the engine controls at short range.

When starting the engine, be sure the start knob is securely attached before trying to operate it. If the knob becomes detached from the ignition switch, re-attach it by pushing it on to the ignition switch.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (93,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


1. Make sure the advanced key is being carried.

2. Occupants should fasten their seat belts.

3. Make sure the parking brake is on.

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift into neutral (N).

NOTE

The starter will not operate if the shift lever is not in P or N.

6. Push the start knob slowly all the way in.

NOTE

In the following cases, the KEY warning light

(red) illuminates and the engine will not start.

l l l l

The advanced key battery is dead.

The advanced key is out of operational range.

The advanced key is placed in areas where it is difficult for the system to detect the

signal (page 3-7).

A key from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key is in the operational range.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position while pushing the start knob in.

7. Verify that the KEY indicator light

(green) illuminates in the instrument cluster. The KEY warning light (red) means you cannot continue to start the engine using the Advanced Keyless

System. You may have to use the

auxiliary key instead (page 3-20).

9. Turn the ignition switch from the ACC position to the START position and hold (up to 10 seconds at a time) until the engine starts.

CAUTION

Don't try the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds before trying again. Otherwise, you may damage the starter and drain the battery.

10. After starting the engine, let it idle for about 10 seconds.

3-11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (94,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


NOTE l

In extremely cold weather, below _18° C

(0° F), or after the vehicle has not been l driven in several days, let the engine warm up without operating the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without use of the accelerator.

Turning off the engine

1. Move the shift lever to the P position.

2. Turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC position.

NOTE

When the engine is turned off and the ignition switch it turned from the ACC position to the

LOCK position, the KEY indicator light

(green) flashes in the instrument cluster for about 30 seconds if the battery power of the advanced key is low. Replace the battery with a new one.

Refer to Battery Replacement (page 3-6).

3. Push in the start knob from the ACC position and turn it to the LOCK position.

CAUTION

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position.

NOTE l

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, the ignition switch has to l be pushed in from the ACC position and turned. Without being pushed in, the ignition switch stops at the ACC position and the vehicle battery may be discharged if the ignition switch is left in the ACC position. When leaving the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position.

If the vehicle is left with the ignition switch not in the LOCK position, a beep sound is heard and the indicator light flashes to notify the driver.

Refer to Warning Beep (page 3-16).

3-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (95,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


Operation Using Advanced

Key Functions qKeyless Entry System

This system uses the more traditional key buttons to remotely lock and unlock the doors and the liftgate, and opens the power windows and the moonroof.

It can also help you signal for attention.

Press the buttons slowly and carefully.

NOTE l

The keyless entry system is designed to operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the l l l l center of the vehicle, but this may vary due to local conditions.

The system does not operate when the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position or the start knob is pushed in.

With the start knob installed in the LOCK position, the system is fully operational. If the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position or the start knob is pushed in, the system does not operate.

All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked by pressing the lock button while any door or the liftgate is open. The hazard warning lights will also not flash.

If the transmitter does not operate when pressing a button or the operational range becomes too small, the battery may be dead. To install a new battery, refer to

Maintenance (page 3-5).

Transmitter with power liftgate

Lock button

Unlock button without power liftgate

Lock button

Unlock button

Panic button


Panic button

3-13

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (96,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


NOTE l

(U.S.A.)

This device complies with Part 15 of the l

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

(CANADA)

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

The unlock button can be used to open the power windows and the moonroof, but the lock button cannot be used to close the power windows and the moonroof.



3-39)


The operation indicator light flashes when the buttons are pressed.

Lock button

To lock the doors and the liftgate, press the lock button. A beep sound will be heard once and the hazard warning lights will flash once.

To confirm that all doors and the liftgate have been locked, press the lock button again within 5 seconds. If they are closed and locked, the horn will sound.

NOTE


The hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that all doors and the liftgate are locked.



l


system (page 3-55).

NOTE l

All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked l when any door or the liftgate is open.

Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are locked visually or audibly by use of the double click.

Unlock button

To unlock the driver's door, press the unlock button. A beep will be heard twice and the hazard warning lights will flash twice.

To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the unlock button again within 3 seconds and two more beep sounds will be heard.

NOTE


The hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that all doors and the liftgate are unlocked.

(With theft-deterrent system) l l



system (page 3-55).

3-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (97,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


NOTE

After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors and the liftgate will automatically lock if one of the doors or the liftgate is not opened within about 30 seconds.


If your Mazda has a power liftgate (page

3-30), the transmitter can open/close the

liftgate.

Panic button

If you witness from a distance someone attempting to break into or damage your vehicle, pressing the panic button will activate the vehicle's alarm.

NOTE

The panic button will work whether any door or the liftgate is open or closed.

(Turning on the alarm)

Pressing the panic button for 1 second or more will trigger the alarm for about 2 minutes and 30 seconds, and the following will occur: l

The horn sounds intermittently.

l

The hazard warning lights flash.

(Turning off the alarm)

The alarm stops by pressing any button on the transmitter.

qAuxiliary Key Function

Use the auxiliary key stored in the advanced key in the event of a dead transmitter battery or malfunction.

Removing the auxiliary key

Pull out the auxiliary key from the advanced key.

Locking, unlocking the doors

The doors can be locked/unlocked using the auxiliary key, refer to Locking,

Unlocking with Key (page 3-26).

Starting the engine

The engine can be started with the auxiliary key, refer to Ignition Switch

(page 5-2).

Locking, unlocking the glove box

The glove box can be locked/unlocked using the auxiliary key, refer to Glove

Box (page 6-128).

3-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (98,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


Advanced Key Suspend

Function

If one advanced key is left in the vehicle and a second advanced key is used to lock it, the functions of the advanced key left in the vehicle is temporarily suspended to prevent theft of the vehicle.

The following are inoperable: l

Starting the engine using the start l knob.

Operating the request switches.

To restore these functions, perform any one of the following: l

Press the lock or unlock button on the advanced key which has had its functions temporarily suspended.

l l

While carrying another advanced key, push in the start knob until the KEY indicator light (green) illuminates.

Insert the auxiliary key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

Warning and Beep Sounds qSystem Malfunction Warning Beep

If any malfunction occurs in the advanced keyless function, the KEY warning light

(red) in the instrument cluster illuminates continuously and beep sounds will be heard.

CAUTION

If the KEY warning light (red) remains illuminated, do not continue to drive the vehicle with the advanced keyless function. Park the vehicle in a safe place and use the auxiliary key to continue driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized


Refer to Ignition Switch (page 5-2).

qStart Knob Not in LOCK

Warning Beep

If the start knob is in the ACC position and the driver's door is opened, a continuous beep sound will be heard to notify the driver that the start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position. In this case, the keyless entry system does not operate, the car cannot be locked, and the battery will run down.

3-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (99,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


qAdvanced Key Removed from

Vehicle Warning Beep

Under the following conditions, a beep sound will be heard and the KEY warning light (red) will flash continuously when the start knob has not been returned to the

LOCK position to notify the driver that the advanced key has been removed. The

KEY warning light (red) will stop flashing when the advanced key is back inside the vehicle: l

The start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position, the driver's door is open, and the advanced key is removed from the vehicle. (A beep sound will be heard 3 times.)

However the beep sound will be heard l continuously when the start knob is in the ACC position and the door is open due to the activation of the warning beep sound indicating that the start knob is not in the LOCK position.

The start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position and all the doors are closed after removing the advanced key from the vehicle. (A beep sound will be heard 6 times.)

NOTE

Because the advanced key utilizes low-intensity radio waves, the Advanced Key Removed From

Vehicle Warning may activate if the advanced key is carried together with a metal object or it is placed in a poor signal reception area.

qRequest Switch Inoperable

Warning Beep

Under the following conditions, if the request switch for a front door or the liftgate is pressed while the advanced key is being carried, a beep will be heard 6 times to indicate that the front doors and the liftgate cannot be locked.

l

A door or the liftgate is open (door ajar included).

l l

The start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position.

The auxiliary key is inserted into the ignition switch.

qAdvanced Key Battery Dead

Warning

When the start knob is returned to the

ACC or LOCK position from the ON position, the KEY indicator light (green) flashes for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power is low. Replace with a new battery before the advanced key becomes unusable.

Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance

(page 3-5).

NOTE

The advanced key can be set so that the KEY indicator light (green) does not flash even if the battery power is low.

Refer to Setting Change (page 3-19).

qEngine Start Not Permitted Warning

Under the following conditions, the KEY warning light (red) flashes to inform the driver that the start knob will not rotate to the ACC position even if it is pushed in from the LOCK position.

l


3-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Knowing Your Mazda

Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System l l l

The advanced key is not within operational range.

The advanced key is placed in areas where it is difficult for the system to

detect the signal (page 3-7).


qAdvanced Key Left-in-vehicle

Warning Beep

If an advanced key is left in the vehicle cabin and all the doors and the liftgate are locked using a separate advanced key, a beep sound is heard for about 10 seconds to remind the driver that the advanced key has been left in the vehicle cabin. If this happens, the doors and the liftgate lock but the functions of the advanced key left in the vehicle cabin may be temporarily suspended. Perform the following procedure to restore the functions of the

advanced key (page 3-16).

Black plate (100,1)

3-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (101,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


Setting Change (Function Customization)

The following function settings are possible. These settings can only be changed by an

Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Setting Function At Initial Setting

After Setting

Change

Advanced key battery dead indicator

Lock/unlock operation confirmation beep sound

*1

KEY indicator light (green) flashes to indicate that the advanced key battery power is low.

A beep sound is heard to confirm that all doors or the liftgate have been locked/unlocked.

Activated

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Autolock function

*2

When all doors and the liftgate are closed and the advanced key is being carried and out of operational range, all the doors and the liftgate automatically lock after 3 seconds.

(Even if the driver is in the operational range, all doors and the liftgate are locked automatically after about 30 seconds.)

Deactivated Activated

*1: When the autolock function is operating, the warning sound will be heard regardless of the setting.

*2: When Autolock function is enabled, windows will not automatically close. You must close before leaving vehicle.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

3-19



Black plate (102,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated

Under the following conditions, warning beeps are heard and a warning/indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates to notify the driver of improper operation of the

advanced key to prevent theft of the vehicle (page 3-16).

Warning

When a door is open, a continuous beep sound will be heard.

When a door is open, 3 beep sounds are heard, and the

KEY warning light (red) in the instrument cluster flashes.

When a door is closed, a beep sound is heard 6 times, and the KEY warning light (red) in the instrument cluster flashes.

When locking the doors, the chime sounds for about 10 seconds.

How to check

Check whether the start knob has been returned to the

LOCK position.

Check whether the advanced key has been removed from the vehicle.

Check whether the advanced key has been removed from the vehicle.

When attempting to lock the doors, a beep sound is heard 6 times.

When the KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster.

When the KEY warning light (red) remains illuminated in the instrument cluster.

Check whether the advanced key has been left in the vehicle.

Check whether the advanced key has been left in the vehicle.

Check whether the start knob has been returned to the

LOCK position.

Check whether a door or the liftgate is open.

The advanced key battery power is low. Replace the battery with a new one.

Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance on page 3-5.

The advanced key is malfunctioning. Park the vehicle in a safe place, and use the auxiliary key to continue driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an


3-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (103,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Keys

WARNING


Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed. These new kinds of keys are fascinating to children. They could play with power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move.

NOTE l l

Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-52) for

information regarding keys and engine starting.

(With theft-deterrent system)

Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-55)

for information regarding keys and the prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents theft.

The keys operate all locks.

A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set; detach this plate and store it in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make a replacement key.

NOTE

Write down the code number and keep it in a separate safe and convenient place, but not in the vehicle.

If your key is lost, consult your Authorized

Mazda Dealer and have your code number ready.

Key extend/retract method (Retractable type key)

To extend the key, press the release button.

Retractable type key

To retract the key, rotate it into the holder while pressing the release button.


3-21

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (104,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Keyless Entry System

í

This system remotely locks and unlocks the doors and the liftgate, and opens the power windows and the moonroof.

It can also help you signal for attention.

Press the buttons slowly and carefully.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the transmitter, do not:

Ø Drop the transmitter.

Ø Get the transmitter wet.

Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind of magnetic field.

Ø Expose the transmitter to high temperatures on places such as the dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.

NOTE l

The keyless entry system is designed to operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the l l l l center of the vehicle, but this may vary due to local conditions.

The system doesn't operate when the key is in the ignition switch.

Doors and the liftgate cannot be locked by pressing the lock button while any other door or the liftgate is open. Also, the hazard warning lights will not flash.

If the transmitter does not operate when pressing a button or the operation range becomes too small, the battery may be dead. To install a new battery, refer to


Additional transmitters can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3 transmitters can be used with the keyless entry system per vehicle. Bring all transmitters to an Authorized Mazda

Dealer when additional transmitters are required.

3-22

í

Some models.

qTransmitter

Lock button

Unlock button


Panic button

NOTE l

(U.S.A.)



(CANADA)



NOTE

The unlock button can be used to open the power windows and the moonroof, but the lock button cannot be used to close the power windows and the moonroof.



3-39)


The operation indicator light flashes when the buttons are pressed.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (105,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Lock button

To lock the doors and the liftgate, press the lock button and the hazard warning lights will flash once.

To confirm that all doors and the liftgate have been locked, press the lock button again within 5 seconds. If they are closed and locked, the horn will sound.

NOTE


The hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that all doors and the liftgate are locked.

(With theft-deterrent system) l l



system (page 3-55).

NOTE l

All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked when any door or the liftgate is open and l the key is in the ignition switch.

Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are locked visually or audibly by use of the double click.

Unlock button

To unlock the driver's door, press the unlock button and the hazard warning lights will flash twice.

To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the unlock button again within 3 seconds.

NOTE


The hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that all doors and the liftgate are unlocked.



l


system (page 3-55).

NOTE

After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors and the liftgate will automatically lock if one of the doors or the liftgate is not opened within about 30 seconds.

Panic button

If you witness from a distance someone attempting to break into or damage your vehicle, pressing the panic button will activate the vehicle's alarm.

NOTE

The panic button will work whether any door or the liftgate is open or closed.

Turning on the alarm

Pressing the panic button once will trigger the alarm for about 2 minutes and 30 seconds, and the following will occur: l

The horn sounds intermittently.

l

The hazard warning lights flash.

Turning off the alarm

Press any button on the transmitter.

3-23

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (106,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qTransmitter Maintenance

If the buttons on the transmitter are inoperable and the operation indicator light does not flash, the battery may be dead.

Replace with a new battery before the transmitter becomes unusable.

CAUTION

Ø Install the battery with the positive pole ( ) facing down. Battery leakage could occur if it is not installed correctly.

Ø When replacing the battery, be careful not to bend the electrical terminals or get oil on them. Also be careful not to get dirt in the transmitter as it could be damaged.

Ø There is the danger of explosion if the battery is not correctly replaced.

Ø Replace only with the same type battery (CR1620 or equivalent).

Ø Dispose of used batteries according to the following

Ø

Ø instructions.

Ø

Insulate the plus and minus terminals of the battery using cellophane or equivalent tape.

Never disassemble.

Never throw the battery into

Ø fire and/or water.

Never deform or crush.

Replacing the transmitter battery

1. Unfold the key (page 3-21).

2. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and push the tab to remove the key from the transmitter.

Tab

3. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter.

4. Remove the battery.

A

3-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (107,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

5. Put in the new battery (CR1620 or equivalent) with the positive pole ( ) facing down.

6. Align the front and back covers and snap the transmitter shut.

7. Install the key to the transmitter.

qService

If you have a problem with the keyless entry system, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring all remaining transmitters to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible for a replacement and to make the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.

CAUTION

Radio equipment like this is governed by laws in the United States.


Door Locks

WARNING

Always take all children and pets with you or leave a responsible person with them:

Leaving a child or a pet unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather, temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause brain damage or even death.


Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed. They could play with power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move.

Keep all doors locked when driving:

Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle are dangerous. Passengers can fall out if a door is accidentally opened and can more easily be thrown out in an accident.

Always close all the windows, lock the doors and take the key with you when leaving your vehicle unattended:

3-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (108,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qLocking, Unlocking with Key

The driver's door can be locked/unlocked with the key.

Turn the key toward the front to unlock, toward the back to lock.

qLocking, Unlocking with Door-

Lock Knob

To lock any door from the inside, push the door-lock knob.

To unlock, pull it out.

This does not operate the other door locks.

Unlock

Lock

Lock


Switch (with Advanced Key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by operating the request switch while carrying the advanced key outside the vehicle, refer to Operations Using

Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).

qLocking, Unlocking with

Transmitter (with Advanced Key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System

(page 3-13).

qLocking, Unlocking with Transmitter

(with Retractable Type Key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System

(page 3-22).

Unlock

To lock any door with the door-lock knob from the outside, push the door-lock knob to the lock position and close the door.

This does not operate the other door locks.

Door-lock knob

NOTE l

(With advanced key) l

The driver's door cannot be locked using the door-lock knob from the outside.

When locking the doors this way, be careful not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

3-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (109,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qPower Door Locks

Vehicle lock-out prevention

(With advanced key)

The vehicle lock-out prevention feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle. All doors and the liftgate will automatically unlock if they are locked using the power door locks with any door or the liftgate open.

(With retractable type key)

The vehicle lock-out prevention feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle. With the key in the ignition switch, all doors and the liftgate will automatically unlock if they are locked using the power door locks with any door or the liftgate open.

Locking, unlocking with key

All doors and the liftgate lock automatically when the driver's door is locked with the key. All doors and the liftgate unlock when the driver's door is unlocked and the key is held in the unlock position for one second or longer.

NOTE

Holding the key in the unlocked position in the driver's door lock for about a second unlocks all doors and the liftgate. To unlock only the driver's door, insert the key into the driver's door lock and turn the key briefly to the unlock position and then immediately return it to the center position.

Locking, unlocking with door-lock switch

All doors and the liftgate lock automatically when lock side is pushed.

They all unlock when unlock side is pushed.

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Locking, unlocking with request switch

(with advanced key)

All doors and the liftgate can be locked/ unlocked by operating the request switch on the front doors and the liftgate while carrying the advanced key outside the vehicle, refer to Operations Using


Locking, unlocking with transmitter

(with advanced key)

All doors and the liftgate can be locked/ unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry

System (page 3-13).

3-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (110,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Locking, unlocking with transmitter

(with retractable type key)

All doors and the liftgate can be locked/ unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry

System (page 3-22).

qRear Door Child Safety Locks

These locks are intended to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors. Use them both whenever a child rides in the vehicle.

If you slide the child safety lock to the lock position before closing that door, the door cannot be opened from the inside.

The door can be opened only by pulling the outside handle.

Lock

Unlock

Liftgate

WARNING

Never allow a person to ride in the luggage compartment:

Allowing a person to ride in the luggage compartment is dangerous.

The person in the luggage compartment could be seriously injured or killed during sudden braking or a collision.

Do not drive with the liftgate open:

Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle is dangerous. An open liftgate in a moving vehicle will cause exhaust gas to be drawn into the cabin. This gas contains CO (carbon monoxide), which is colorless, odorless, and highly poisonous, and it can cause loss of consciousness and death.

Moreover, an open liftgate could cause occupants to fall out in an accident.


Switch (with Advanced Key)

The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by operating the request switch while carrying the advanced key outside the vehicle, refer to Operations Using


qLocking, Unlocking with

Transmitter (with Advanced Key)

The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System

(page 3-13).

3-28

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (111,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qLocking, Unlocking with Transmitter

(with Retractable Type Key)

The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by operating the keyless entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System

(page 3-22).

qLocking, Unlocking with Door-

Lock Switch

The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by operating the door-lock switch, refer to

Power Door Locks (page 3-27).

qOpening and Closing the Liftgate

Manually opening the liftgate

WARNING

Always fully open the liftgate when opening it:

Raising the liftgate only partially is dangerous as it could drop unexpectedly resulting in injury.

Pull up on the handle.

NOTE

If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a malfunction in the electrical system and the liftgate cannot be unlocked, perform the following procedure as an emergency measure to unlock it:

1. Remove the cap on the interior surface of the liftgate with a flathead screwdriver.

Cap

3-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (112,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

2. (With power liftgate)

Push the liftgate while pressing the lever down.

(Without power liftgate)

Turn the lever to the right to unlock the liftgate

With power liftgate

Lever

Without power liftgate

Lever

After performing this emergency measure, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized


Manually closing the liftgate

Use both hands to push the liftgate down until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.

Pull up on the liftgate to make sure it is securely latched.

qPower Liftgate

í

The power liftgate opens/closes electrically by operating switches in the vehicle or the buttons on the keyless entry system transmitter.

Refer to Keyless Entry System on page

3-13.

WARNING

Be sure to watch the power liftgate as it opens or closes, and make sure that it closes completely:

Opening or closing the power liftgate while not watching it move is dangerous. Because of unseen obstacles and the jam-safe feature, a liftgate may not close completely and, if left unnoticed, could result in serious injury or death if an occupant were to fall out of the vehicle.

Always be sure that the area around the liftgate is clear before activating it.

Always confirm the safety of the area around the power liftgate before operating it electrically.

Not checking the area around the liftgate for people before operating it using the power liftgate switch or the button on the keyless entry system is dangerous. A person could become caught between the liftgate and an obstruction while it is opening electrically or between the liftgate and vehicle while it is closing electrically, resulting in an accident and serious injury.

Always be sure the power liftgate completely closes before shifting into gear and driving the vehicle:

Shifting out of Park (P) while the liftgate is moving is dangerous. The liftgate will not close completely and this could result in serious injury or death if an occupant were to fall out of the vehicle. Occupants in the vehicle will also not have full protection in a collision.

3-30

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (113,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Never allow children to operate the power liftgate system:

Allowing children to operate the power liftgate switch and the keyless entry system is dangerous. Children are not aware of the dangers of people getting fingers and hands caught in a moving liftgate. If someone's neck, head or hands get caught in a closing door, it could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Ø When closing the power liftgate, make sure there are no foreign objects around the striker. If foreign objects are obstructing the striker, the liftgate may not close properly.

Striker

Ø Do not install accessories to the power liftgate other than specified accessories. Otherwise, it cannot be opened/closed automatically and could result in a malfunction.

Ø Be careful when switching the power liftgate from electrical to manual operation. The power liftgate may open/close unexpectedly depending on its position which could result in injury.

NOTE l

Do not apply unnecessary force to the power liftgate when it is opening/closing l l l l l electrically. Unnecessary force on the liftgate may cause it to reverse direction of movement automatically.

The power liftgate may not open/close electrically if the vehicle is parked on an incline, or there is strong wind, or the liftgate is laden with snow.

The power liftgate will not operate unless it is unlocked. The power liftgate does not operate unless it is unlocked using the power door lock function.

Refer to the Power Door Locks on page

3-26.

If a power liftgate system fuse has blown, the liftgate cannot be opened using the power liftgate switch or the outer handle

(liftgate).

Use the emergency lever to open the liftgate.

Fully close the power liftgate before disconnecting the vehicle battery. If the battery is disconnected with the liftgate open, it cannot be opened or closed automatically after the battery is reconnected.

To restore the power liftgate functions, perform the following:

1 Park on level ground.

2 Fully close the liftgate manually.

3 Unlock the liftgate and all the doors.

4 Press the power liftgate switch or the power liftgate button on the keyless entry system transmitter to fully open the liftgate.

5 Press the power liftgate switch or the power liftgate button on the keyless entry system transmitter again to fully close the liftgate.

3-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (114,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Opening/Closing the power liftgate

If the vehicle has satisfied all the following operation conditions, the power liftgate can be opened using the power function.

Operation conditions

(1) The power liftgate is unlocked.

(2) The shift lever is in park (P) when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTE l

If condition (2) is not satisfied while the l l l power liftgate is opening electrically, the beep sound will be heard and the liftgate will move in the reverse direction automatically.

If condition (2) is not satisfied while the power liftgate is closing electrically, the beep sound will be heard and the liftgate continues closing.

When condition (2) is satisfied, you can resume power liftgate open/close operation with the switches.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the transmitter does not operate.

Operation using the transmitter

Press the open/close button on the transmitter for one second or more with the power liftgate in the fully closed/open position. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the liftgate opens/closes after the beep sounds.

Refer to Keyless Entry System on page

3-13.

Operation from the driver's seat (To open/close)

Press the power liftgate switch for about one second or more while the liftgate is in the fully closed/open position. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the liftgate opens/closes fully after the beep sound is heard.

Power liftgate switch

Operation from outside (To close only)

Press the power liftgate close switch for about one second or more while the liftgate is fully opened. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the liftgate closes automatically after the beep sound is heard.

Power liftgate close switch

3-32

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (115,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

NOTE

If the power liftgate switch/power liftgate close switch/power liftgate button on the transmitter is pressed or the outside handle is operated while the liftgate is opening/closing electrically, the beep sound is heard and the liftgate moves in the reverse direction automatically. If this operation is repeated the system switches to manual operation.

Jam-safe equipment

While the power liftgate is opening/ closing electrically and the system detects a person or an object in the liftgate's path, the liftgate will move in the reverse direction automatically.

WARNING

Always check the area around the power liftgate before opening/closing it:

Not checking for occupants and objects around the power liftgate before opening/closing it is dangerous. The jam-safe equipment is designed to prevent jamming in the event an obstruction is in the liftgate's path. The system may not detect certain objects obstructing the liftgate depending on the way they are positioned and their shape.

However, if the jam-safe function detects an obstruction and moves the liftgate in the reverse direction, an occupant in the liftgate's path could be seriously injured.

CAUTION

Sensors are installed on both ends of the power liftgate. Be careful not to allow the sensors to be scratched or damaged by sharp objects, otherwise the liftgate may no longer open/close automatically. In addition, if the sensor is damaged while the liftgate is closing automatically, the system changes to manual operation.

Sensor

NOTE l

The liftgate has sensors on both sides. Be careful not to damage them. If the sensors l are damaged, the power liftgate will not function properly.

The jam-safe equipment does not activate during easy closure operation when the power liftgate is between the door-ajar position and fully closed position.

When the power liftgate is moving in the open/close direction and an obstruction is detected, the beep sound will be heard and the liftgate moves in the opposite direction.

3-33

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (116,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

NOTE

If the system repeatedly detects an object obstructing the power liftgate in the open/close direction several times, the beep sound will be heard and the system changes to manual operation.

Power liftgate drop prevention mechanism

The power liftgate drop prevention mechanism activates if the system detects weight such as that caused by a snowladen liftgate when it is opened electrically. After the liftgate is fully opened, the beep sound will be heard and the liftgate closes automatically.

NOTE l

If the power liftgate is snow-laden, remove the snow before operating the liftgate.

l

Trying to force the power liftgate closed manually immediately after it has fully opened automatically may activate the liftgate drop prevention mechanism.

However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

Liftgate easy closure

The Easy Closure system automatically closes the liftgate completely from the near-shut position.

This system also operates when the liftgate is closed manually.

WARNING

When closing a liftgate, always keep hands and fingers away from the liftgate:

Placing hands or fingers around a liftgate is dangerous because the liftgate closes automatically from the near-shut position, which could cause hands and fingers to be pinched and injured.

3-34

NOTE l

If the liftgate handle is pulled while the easy closure function is operating, the l liftgate can be opened.

If the liftgate is opened/closed repeatedly in a short period of time, the easy closure function may not operate. Wait for a while and then try again.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (117,1)

Power Windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for the power windows to operate.

WARNING

Make sure the opening is clear before closing a window:

Closing power windows are dangerous. A person's hands, head, or even neck could be caught by the window and result in serious injury or even death.

This warning applies especially to children.

Always lock all passenger power windows with the power window lock switch on the driver's side while children are in the vehicle, and never allow children to play with power window switches:

Leaving the power window switches unlocked while children are in the vehicle is dangerous. Power window switches that are not locked with the power window lock switch would allow children to operate power windows unintentionally which could result in serious injury if a child's hands, head or neck becomes caught by the window.

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qOperating the Front Power Windows

NOTE l

Each passenger power window can be operated with each door switch when the l power window lock switch on the driver's door is in the unlocked position (page

3-39).

Each passenger power window can also be operated by the power window master control switches on the driver's door.

Owner master control switch

Driver's window

Left rear window

Front passenger's window

Right rear window l

The following functions can be performed for the front power windows using the power window master control switches on l l l the driver's door or front passenger's door switch.

Manual opening/closing

Auto-opening/closing

Two-step down function

3-35

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (118,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Manual opening/closing

To open a power window to the desired position, lightly hold down the switch.

To close the power window to the desired position, lightly pull up the switch.


Open

Close

Driver's window


Front passenger switch

Close

Open

Auto-opening/closing

To fully open a power window automatically, press the switch completely down.

To fully close the power window automatically, pull the switch completely up.

To stop the power window partway, pull or press the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.

NOTE

(POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION

PROCEDURE)

If the battery was disconnected during vehicle maintenance, or for other reasons such as a switch continues to be operated after the window is fully open/close, the power windows will not fully open and close automatically. Reinitialization of the automatic function can be performed using the master control switches and the front passenger door switch. Carry out the following procedure to resume operation:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Make sure that the power window lock switch located on the driver's door is not depressed.

3. Press the switch and fully open the power window.

4. Pull up the switch to fully close the power window and continue holding the switch for about 2 seconds after the window fully closed.

5. Repeat Steps 3-4 for each front power window.

6. Make sure that the power windows operate correctly using the door switches.

Two-step down function

With the power window completely closed, press the switch lightly and it will open and stop about 3 cm (1 in) from the top.

If you continue to press and hold the switch, the window will resume opening all the way.

NOTE

Pressing the power window switch once when the window is fully closed will only open it about 3 cm (1 in) to allow convenient ventilation of the cabin.

3-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (119,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Canceling the two-step down function

To cancel the two-step down function for the front power windows, carry out the following procedure using the master control switches.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and complete the following procedure within 5 seconds:

Press the power window switch 2 times firmly, then pull it 2 times firmly.


Driver's window


2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

3. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position, and within 40 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and complete the following procedure within 5 seconds:

Press the power window switch 2 times firmly, then pull 2 times firmly.

NOTE l

The two-step down function cannot be canceled if the procedure is not completed l within the specified times, or the procedure is changed along the way. To redo the procedure, first turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and proceed from the beginning.

If you are unable to cancel the function despite carrying out the cancellation procedure, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

Restoring the two-step down function

With the two-step down function in the canceled state, repeat the previous procedure for canceling the function on each door switch and it will be restored.

NOTE

If you are unable to restore the function despite doing the restore procedure, consult an


Jam-safe window

If a person's hands, head or an object blocks the window during the manual closing operation or the auto-closing operation, the window will stop and open halfway.

WARNING

Make sure nothing blocks the window just before it reaches the fully closed position or while fully holding up the power window switch:

Blocking the power window just before it reaches the fully closed position or while fully holding up the power window switch is dangerous.

In this case, the jam-safe function cannot prevent the window from stopping. If fingers are caught, serious injuries could occur.

3-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (120,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

NOTE l

Depending on driving conditions, a closing power window could stop and start opening l when the window feels a shock that is similar to something blocking it.

In the event the jam-safe function activates and the power window cannot be closed automatically, pull and hold the switch fully and the window will close.

The jam-safe window function does not operate until the system is re-initialized.

Engine-off power window operation

The power window can be operated for about 40 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the

ACC or LOCK position with all doors closed. If any door is opened, the power window will be inoperable.

NOTE l

For engine-off operation of the power window, the switch must be held up firmly l throughout window closure because the auto-closing function will be inoperable.

The two-step down function is inoperable during engine-off operation.

qOperating the Rear Power Windows

The power windows may be operated when the power window lock switch on the driver's door is in the unlocked position.

A rear power windows may be opened or closed using the power window master control switches on the driver's door.

Left rear window

Right rear window

Power window lock switch

To open the power window to the desired position, hold down the switch.

To close the power window to the desired position, pull up the switch.

Close

Open

3-38

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (121,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Engine-off power window operation

The power windows can be operated for about 40 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the

ACC or LOCK position with all doors closed. If any door is opened, the power windows will be inoperable.

qPower Window Lock Switch

With the lock switch in the unlocked position, all power windows on each door can be operated.

With the lock switch in the locked position, only the driver's side power window can be operated.

Locked position

Unlocked position

WARNING

Unless a passenger needs to operate a power window, keep the power window lock switch in the locked position:

Unintentional power window operation is dangerous. A person's hands, head, or neck could be caught by the window and result in serious injury.

NOTE

When the power window lock switch is in the locked position, the light on each power window switch, except for the driver's power window switch, turns off. The light may be difficult to see depending on the surrounding brightness.

qOpening/Closing the Power

Windows from Outside

The front power windows can be opened or closed from outside the vehicle after the doors and the liftgate are closed.

The front power windows may be operated when the power window lock switch on the driver's door is in the lock or unlocked position.

WARNING

Make sure the opening is clear before closing a window:

Closing power windows are dangerous. A person's hands, head, or even neck could be caught by the window and result in serious injury or even death.

This warning applies especially to children.

NOTE

The power windows cannot be opened or closed from outside the vehicle under the following condition: l l l


The key is inserted into the ignition switch.

(With advanced key)

The start knob is in any position except

LOCK.

3-39

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (122,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Opening

Because nobody likes getting into a very hot car, Mazda has introduced a way to open the two front windows and the moonroof as you approach the vehicle to get the air moving before you get in.

WARNING

Use the auto-window function only when you can see the vehicle and it is in a secure area:

Do not let children play with your keys. If they open the window without your knowing, the open windows are an even bigger invitation to a thief than leaving the doors unlocked.

The windows can be opened for ventilating the cabin before getting in the vehicle.

With unlock button (Keyless entry system)

Press once, then press again within 1.5

seconds and hold.

After the doors and the liftgate are unlocked, the two front windows and the moonroof open while the unlock button is pressed.

To stop the windows and the moonroof while opening, release the button.

If the operation is performed from the beginning again, the windows and the moonroof open.

Advanced key

Lock button

Unlock button

Panic button

Liftgate button


Lock button

Unlock button

Panic button

NOTE l

The unlock button does not operate unless it is pressed twice sequentially.

l

The lock button cannot be used to close the power windows.

With key

1. Insert the key in the driver's door key cylinder.

3-40

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (123,1)

2. Turn the key toward the front and hold it. After the doors and the liftgate are unlocked, the windows fully open automatically.

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

2. Turn the key toward the back and hold it. After the doors and the liftgate are locked, the windows close as long as the key is turned.

Open

Close

To stop this operation, turn the key to the center position, then turn it toward the front again.

NOTE

The window opening operation also can be stopped by turning the key toward the back.

However, the doors and the liftgate will lock.

Closing

The windows can be closed in case they are left open after getting out of the vehicle.

NOTE

(With advanced key)

If the auto-lock function (page 3-8) has been

activated, the doors and the liftgate automatically lock as you walk away from the vehicle, however, the power windows cannot be closed. When leaving the vehicle, close the windows using the power window switch inside the vehicle, the key, or a request switch.

With key


With request switch on the driver's door (Advanced key)

1. If the doors and the liftgate are locked, unlock them.

2. Press and hold the request switch on the driver's door. After the doors and the liftgate are locked, the windows close as long as the request switch is pressed.

Request switch

3-41

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (124,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap

WARNING

When removing the fuel cap, loosen the cap slightly and wait for any hissing to stop. Then remove it:

Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can burn skin and eyes and cause illness if ingested. Fuel spray is released when there is pressure in the fuel tank and the fuel cap is removed too quickly.

Before refueling, stop the engine, and always keep sparks and flames away from the filler neck:

Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be ignited by sparks or flames causing serious burns and injuries.

Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel filler cap or not using a fuel filler cap may result in fuel leak, which could result in serious burns or death in an accident.

CAUTION

Always use only a genuine Mazda fuel cap or an approved equivalent, available at an Authorized Mazda

Dealer. The wrong cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel and emission control systems. It may also cause the check engine light in the instrument cluster to illuminate.

qFuel-Filler Lid

To open, pull the remote fuel-filler lid release.

Remote fuel-filler lid release

qFuel-Filler Cap

To remove the filler cap, turn it counterclockwise.

To close the filler cap, turn it clockwise until two or more clicks are heard.

Open

Close

3-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (125,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

CAUTION

Make sure the fuel-filler cap is tightened securely. The check fuel cap warning light may illuminate if the cap is not tightened securely. If the light remains on even after you have tightened the cap securely, this may indicate a different problem. Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

Hood

WARNING

Always check that the hood is closed and securely locked:

A hood that is not closed and securely locked is dangerous as it could fly open while the vehicle is moving and block the driver's vision which could result in a serious accident.

qOpening the Hood

1. With the vehicle parked, pull the release handle to unlock the hood.

Release handle

2. Slide the hood latch to the right and lift the hood.

3-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (126,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

3. Grasp the support rod in the padded area and secure it in the stay hole indicated by the arrow to hold the hood open.

Pad

Moonroof

í

The moonroof can be opened or closed electrically only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Slide switch

Tilt switch

Support rod Clip

qClosing the Hood

1. Check under the hood area to make certain all filler caps are in place and all loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers, etc.) have been removed.

2. Insert the support rod in its clip while holding up the hood. Verify that the support rod is secured in the clip before closing the hood.

3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.

WARNING

Do not let passengers stand up or extend part of the body through the open moonroof while the vehicle is moving:

Extending the head, arms, or other parts of the body through the moonroof is dangerous. The head or arms could hit something while the vehicle is moving. This could cause serious injury or death.

Make sure the opening is clear before closing the moonroof:

A closing moonroof is dangerous. The hands, head, or even neck of a person

―especially a child― could be caught in it as it closes, causing serious injury or even death.

NOTE

After washing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe the water off the moonroof before operating it to avoid water penetration which could cause rust and water damage to your headliner.

3-44

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (127,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qOperating the Moonroof

Tilt Operation

The rear of the moonroof can be tilted open to provide more ventilation.

To fully tilt automatically, momentarily push the tilt switch.

To fully close automatically, momentarily pull the tilt switch or push the front of the slide switch.

To stop tilting partway, push any part of the tilt or slide switch.

To stop sliding partway, push any part of the tilt or slide switch.

Open

Close

Tilt down

(Close)

Close

(Tilt down)

Tilt up

Tilt down

Slide Operation

To fully open automatically, momentarily push the rear of the slide switch.

To fully close automatically, momentarily push the front of the slide switch or pull the tilt switch.

Power moonroof initialization procedure

If the battery had been disconnected during vehicle maintenance or for other reasons, the moonroof may not fully open or close. The moonroof's jam-safe function does not function while the moonroof is initializing. Carry out the following procedure to resume operation:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Pull the tilt switch, to partially tilt open the rear of the moonroof.

NOTE

If the re-initialization procedure is performed while the moonroof is in the slide position

(partially open) it closes before the rear tilts opens.

3. Repeat the procedure in Step 2. The rear of the moonroof tilts open to the fully open position, then closes a little.

3-45

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (128,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

qEngine-off Moonroof Operation

The moonroof can be operated for about

40 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position with all doors closed. If any door is opened, the moonroof will be inoperable.

qOpening/Closing the Moonroof from Outside

The moonroof can be opened or closed from outside the vehicle after the doors and the liftgate are closed.

WARNING

Make sure the opening is clear before closing the moonroof:

Closing the moonroof is dangerous. A person's hands, head, or even neck could be caught by the moonroof and result in serious injury or even death.

This warning applies especially to children and pets.

NOTE

The moonroof cannot be opened or closed from outside the vehicle under the following condition: l


l l

The key is inserted into the ignition switch.

(With advanced key)

The start knob is pushed into the ignition switch.

Opening

Because nobody likes getting into a very hot car, Mazda has introduced a way to open the two front windows and the moonroof as you approach the vehicle to get the air moving before you get in.

WARNING

Use the auto-moonroof function only when you can see the vehicle and it is in a secure area:

Do not let children play with your keys. If they open the moonroof without your knowing, the open moonroof is an even bigger invitation to a thief than leaving the doors unlocked.

The moonroof can be opened for ventilating the cabin before getting in the vehicle.

With unlock button (Keyless entry system)

Press the unlock button twice within 1.5

seconds and then hold the button pressed.

After the doors and the liftgate are unlocked, the two front windows and the moonroof open as long as the unlock button is pressed.

Advanced key

Lock button Panic button

Unlock button Power liftgate button

3-46

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Lock button

Unlock button

Black plate (129,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

2. Turn the key toward the front and hold it. After the doors and the liftgate are unlocked, the moonroof fully opens automatically.

Open

Panic button

To stop the windows and the moonroof from opening, release the button.

If the operation is performed from the beginning again, the windows and the moonroof open.

NOTE l

The unlock button does not operate unless l it is pressed twice sequentially.

The lock button cannot be used to close the moonroof.

With key


To stop this operation, turn the key to the center position, then turn it toward the front again.

NOTE

The moonroof opening operation also can be stopped by turning the key toward the back.

However, the doors and the liftgate will lock.

Closing

The moonroof can be closed in case it is left open after getting out of the vehicle.

NOTE

(With advanced key)

If the auto-lock function (page 3-8) has been

activated, the doors and the liftgate automatically lock as you walk away from the vehicle, however, for safety reasons, the moonroof cannot be closed. When leaving the vehicle, close the moonroof using the tilt or slide switch inside the vehicle, the key, or a request switch.

With key


3-47

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (130,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

2. Turn the key toward the back and hold it. After the doors and the liftgate are locked, the moonroof closes as long as the key is turned.

Close

With request switch on the driver's door (Advanced key)

1. If the doors and the liftgate are locked, unlock them.

2. Press the request switch on the driver's door and hold it. After the doors and the liftgate are locked, the moonroof closes as long as the request switch is pressed.

qJam-safe Moonroof

If a person's hands, head or an object blocks the moonroof during closing operation, the moonroof will stop and open halfway.

WARNING

Make sure nothing blocks the moonroof just before it reaches the fully closed position:

Blocking the moonroof just before it reaches the closed position is dangerous.

In this case, the jam-safe function cannot prevent the moonroof from stopping. If fingers are caught, serious injuries could occur.

NOTE l

Depending on driving conditions, a closing moonroof could stop and start opening l when the moonroof feels a shock that is similar to something blocking it.

The moonroof's jam-safe function does not function while the moonroof is initializing.

Request switch

3-48

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qSunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed by hand.

The sunshade opens automatically when the moonroof is opened, but must be closed by hand.

Sunshade

Black plate (131,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

CAUTION

Ø The sunshade does not tilt. To avoid damaging the sunshade, do not push up on it.

Ø Do not close the sunshade while the moonroof is opening. Trying to force the sunshade closed could damage it.

3-49

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (132,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

Immobilizer System (with

Advanced Key)

The immobilizer system allows the engine to start only with an advanced key the system recognizes.

If someone attempts to start the engine with an unrecognized key, the engine will not start, thereby helping to prevent the theft of your vehicle.

CAUTION

Ø Radio equipment like this is governed by laws in the United

States.


Ø To avoid damage to the key, do not:

Ø

Ø

Ø

Drop the key.

Get the key wet.

Expose the key to any kind of magnetic field.

Ø

Expose the key to high temperatures on places such as the dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.

CAUTION

Do not allow the following when starting the engine with the auxiliary key due to an advanced key dead battery or other malfunction.

Otherwise the signal from the auxiliary key will not be received correctly and the engine may not start.

Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal objects touch the key grip.

Ø Spare auxiliary keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system touch or come near the auxiliary key.

Ø Equipment containing electronic components or cards with magnetic strips such as credit cards come near the auxiliary key.

NOTE l

(U.S.A.)



(CANADA)



3-50

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (133,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

qOperation

Arming

The system is armed when the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position. The security indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes every 2 seconds until the system is disarmed.

Disarming

The system is disarmed when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the registered advanced key.

The security indicator light illuminates for about 3 seconds and goes out.

If the engine doesn't start with the correct ignition key, and the security indicator light keeps illuminating or flashing, the system may have a malfunction. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTE l

The engine may not start and the security indicator light may illuminate or flash if the l l l advanced key is placed in an area where it is difficult for the system to detect the signal, such as on the dashboard, or in the glove box. Move the advanced key to another place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and then restart the engine.

Signals from a TV or radio station, or from a transceiver or a mobile telephone could interfere with your immobilizer system. If you are using the proper advanced key and the engine fails to start, check the security indicator light. If the indicator light is flashing, turn the ignition switch to the

ACC or LOCK position and wait for a while, then restart the engine. If it doesn't start after 3 or more tries, contact an


If the security indicator light flashes continuously while you are driving, don't shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If the engine is shut off while the indicator light is flashing, you won't be able to restart it.

Since the electronic codes are reset when repairing the immobilizer system, the advanced key (including auxiliary key) are needed. Bring all the advanced keys

(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

3-51

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (134,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

qMaintenance

If you have a problem with the immobilizer system or the key, consult an


NOTE l l l

The advanced keys (including auxiliary key) carry a unique electronic code. For this reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining a replacement advanced key (including auxiliary key) requires some waiting time.

They are only available through an


Always keep a spare advanced key in case one is lost. If an advanced key is lost, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

If you lose an advanced key (including auxiliary key), an Authorized Mazda Dealer will reset the electronic codes of your remaining advanced keys (including auxiliary keys) and immobilizer system.

Bring all the remaining advanced keys

(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer to reset.

Starting the vehicle with a key that has not been reset is not possible.

qModification and Add-On

Equipment

Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer system's operation if the system has been modified or if any add-on equipment has been installed to it.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle, do not modify the system or install any add-on equipment to the immobilizer system or the vehicle.

Immobilizer System

(without Advanced Key)

The immobilizer system allows the engine to start only with a key the system recognizes.

If someone attempts to start the engine with an unrecognized key, the engine will not start, thereby helping to prevent the theft of your vehicle.

CAUTION

Ø Radio equipment like this is governed by laws in the United

States.


Ø To avoid damage to the key, do not:

Ø

Ø

Ø

Drop the key.

Get the key wet.

Expose the key to any kind of magnetic field.

Ø

Expose the key to high temperatures on places such as the dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.

3-52

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (135,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

CAUTION

When starting the engine do not allow the following, as the engine may not start due to the electronic signal from the ignition key not being transmitted correctly.

Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.

Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal objects touch the key grip.

Ø Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system touch or come near the key grip.

NOTE l

(U.S.A.)



(CANADA)



qOperation

Arming

The system is armed when the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the ACC position.

The security indicator light in the instrument panel flashes every 2 seconds until the system is disarmed.

Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or security passage touch or come near the key.

Disarming

The system is disarmed when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the correct ignition key.

The security indicator light illuminates for about 3 seconds and goes out.

3-53

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (136,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System


NOTE l l l l

If the security indicator light comes on and stays on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the engine will not start.

Signals from a TV or radio station, or from a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could interfere with your immobilizer system. If you are using the proper key and your engine fails to start, check the security indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more, then reinsert it and try starting the engine again. If it doesn't start after 3 or more tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

If the security indicator light flashes continuously while you are driving, don't shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you shut off the engine while the light is flashing you won't be able to restart it.

Since the electronic codes are reset when repairing the immobilizer system, the keys are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an


qMaintenance

If you have a problem with the immobilizer system or the key, consult an


NOTE l l l

The keys carry a unique electronic code.

For this reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining replacement key requires some waiting time. They are only available through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.

If a key is lost, contact an Authorized


If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda

Dealer will reset the electronic codes of your remaining keys and immobilizer system. Bring all the remaining keys to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.

Starting the vehicle with a key that has not been reset is not possible.

qModification and Add-On

Equipment

Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer system's operation if the system has been modified or if any add-on equipment has been installed to it.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle, do not modify the system or install any add-on equipment to the immobilizer system or the vehicle.

3-54

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (137,1)

Theft-Deterrent System

í

The theft-deterrent system is designed to prevent your vehicle or its contents from being stolen when all doors, hood, and liftgate are locked.

If forcible entry is attempted, the system sounds the horn and flashes the hazard warning lights.

NOTE l

The theft-deterrent system operates with the advanced keyless function, keyless entry l system or the auxiliary key.

The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within operational range while the advanced key is being carried.

The system will not function unless it is properly armed. To properly secure the vehicle, always make sure all windows are completely closed and all doors and the liftgate are locked before leaving the vehicle. Remember to take your advanced key.

qOperation

What turns it on: l l

Forcing open a door, the hood or the liftgate.

Opening a door or the hood by operating an inside door-lock knob or the hood release handle.

What it does: l l

The horn sounds intermittently and the hazard warning lights flash.

The alarm continues for about 30 seconds, then stops.

If the system is triggered again, the lights and horn will activate until a door or the liftgate is unlocked with the key or with the transmitter.

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

qHow to Arm the System

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

(With advanced key)

Turn the start knob to the LOCK position.

2. Make sure the hood is closed. Close and lock all doors and the liftgate from the outside using the key. If you have the keyless entry system, press the lock button on the transmitter.

(With advanced key)

Press a request switch or the lock button on the transmitter.

The hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the system is armed.

(Without advanced key)

The following method will also arm the theft-deterrent system:

Close the hood and the liftgate . Press the area on the door-lock switch marked

“ ” once. Close all doors.

qTo Turn off an Armed System

An armed system can be turned off by any one of the following methods: l l

Unlock a door with the key.

Press the unlock button on the keyless l l l entry system transmitter.

Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position.

l

(With advanced key)

Press a request switch or the unlock button on the transmitter.

Turn the start knob to the ON position.

The hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that the system is turned off.

í

Some models.

3-55

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

qTo Stop an Alarm

A triggered alarm can be turned off by any one of the following methods: l

Unlock a door or the liftgate with the l l l l key.

Press the unlock button on the keyless entry system transmitter.

(With advanced key)

Press a request switch.

Press the unlock button on the transmitter.

NOTE

If you have any problem with the theftdeterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

qTheft-Deterrent Labels

Black plate (138,1)

A label indicating that your vehicle is equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is in the glove box.

Mazda recommends that you affix it to the lower rear corner of a front door window.

3-56

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (139,1)

Knowing Your Mazda

Steering Wheel and Mirrors

Steering Wheel

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving:

Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.

Moving it can very easily cause the driver to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of control or an accident.

qSteering Wheel Adjustment

To change the angle or length of the steering wheel:

1. Stop the vehicle, pull down the lock release lever under the steering column.

Tilt wheel release lever

Mirrors qOutside Mirrors

Check the mirror angles before driving.

Mirror type

Flat type (driver's side)

Flat surface mirror.

Convex type (front passenger side)

The mirror has single curvature on its surface.

WARNING

Be sure to look over your shoulder before changing lanes:

Changing lanes without taking into account the actual distance of the vehicle in the convex mirror is dangerous. You could have a serious accident. What you see in the convex mirror is closer than it appears.

Power mirror

The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

To adjust:

1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch to choose the left or right side mirror.

2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the steering column length to the desired positions, push the lever up to lock the column.

3. Push the wheel up and down to be certain it's locked before driving.

3-57

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (140,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


2. Depress the mirror switch in the appropriate direction.

Outside mirror Selector switch

Mirror switch

Mirror defroster

í

To turn on the mirror defrosters, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and push the rear window defroster switch

(page 5-61).

qRearview Mirror

Rearview mirror adjustment

Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror to center on the scene through the rear window.

After adjusting the mirror, lock the control by placing the selector switch in the middle position.

Folding the mirror

Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is flush with the vehicle.

WARNING

Always return the outside mirrors to the driving position before you start driving:

Driving with the outside mirrors folded in is dangerous. Your rear view will be restricted, and you could have an accident.

Reducing glare from headlights

Adjust the mirror with the day/night lever in the day position.

Push the lever forward for day driving.

Pull it back to reduce glare from headlights.

Day/Night lever

Day

Night

3-58

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



WARNING

Do not stack cargo or objects higher than the seatbacks:

Cargo stacked higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. It can block your view in the rearview mirror, which might cause you to hit another car when changing lanes.

Black plate (141,1)

Knowing Your Mazda


Form No.8V83-EA-06I

3-59



Black plate (142,1)

3-60

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (143,1)

4


Important information about driving your Mazda.

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions ........................................ 4-2

Fuel Requirements .................................................................... 4-2

Emission Control System .......................................................... 4-3

Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide) ......................................... 4-4

Before Starting the Engine ........................................................... 4-5

Before Getting In ...................................................................... 4-5

After Getting In ......................................................................... 4-5

Driving Tips ................................................................................... 4-6

Break-In Period ......................................................................... 4-6

Money-Saving Suggestions ...................................................... 4-6

Hazardous Driving .................................................................... 4-7

Rocking the Vehicle .................................................................. 4-9

Winter Driving .......................................................................... 4-9

Driving In Flooded Area ......................................................... 4-11

Overloading ............................................................................. 4-11

Towing ......................................................................................... 4-12

Trailer Towing (Except Mexico) ............................................. 4-12

4-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (144,1)


Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

Fuel Requirements

Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.

Fuel with a lower rating could cause the emission control system to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.

Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.

Fuel

Regular unleaded fuel

Octane Rating

*

(Anti-knock index)

87 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)

* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.

Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.

CAUTION

Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.

Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.

Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10% ethanol by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.

Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.

Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name

“Gasohol”.

Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not be covered by the Mazda warranty.

l l l

Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.

Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.

Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

4-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (145,1)



Emission Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions requirements.

WARNING

Never park over or near anything flammable:

Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will damage the converter and cause poor performance.

Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.

Ø Don't drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.

Ø Don't coast with the ignition switch turned off.

Ø Don't descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.

Ø Don't operate the engine at high idle for more than 5 minutes.

Ø Don't tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by a qualified technician.

Ø Don't push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

NOTE

Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.

4-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (146,1)



Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)

WARNING

Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:

Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.

Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:

Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even death could occur.

Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when idling the engine:

Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even death could occur.

Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe, before starting the engine:

Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.

Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.

4-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (147,1)


Before Starting the Engine

Before Getting In

l l l l

Be sure the windows, outside mirrors, and outside lights are clean.

Inspect inflation pressures and condition of tires.

Look under the vehicle for any sign of fluid leaks.

If you plan to back up, make sure nothing is in your way.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.

After Getting In

l l l l l l

Are all doors closed and locked?

Is the seat adjusted properly?

Are the inside and outside mirrors adjusted?

Is everyone's seat belt fastened?

Check all gauges.

Check all warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

l

Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes off.

Always be thoroughly familiar with your

Mazda.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

4-5



Black plate (148,1)


Driving Tips

Break-In Period

No special break-in is necessary, but a few precautions in the first 1,000 km (600 miles) may add to the performance, economy, and life of your Mazda.

l

Don't race the engine.

l l

Don't maintain one constant speed, either slow or fast, for a long period of time.

Don't drive constantly at full-throttle or l l l high engine rpm for extended periods of time.

Avoid unnecessary hard stops.

Avoid full-throttle starts.

Don't tow a trailer.

Money-Saving Suggestions

How you operate your Mazda determines how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use these suggestions to help save money on fuel and repairs.

l

Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine l l l runs smoothly, begin driving.

Avoid fast starts.

Keep the engine tuned. Follow the

maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and

have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform inspections and servicing.

Use the air conditioner only when l l l l l l l necessary.

Slow down on rough roads.

Keep the tires properly inflated.

Don't carry unnecessary weight.

Don't rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.

Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Keep windows closed at high speeds.

Slow down when driving in crosswinds and headwinds.

WARNING

Never stop the engine when going down a hill:

Stopping the engine when going down a hill is dangerous. This causes the loss of power steering and power brake control, and may cause damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of steering or braking control could cause an accident.

4-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (149,1)


Driving Tips

Hazardous Driving qDriving on Slippery Surface

WARNING

Be extremely careful if it is necessary to downshift on slippery surfaces:

Downshifting into lower gear while driving on slippery surfaces is dangerous. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid.

This could lead to loss of vehicle control and an accident.

Do not rely on ABS or RSC as a substitute for safe driving:

The ABS and RSC cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely), driving on ice and snow, and hydroplaning

(reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface). You can still have an accident.

When driving on ice or in water, snow, mud, sand, or similar hazards: l

Be cautious and allow extra distance l l l for braking.

Avoid sudden braking and sudden maneuvering.

Do not pump the brakes. Continue to press down on the brake pedal.

If you get stuck, select a lower gear and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front l wheels.

Do not perform abrupt maneuvers when the road surface changes (such as from a paved road to gravel) because the reaction of the vehicle against the driving operation changes.

l

For more traction in starting on slippery surfaces such as ice or packed snow, use sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or other nonslip material under the front wheels.

NOTE

Use snow chains only on the front wheels.

4-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (150,1)


Driving Tips

qRoll-over

WARNING

Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers when driving this vehicle:

Sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvering of this vehicle is dangerous as it could result in the increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle roll-over, personal injury or death.

This vehicle has a higher center of gravity. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and AWD vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity.

Utility and AWD vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as any more than low profile sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. In addition, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

RSC might help if you get into trouble, but then it might not be able to allow you to fully recover, always drive carefully with the vehicle's height in mind.

Drive carefully when the vehicle is loaded by lowering vehicle speed and applying the brakes earlier:

Abrupt maneuvering and sudden braking when driving a loaded vehicle is dangerous as the driving behavior of a vehicle with a high center of gravity is different when it is loaded compared to when it is not, and could result in the loss of vehicle control and an accident.

qEmergency Maneuvering

WARNING

Do not perform abrupt maneuvers when driving the vehicle in an emergency situation:

Performing abrupt maneuvers even when driving in an emergency situation is dangerous as it could reduce vehicle stability and operability resulting in an accident.

Operate the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and the steering wheel smoothly.

4-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (151,1)


Driving Tips

Rocking the Vehicle

WARNING

Do not spin the wheels at more than 56 km/h (35 mph), and do not allow anyone to stand behind a wheel when pushing the vehicle:

When the vehicle is stuck, spinning the wheels at high speed is dangerous. The spinning tire could overheat and explode. This could cause serious injuries.

CAUTION

Too much rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle failure, and tire damage.

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand or mud, depress the accelerator slightly and slowly move the shift lever from D to R.

Winter Driving

l

Carry emergency gear, including tire chains, window scraper, flares, a small shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag of sand or salt.

Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to perform the following precautions: l

Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in the radiator.

Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-21.

l l

Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold reduces battery capacity.

Inspect the ignition system for damage l l and loose connections.

Use washer fluid made with antifreeze

―but don't use engine coolant antifreeze for washer fluid

(page 8-26).

Don't use the parking brake in freezing weather as the parking brake may freeze. Instead, shift to P and block the rear wheels.

qSnow Tires

Use snow tires on all four wheels

Don't go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) while driving with snow tires. Inflate snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm

2

, 4.3 psi) more than recommended on the tire pressure label (driver's door frame), but never more than the maximum cold-tire pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING

Use only the same size and type tires

(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four wheels:

Using tires different in size or type is dangerous. Your vehicle's handling could be greatly affected and result in an accident.

4-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (152,1)


Driving Tips

CAUTION

Check local regulations before using studded tires.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system, the system may not function correctly when using tires with steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls (page

5-31).

qTire Chains

Check local regulations before using tire chains.

CAUTION

Ø Chains may affect handling.

Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer's recommended limit, whichever is lower.

Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, and sharp turns.

Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.

Ø Do not use chains on a temporary spare tire; it may result in damage to the vehicle and to the tire.

Ø Do not use chains on roads that are free of snow or ice. The tires and chains could be damaged.

Ø Chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels.

NOTE

Use of tire chains on a vehicle equipped with P

245/50R20 specification tires could cause interference with the vehicle body and scratching. If tire chains are to be used, replace both front and rear tires with P245/60

R18 tires. Please consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system, the system may not function correctly when using tire chains.

Install the chains on the front tires.

Do not use chains on the rear tires.

Use only genuine Mazda tire chains.

Please consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

Installing the chains

1. Secure the chains on the front tires as tightly as possible. Always follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.

2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2

―1 km (1/4―1/2 mile).

4-10

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (153,1)


Driving Tips

Driving In Flooded Area

WARNING

Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly and applying the brakes lightly until brake performance returns to normal:

Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Increased stopping distance or the vehicle pulling to one side when braking could result in a serious accident. Light braking will indicate whether the brakes have been affected.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle on flooded roads as it could cause short circuiting of electrical/electronic parts, or engine damage or stalling from water absorption. If the vehicle has been immersed in water, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Overloading

WARNING

Be careful not to overload your vehicle:

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's door frame. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can estimate the weight of your load by weighing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle.

4-11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (154,1)


Towing

Trailer Towing (Except Mexico)

Your Mazda was designed and built primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

If you tow a trailer, follow these instructions because driver and passenger safety depends on proper equipment and safe driving habits. Towing a trailer will affect handling, braking, durability, performance, and economy.

Never overload vehicle or trailer. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if you need further details.

CAUTION

Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km (600 miles) of your new Mazda. If you do, you may damage the engine, transaxle, differential, wheel bearings, and other power train components.

qWeight Limits

TTW and GCWR

The total trailer weight (TTW), gross combination weight rating (GCWR), gross axle weight rating (GAWR), trailer load, and trailer tongue load must be within the prescribed limits.

l

The total trailer weight (TTW) is the sum of the weights of the trailer load (trailer weight plus cargo), trailer hitch, vehicle passengers, and vehicle load. Never allow l the total trailer weight (TTW) to exceed specifications in the Trailer Towing-Load

Table.

The maximum GCWR is the combination weight of the trailer and load plus the towing vehicle (including trailer hitch, vehicle passengers, and load). It must not exceed specifications in the load table.

GAWR and GVWR

Don't exceed front and rear GAWR (gross axle weight rating) and GVWR (gross vehicle weight rating). If you do, vehicle handling, braking, and performance will be affected.

These values are also on the Motor Vehicle Safety Certification Label posted on the driver's door frame.

High-altitude operation

In a high-altitude operating environment, a gasoline engine loses power at a rate of 3% to

4% per 304 m (1,000 ft) of elevation. In these conditions, a reduction in gross vehicle weight and gross combination weight is recommended.

4-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (155,1)


Towing

TRAILER TOWING-LOAD TABLE

Because vehicle weights vary, adjustments must be made to meet the requirements in this table.

Item

Without Towing

Package

Model

With Towing

Package

MAX. FRONTAL

AREA

2.97 m

2

(32 ft

2

) 4.65 m

2

(50 ft

2

)

Add trailer's weight, load and hitch; vehicle passengers and vehicle load

*

* i.e. baggage, food, camp gear

MAX. TTW 907 kg (2,000 lb) 1,588 kg (3,500 lb)

MAX. GCWR

MAX. GAWR

MAX. GVWR

Front

Rear

3,096 kg

*1

(6,826 lb) 3,777 kg

*1

(8,327 lb)

3,201 kg

*2

(7,057 lb) 3,882 kg

*2

(8,558 lb)

1,271 kg

*1

(2,802 lb)

1,307 kg

*2

(2,881 lb)

1,390 kg

*1

(3,064 lb)

1,456 kg

*2

(3,210 lb)

2,633 kg

*1

(5,805 lb)

2,733 kg

*2

(6,025 lb)

Tongue load

TRAILER-TON-

GUE LOAD

Trailer load

Tongue load/Trailer load × 100 = 10% to

15%

DISTRIBUTION

OF TRAILER

LOAD

Front

Rear

GCWR: Gross Combination Weight Rating (sum of TTW, vehicle weights and 2 passengers)

GAWR: Gross Axle Weight Rating

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

*1 2WD

*2 AWD

60%

40%

4-13

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (156,1)


Towing

WARNING

Always keep tow loads within specified limits as indicated in the Trailer Towing-Load

Table:

Attempting to tow loads greater than those specified is dangerous as it may cause serious handling and performance problems that could result in personal injury or vehicle damage, or both.

Load your trailer with the weight about 60% toward the front and 40% toward the rear:

Loading the trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front is dangerous.

Doing so could cause you to lose control. The trailer tongue load must be 10%

―15% of the total trailer load (sum of the weights of the trailer and cargo).

Always have the total trailer weight and tongue load determined prior to departure:

Attempting to tow loads without determining the total trailer weight and tongue load is dangerous. Trailer sway from crosswinds, rough roads or other causes could result in loss of control and a serious accident.

CAUTION

The total trailer weight and tongue load can be determined by weighing the trailer on platform scales at a highway weight station or a trucking company.

qTrailer Hitch

Use only a hitch ball recommended by the trailer manufacturer that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement.

When not towing a trailer, remove the trailer hitch (if detachable) to reduce the possibility of damage as a result of the vehicle being rear-ended.

4-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (157,1)


Towing

WARNING

Always make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached before departure:

An unsecured trailer hitch is dangerous as it causes greater trailer sway from crosswinds, rough roads or other causes, resulting in loss of control and a serious accident.

Examine all trailer-hitch mounting bolts regularly and tighten any that are loose. If the hitch is removed, seal any open mounting holes to prevent exhaust, dust, water, dirt and other foreign elements from filtering in, possibly endangering personal safety and damaging your vehicle.

Do not install a hitch that stiffens the bumper as it will reduce the bumper's performance.

Make sure there are no exhaust gas leaks into the passenger compartment if any mounting bolts are connected to the body:

Modifying your vehicle exhaust system is dangerous. Exhaust gas entering the vehicle could cause loss of consciousness or even death.

When mounting the trailer hitch, make no modifications to the vehicle exhaust system.

CAUTION

Ø Make all hitch adjustments with actual loads. Don't load and unload vehicle while adjusting hitch. This action will change the vehicle height.

Ø Don't use an axle-mounted hitch. This may damage the axle and related parts.

qTires

When towing a trailer, make sure all tires are inflated to the recommended cold-tire pressure, as indicated on the tire pressure chart on the driver's door frame. Trailer tire size, load rating, and inflation pressures should conform to tire manufacturer specifications.

WARNING

Never use the temporary spare tire when towing:

Using the temporary spare tire on your vehicle when towing a trailer is dangerous as it could result in tire failure, loss of control, and injury to vehicle occupants.

4-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (158,1)


Towing

qSafety Chains

Safety chains must be used as a precautionary measure should the trailer become unintentionally unhitched. They should cross under the trailer tongue and attach to the hitch. Leave enough slack to allow full turns. Consult literature published by your trailer or hitch manufacturer for more details.

WARNING

Make sure the safety chain is securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle prior to departure:

Towing a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle is dangerous. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, the trailer could wander into another lane and cause a collision.

qTrailer Lights

Trailer lights must comply with all federal, state, and local regulations. Equip your trailer as required before towing it day or night.

CAUTION

Don't connect a trailer lighting system directly to the lighting system of your Mazda.

This may damage your vehicle's electrical system and lighting systems. Have a recreational vehicle dealer or trailer rental agency connect the system, and inspect the brake lights and turn signals yourself before each trip.

qTrailer Brakes

If the total trailer weight exceeds 450 kg (1,000 lb), trailer brakes are required. If your trailer has brakes, make sure they comply with all federal, state, and local regulations.

WARNING

Do not connect a hydraulic trailer-brake system to your vehicle's brake system:

Connecting a hydraulic trailer-brake system directly to the vehicle brake system is dangerous and will result in inadequate braking and possible injury.

qTrailer Towing Tips

l l l

Verify that your Mazda maintains a near-normal attitude when a loaded or unloaded trailer is connected. Don't drive if it has an abnormal front-up or front-down position.

Inspect for incorrect tongue load, worn suspension parts, and trailer overloading.

Make sure the trailer is properly loaded and the cargo is secure to prevent it from shifting.

Make sure the mirrors conform to all government regulations. If they do not, install required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

4-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (159,1)


Towing

The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed, and improper trailer loading.

Before driving l l

Have your cooling and braking system checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Before starting out, inspect the operation of all vehicle and trailer lights and all vehicleto-trailer connections. Stop and re-inspect all lights and connections after driving a short distance.

Driving l l l l l

Your Mazda will handle differently with a trailer in tow, so practice turning, backing, and stopping in a traffic-free area.

Take time to get accustomed to the extra weight and length.

Allow more room between your vehicle and the one in front because braking distance increases with a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between your Mazda and the vehicle ahead.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

Avoid sudden braking. It may cause loss of control and result in jackknifing, especially so on wet or slippery roads.

l

Shift the shift lever to the D position when towing a trailer in hilly terrain or when heavily loaded.

These positions will allow operating the vehicle without frequent shifting.

Lane changes and turning

Avoid quick lane changes, sudden turns, and tight turns. Slow down before turning to avoid the need of sudden braking.

A turning trailer will make a tighter arc than the tow vehicle. Compensate with turns that are larger than normal.

Passing

Plan well ahead to pass other vehicles, and provide plenty of room before changing lanes.

Crosswinds from passing vehicles, especially larger ones, and the effects of rough roads will affect handling.

If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately, but gradually.

Steer straight ahead. If no extreme correction of steering or braking is made, the combination of less speed and firm steering will result in stability.

Backing up

Backing a vehicle with a trailer requires practice and patience. Back slowly, and have a helper outside at the rear of the trailer to reduce the risk of an accident.

To turn the trailer, place your hand at the bottom of the steering wheel and turn it in the direction you want the trailer to go. Make only slight movements to prevent sharp or prolonged turning.

4-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (160,1)


Towing

Ascending a hill

Shift into a lower gear to reduce the possibility of overloading or overheating the engine, or both.

Descending a hill

Shift into a lower gear and use engine compression as a braking effect.

WARNING

Always use lower gears to reduce speed:

Holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently is dangerous as it could cause the brakes to overheat and lose power, resulting in loss of control and a serious accident. Use lower gears to help reduce speed. Pull off the road and allow brakes to cool down whenever braking performance feels reduced.

Overheated engine

The extra weight of the trailer may strain the engine on hot days and on long or steep upgrades.

If the temperature gauge indicates overheating, turn off the air conditioner, drive safely to the side of the road, park off the right-of-way and wait for engine to cool. Refer to

Overheating (page 7-14).

Parking

Always make sure the tires of the trailer and the tow vehicle are blocked while parked.

Apply the parking brake firmly and put the transaxle in P.

Avoid parking on an incline, but if you must, follow these instructions:

1. Depress and hold down the brake pedal.

2. Have a helper put wheel blocks against the downhill side of all vehicle and trailer tires.

3. Then release the brake pedal slowly until the blocks bear the load.

l l

If the grade is downhill, turn the steering wheel so that the front of the front tires face the curb.

If it is uphill, face the rear of the front tires against the curb.

4. Firmly apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transaxle into P, and stop the engine.

To restart after parking on an incline:

1. With the transaxle in P, start the engine. (Be sure to depress and hold the brake pedal.)

2. Shift into gear.

4-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (161,1)


Towing

3. Release the parking brake (also the foot brake) and pull away from the wheel blocks.

Stop; apply the parking brake and shift into P.

4. Have a helper retrieve the wheel blocks.

Fuel consumption

Trailer towing causes higher fuel consumption.

Maintenance

If you tow a trailer frequently, have your vehicle serviced as shown in Scheduled


Form No.8V83-EA-06I

4-19



Black plate (162,1)

4-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (163,1)

5

Driving Your Mazda

Explanation of instruments and controls.

Starting and Driving ..................................................................... 5-2

Ignition Switch .......................................................................... 5-2

Starting the Engine .................................................................... 5-4

Brake System ............................................................................ 5-5

Automatic Transaxle Controls ................................................ 5-10

Power Steering ........................................................................ 5-16

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation

í

..................................... 5-16

Cruise Control ......................................................................... 5-19

Traction Control System (TCS) .............................................. 5-22

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)/Roll Stability Control

(RSC) ...................................................................................... 5-25

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

í

......................................... 5-27

Instrument Cluster and Indicators ............................................ 5-33

Meters and Gauges .................................................................. 5-33

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds ............................ 5-37

Warning/Indicator Lights ........................................................ 5-37

Beep Sounds ........................................................................... 5-52

Switches and Controls ................................................................ 5-53

Lighting Control ..................................................................... 5-53

Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-56

Fog Lights

í

............................................................................ 5-57

Windshield Wipers and Washer .............................................. 5-57

Rear Window Wiper and Washer ............................................ 5-61

Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-61

Horn ........................................................................................ 5-62

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-63

í

Some models.

5-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (164,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Ignition Switch

Auxiliary key (with advanced key)

NOTE

When starting the engine using the advanced

key, refer to Starting the Engine (page 3-9).

When starting the engine with the auxiliary key, perform the following procedure.

1. Remove the auxiliary key from the

advanced key (page 3-15).

2. Make sure the start knob is in LOCK position.

3. Remove the start knob by pulling it outward while pressing the buttons on both the left and right sides.

qIgnition Switch Positions

With advanced key

Without advanced key

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. Only in this position can the key be removed.

4. Insert the auxiliary key in the ignition switch.

5-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (165,1)

Driving Your Mazda


WARNING

Remove the key only when the vehicle is parked:

Removing the key from the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Removing the key allows the steering wheel to lock. You will lose steering control and a serious accident could occur. (For vehicles equipped with the advanced key, the steering wheel locks when the starter knob is turned to the LOCK position.)


Intentionally placing the start knob into LOCK position is much more important where you will not be removing the key to leave the vehicle and because leaving it in other positions will disable some of the vehicle security systems and run the battery down.


NOTE

If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side.

Leaving the key or start knob in any position but LOCK position also disables some of the security features and may run the battery down.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel unlocks and some electrical accessories will operate.

ON

This is the normal running position after the engine is started. The warning lights

(except brakes) should be inspected

before the engine is started (page 5-37).

NOTE

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the sound of the fuel pump motor operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This does not indicate an abnormality.

NOTE

Vibration of the brake pedal may be felt when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, however, this is a normal operation of the DSC/RSC and does not indicate an abnormality.

START

The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked after the

engine is started (page 5-37).

qIgnition Key Reminder

If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or

ACC position with the key inserted, a continuous beep sound will be heard when the driver's door is opened.

5-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (166,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Starting the Engine

NOTE

Engine-starting is controlled by the spark ignition system.

This system meets all Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise.

1. Occupants should fasten their seat belts.

2. Make sure the parking brake is on.


4. Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift into neutral (N).

NOTE

The starter will not operate if the shift lever is not in P or N.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and hold (up to 10 seconds at a time) until the engine starts.

CAUTION

Don't try the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds before trying again. Otherwise, you may damage the starter and drain the battery.

6. After starting the engine, let it idle for about 10 seconds.

NOTE l

In extremely cold weather, below _18 °C

(0 °F), or after the vehicle has not been l driven in several days, let the engine warm up without operating the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without use of the accelerator.

5-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (167,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Brake System qFoot Brake

Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal use.

Should power-assist fail, you can stop by applying greater force than normal to the brake pedal. But the distance required to stop will be greater than usual.

WARNING

Do not coast with the engine stalled or turned off, find a safe place to stop:

Coasting with the engine stalled or turned off is dangerous. Braking will require more effort, and the brake's power-assist could be depleted if you pump the brake. This will cause longer stopping distances or even an accident.

Shift to a lower gear when going down steep hills:

Driving with your foot continuously on the brake pedal or steadily applying the brakes for long distances is dangerous. This causes overheated brakes, resulting in longer stopping distances or even total brake failure. This could cause loss of vehicle control and a serious accident. Avoid continuous application of the brakes.

WARNING

Dry brakes that have become wet by driving very slowly and applying the brakes lightly until brake performance is normal:


qParking Brake

WARNING


Intentionally placing the start knob into LOCK position is much more important where you will not be removing the key to leave the vehicle and because leaving it in other positions will disable some of the vehicle security systems and run the battery down.


CAUTION

Driving with the parking brake on will cause excessive wear of the brake linings or pads.

5-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (168,1)

Driving Your Mazda


NOTE

For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving

(page 4-9) regarding parking brake use.

Setting the parking brake

Depress the brake pedal, then depress the parking brake pedal fully.

qBrake System Warning Light

Releasing the parking brake

Depress the brake pedal, then depress the parking brake pedal until it releases.

Gradually let up on the parking brake pedal.

NOTE

Release the parking brake pedal once before trying to reapply it.

This warning has the following functions:

Parking brake warning

The light comes on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. It goes off when the parking brake is fully released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the light stays on after the parking brake is fully released, you may have a brake problem.

Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.

You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or that it may go closer to the floor.

In either case, it will take longer to stop the vehicle.

1. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required (page 8-23).

2. After adding fluid, check the light again.

If the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an


Even if the light goes out have your brake system inspected as soon as possible by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

5-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (169,1)

Driving Your Mazda


NOTE

Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the brake light is no longer illuminated.

WARNING

Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an

Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately.

qParking Brake Reminder

If the parking brake has not been completely released and the vehicle is driven at about 5 km/h (3 mph) or faster, a continuous beep sound will be heard to notify the driver that the parking brake has not been released.

qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS control unit continuously monitors the speed of each wheel. If one is about to lock up, the ABS responds by automatically releasing and reapplying that wheel's brake.

The driver will feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal and may hear a chattering noise from the brake system. This is normal when the ABS operates. Don't pump the brakes, continue to press down on the brake pedal.

WARNING

Do not rely on ABS or RSC as a substitute for safe driving:

The ABS and RSC cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely), driving on ice and snow, and hydroplaning


NOTE l l

Braking distances may be longer on loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for example) which usually have a hard foundation. A vehicle with a normal braking system may require less distance to stop under these conditions because the tires will build up a wedge of surface layer when the wheels skid.

The sound of the ABS operating may be heard when starting the engine or immediately after starting the vehicle.

However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

qABS Warning Light

The warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

5-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (170,1)

Driving Your Mazda


If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS.

Should this happen, consult an Authorized


NOTE

When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS warning light comes on. This is due to a weak battery, not a malfunction.

Recharge the battery.

qElectronic Brake Force

Distribution System Warning

If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may turn the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light on at the same time. The problem is likely to be an electronic brake force distribution system.

WARNING

Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated at the same time is dangerous.

When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

qBrake Assist

During emergency braking situations when it is necessary to depress the brake pedal with greater force, the brake assist system provides braking assistance, thus enhancing braking performance.

When the brake pedal is depressed hard or depressed more quickly, the brakes apply more firmly.

NOTE l l

When the brake pedal is depressed hard or depressed more quickly, the pedal will feel softer but the brakes will apply more firmly.

This is a normal effect of the brake assist operation and does not indicate an abnormality.

The brake assist equipment does not supersede the functionality of the vehicle's main braking system.

5-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qBrake Pad Wear Indicator

When the disc brake pads become worn, the built-in wear indicators contact the disc plates. This causes a screeching noise to warn that the pads should be replaced.

Black plate (171,1)

Driving Your Mazda


When you hear this noise, consult an


WARNING

Do not drive with worn disc pads:

Driving with worn disc pads is dangerous. The brakes could fail and cause a serious accident. As soon as you hear a screeching noise consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

5-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Driving Your Mazda


Automatic Transaxle Controls

Black plate (172,1)

Various Lockouts:

Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position).

Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.

NOTE

This Sport AT has an option that is not included in traditional automatic transaxle - giving the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be retained as you change speeds. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confirm

you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 5-12).

5-10

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (173,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qTransaxle Ranges

The shift lever must be in P or N to operate the starter.

P (Park)

P locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.

WARNING

Always set the shift lever to P AND set the parking brake:

Only setting the shift lever to the P position without using the parking brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous. If P fails to hold, the vehicle could move and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the vehicle is moving can damage your transaxle.

Ø Shifting into a driving gear or reverse when the engine is running faster than idle can damage the transaxle.

R (Reverse)

In position R, the vehicle moves only backward. You must be at a complete stop before shifting to or from R, except under rare circumstances as explained in

Rocking the Vehicle (page 4-9).

N (Neutral)

In N, the wheels and transaxle are not locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or brakes are on.

WARNING

If the engine is running faster than idle, do not shift from N or P into a driving gear:

It's dangerous to shift from N or P into a driving gear when the engine is running faster than idle. If this is done, the vehicle could move suddenly, causing an accident or serious injury.

Do not shift into N when driving the vehicle:

Shifting into N while driving is dangerous. Engine braking cannot be applied when decelerating which could lead to an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not shift into N when driving the vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle damage.

NOTE

Apply the parking brake or depress the brake pedal before moving the shift lever from N to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

D (Drive)

D is the normal driving position. From a stop, the transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence.

M (Manual)

M is the manual shift mode position.

Gears can be shifted up or down by operating the shift lever.

Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-12).

5-11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (174,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qActive Adaptive Shift (AAS)

Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) automatically controls the transaxle shift points to best suit the road conditions and driver input. This optimizes engine performance and improves driving comfort. When cornering the vehicle,

AAS mode will hold the transaxle in the gear the vehicle was in before entering the curve, allowing the vehicle to be accelerated from the same gear after exiting the curve.

If the driver accelerates rapidly, or accelerates and decelerates rapidly by operating the accelerator and brake pedal for a certain period of time while the selector lever is in the D position, AAS mode could activate. When this occurs,

AAS mode will maintain the transaxle in the optimum gear and the driver may sense that the transaxle is not shifting, however this does not indicate an abnormality.

qShift-Lock System

The shift-lock system prevents shifting out of P unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift from P:

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Move the shift lever.

NOTE l

When the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be shifted l l from P.

To be sure the vehicle is in park, the ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in P.

(With Advanced Key)

The ignition switch cannot be turned from the ACC position to the LOCK position when the shift lever is not in P.

qManual Shift Mode

This mode gives you the feel of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by operating the shift lever and allows you to control engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels much like a manual transaxle when more control is desired.

To change to manual shift mode, shift the lever from D to M.

To return to automatic shift mode, shift the lever from M to D.

NOTE

If you change to manual shift mode when the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to M1.

5-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (175,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Indicators

Shift position indicator

In manual shift mode, the

“M” of the shift position indicator in the instrument panel illuminates.

Gear position indicator

The numeral for the selected gear illuminates.

Shift position indicator

Shifting

Manually Shifting up

(M1

→M2→M3→M4→M5→M6)

To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift lever back ( ) once.


NOTE l

If the gears cannot be shifted down when driving at higher speeds, the gear position l indicator will flash twice to signal that the gears cannot be shifted down.

If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) temperature becomes too high, there is the possibility that the transaxle will switch to automatic shift mode, canceling manual shift mode and turning off the gear position indicator illumination. This is a normal function to protect the AT. After the ATF temperature has decreased, the gear position indicator illumination turns back on and driving in manual shift mode is restored.

NOTE l

When driving slowly, the gears may not l l shift up depending on vehicle speed.

In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up automatically. Don't run the engine with the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If the tachometer needle enters the RED ZONE, you may feel engine-braking because the fuel delivery will be stopped to protect the engine. However, this does not indicate an abnormality.

When depressing the accelerator fully, the transaxle will shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed.

5-13

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (176,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Manually Shifting down

(M6

→M5→M4→M3→M2→M1)

To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift lever forward ( ) once.

WARNING

Do not use engine braking on slippery road surfaces or at high speeds:

Shifting down while driving on wet, snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving at high speeds causes sudden engine braking, which is dangerous.

The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. This could lead to loss of vehicle control and an accident.

NOTE l

When driving at high speeds, the gear may l l not shift down depending on vehicle speed.

During deceleration, the gear may automatically shift down depending on vehicle speed.

When depressing the accelerator fully, the transaxle will shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed.

Second gear fixed mode

When the shift lever is tapped back ( ) while the vehicle is stopped, the transaxle is set in the second gear fixed mode. The gear is fixed in second while in this mode for easier starting and driving on slippery roads. If the shift lever is tapped back ( ) or forward ( ) while in the second gear fixed mode, the mode will be canceled.

Shifting specification

Shifting up

If the vehicle speed is lower than the speed specified for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted up to a higher gear.

Gear

M1

→M2

M2

→M3

M3

→M4

M4

→M5

M5

→M6

Vehicle speed

You can shift up to M2 whether the vehicle is stopped or moving.

15 km/h (10 mph)

29 km/h (19 mph)

40 km/h (25 mph)

50 km/h (32 mph)

Shifting down

If the vehicle speed is higher than the speed specified for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted down to a lower gear.

Gear

M6

→M5

M5

→M4

M4

→M3

M3

→M2

M2

→M1

Vehicle speed

230 km/h (142 mph)

201 km/h (124 mph)

150 km/h (93 mph)

96 km/h (59 mph)

49 km/h (30 mph)

During deceleration, the gears shift down automatically when speed is reduced to the following:

Gear Vehicle speed

M6

→M5

M5

→M4

47 km/h (29 mph)

37 km/h (22 mph)

M4

→M3

26 km/h (16 mph)

M3 or M2

→M1

9 km/h (5 mph)

5-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (177,1)

NOTE

The gear does not shift down to M1 automatically while in the second gear fixed mode.

If the vehicle is kicked down at the following speeds or lower, the gears shift down automatically:

Gear

M6

→M5

M5

→M4

M4

→M3

M3

→M2

Vehicle speed

230 km/h (142 mph)

90 km/h (55 mph)

65 km/h (40 mph)

40 km/h (24 mph)

Recommendations for shifting

Upshifting

For normal acceleration and cruising, we recommend these shift points.

Gear

M1 to M2

M2 to M3

M3 to M4

M4 to M5

M5 to M6

Vehicle speed

24 km/h (15 mph)

40 km/h (25 mph)

65 km/h (40 mph)

73 km/h (45 mph)

80 km/h (50 mph)

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.

On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

Driving Your Mazda


qDriving Tips

Passing

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress the accelerator fully. The transaxle will shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed.

Climbing steep grades from a stop

To climb a steep grade from a stopped position:


2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the load weight and grade steepness.

3. Release the brake pedal while gradually accelerating.

Descending steep grades

When descending a steep grade, shift to lower gears, depending on load weight and grade steepness. Descend slowly, using the brakes only occasionally to prevent them from overheating.

5-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (178,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Power Steering

Power steering is only operable when the engine is running. If the engine is off or if the power steering system is inoperable, you can still steer, but it requires more physical effort.

If the steering feels stiffer than usual during normal driving, consult an


CAUTION

Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme left or right for more than 5 seconds with the engine running.

This could damage the power steering system.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

Operation

í

AWD provides excellent driveability on snow-covered and ice-packed roads, sand and mud, as well as on steep slopes and other slippery surfaces.

5-16

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (179,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qAWD Driving

WARNING

Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers when driving this vehicle:

Sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvering of this vehicle is dangerous as it could result in the increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle roll-over, personal injury or death.

This vehicle has a higher center of gravity. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and AWD vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity.

Utility and AWD vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as any more than low profile sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. In addition, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

RSC might help if you get into trouble, but then it might not be able to allow you to fully recover, always drive carefully with the vehicle's height in mind.

Drive carefully when the vehicle is loaded by lowering vehicle speed and applying the brakes earlier:

Abrupt maneuvering and sudden braking when driving a loaded vehicle is dangerous as the driving behavior of a vehicle with a high center of gravity is different when it is loaded compared to when it is not, and could result in the loss of vehicle control and an accident.

qAWD Warning Light

This warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Thereafter, the warning light will illuminate or flash under the following conditions: l

Illuminates when there is an l l abnormality with the AWD system.

Flashes when the differential oil temperature is abnormally high.

Flashes when there are continually large differences between front and rear wheel rotation, such as when trying to pull away from an icy surface.

If the AWD warning light illuminates:

If the AWD warning light illuminates, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

If the AWD warning light flashes:

Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a few moments; if the warning light stops flashing, you can resume driving. If the light does not stop flashing, contact an


5-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (180,1)

Driving Your Mazda


WARNING

Never spin a wheel that is off the ground:

Spinning a wheel that is off the ground as a result of the vehicle being stuck or in a ditch is dangerous. The drive assembly could be seriously damaged which could lead to an accident or could even lead to overheating, oil leakage, and a fire.

qTires and Tire Chains

The condition of the tires plays a large role in the performance of the vehicle.

Moreover, to prevent adverse effects to the drive assembly, please note the following:

Tires l l l l

When replacing tires, always replace all front and rear tires at the same time.

All tires must be of the same size, manufacture, brand and tread pattern.

Pay particular attention when equipping snow or other types of winter tires.

Do not mix tread-worn tires with normal tires.

Inspect tire inflation pressures at the specified periods and adjust to the specified pressures.

NOTE

Check the tire inflation pressure label attached to driver's door frame for the correct tire inflation pressure.

l

Make sure to equip the vehicle with genuine wheels of the specified size, on all wheels. With AWD, the system is calibrated for all four wheels being of the same dimensions.

5-18 l l

Tire chains l

Install tire chains to the front tires.

Do not drive the vehicle faster than 30 km/h (19 mph) with the tire chains installed.

Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains on road conditions other than snow or ice.

qTowing

If the vehicle requires towing, have it towed with all four wheels completely off

the ground(page 7-20).

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (181,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Cruise Control

With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about 30 km/h (19 mph).

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:

Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in loss of vehicle control.

Ø Hilly terrain

Ø Steep inclines

Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic

Ø Slippery or winding roads

Ø Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed

qCruise Main Indicator Light

(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator

Light (Green) qActivation/Deactivation

To activate the system, press up on the

ON/OFF switch.

The cruise main indicator light illuminates.

To deactivate the system, press down on the ON/OFF switch.

The cruise main indicator light turns off.

The indicator light has two colors.

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)

The indicator light illuminates amber when the ON/OFF switch is pressed up and the cruise control system is activated.

Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)

The indicator light illuminates green when a cruising speed has been set.

WARNING

Keep the ON/OFF switch off when cruise control is not in use:

Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when not using the cruise control is dangerous as you may hit one of the other buttons and put the vehicle in cruise control unexpectedly. This could result in loss of vehicle control.

qTo Set Speed

1. Activate the cruise control system by momentarily pressing up the ON/OFF switch.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).

5-19

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (182,1)

Driving Your Mazda


3. Press down or press up on the cruise control SET +/SET - switch and release it at the speed you want. Release the accelerator at the same time.

qTo Increase Cruising Speed

Follow either of these procedures.

To increase speed using cruise control switch

Press up on the cruise control SET + switch and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.

Release the switch at the speed you want.

Cruise control switch

NOTE l l l l

Release the cruise control switch at the desired speed, otherwise the speed will continue increasing while the switch is pulled up, and continue decreasing while it is pulled down (except when the accelerator pedal is depressed).

The SET function can't be activated until about 2 seconds after the ON/OFF switch has been engaged.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may momentarily slow down going up or speed up while going down.

Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed drops below 30 km/h (19 mph) when cruise is activated, such as when climbing a steep grade.


Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that allows you to increase your current speed in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a momentary tap of the cruise control switch. Multiple taps will increase your vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each tap.

5-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (183,1)

Driving Your Mazda


To increase speed using accelerator pedal

Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate to the desired speed.

Press down or press up on the cruise control SET +/SET - switch and release it immediately.


Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that allows you to decrease your current speed in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a momentary tap of the cruise control switch. Multiple taps will decrease your vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each tap.

qTo Resume Cruising Speed at

More Than 30 km/h (19 mph)

If some other method besides the ON/

OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed (such as applying the brake pedal) and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RESUME button is pressed.

If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19 mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 30 km/h (19 mph) and press the RESUME button.

NOTE

Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on. Greater speed will not interfere with or change the set speed.

Take your foot off the accelerator to return to the set speed.

qTo Decrease Cruising Speed

Press down the cruise control SET switch and hold it. The vehicle will gradually slow.

Release the switch at the speed you want.

qTo Cancel

To cancel the system, use one of these methods: l

Pull down the ON/OFF switch.

l

Slightly depress the brake pedal.


5-21

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (184,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving l

Press the CANCEL button.

The system is off when the ignition is off.

NOTE

Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed (such as may happen when climbing a long, steep grade) or below 30 km/h (19 mph).

Traction Control System

(TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) enhances traction and safety by controlling engine torque and braking.

When the TCS detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers engine torque and operates the brakes to prevent loss of traction.

This means that on a slick surface, the engine adjusts automatically to provide optimum power to the drive wheels without causing them to spin and lose traction.

WARNING

Do not rely on the traction control system as a substitute for safe driving:

The traction control system (TCS) cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely), and hydroplaning


Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at reduced speeds when roads are covered with ice and/or snow:

Driving without proper traction devices on snow and/or ice-covered roads is dangerous. The traction control system (TCS) alone cannot provide adequate traction and you could still have an accident.

5-22

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (185,1)

Driving Your Mazda


NOTE

If, because of hard driving, TSC intervenes frequently, TSC may then have to shut down to protect the brakes from overheating, then after the brakes have cooled down the control returns to normal operations. So don't drive the car to its handling limits thinking TSC will save you from yourself.

qTCS/DSC Indicator Light qTCS OFF Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the indicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and they may not operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an


NOTE l

In addition to the indicator light flashing, a l slight lugging sound will come from the engine. This indicates that the TCS is operating properly.

On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it will be impossible to achieve high rpm when the TCS is on.

This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

It also illuminates when the TCS OFF switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.

Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 5-24.

If the light remains illuminated and the

TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic stability control may have a malfunction.

NOTE

If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the TCS

OFF indicator light remain illuminated even after turning the ignition switch to the ON position, attempt the procedure again. If this still does not work, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

5-23

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (186,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qTCS OFF Switch

If the vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h

(9 mph), press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light will illuminate.

Press the switch again to turn the TCS back on. The TCS OFF indicator light will go out. If the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h (9 mph), the TCS OFF indicator light will not illuminate even if the switch is pressed.

NOTE l

When TCS is on and you attempt to free the vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of l l l l freshly fallen snow, the TCS will activate.

Depressing the accelerator will not increase engine power and freeing the vehicle may be difficult. When this happens, turn off the TCS.

If the TCS is off when the engine is turned off, it automatically activates when the ignition switch is turned on.

Leaving the TCS on will provide the best traction.

If the TCS is OFF when the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h (9 mph), it automatically activates and the TCS OFF indicator light will turn off.

If the TCS OFF switch is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more, the TCS OFF switch malfunction detection function operates and the TCS and DSC/RSC system activates automatically. The TCS OFF indicator light turns off while the TCS system is operative.

5-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (187,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Dynamic Stability Control

(DSC)/Roll Stability

Control (RSC)

The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) automatically controls braking and engine torque in conjunction with systems such as ABS and TCS to help control side slip when driving on slippery surfaces or during sudden or evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle safety.

The Roll Stability Control (RSC) automatically controls braking and engine torque in conjunction with systems such as ABS and TCS to help control rolling when cornering at a higher speed or during sudden or evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle safety.

Refer to ABS (page 5-7) and TCS (page

5-22).

DSC/RSC operation is possible at speeds greater than 15 km/h (9 mph).

WARNING

Do not rely on the dynamic stability control as a substitute for safe driving:

The dynamic stability control (DSC)/

Roll Stability Control (RSC) cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating

(following another vehicle too closely), and hydroplaning (reduced tire friction and road contact because of water on the road surface). You can still have an accident.

When driving under bad road conditions, lower the vehicle speed and drive carefully:

Reckless driving and excessive speed under any road conditions is dangerous as it reduces vehicle stability and operability which could result in an accident.

5-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Driving Your Mazda


CAUTION

Ø The DSC/RSC may not operate correctly unless the following are observed:

Ø

Use tires of the correct size specified for your Mazda on all four wheels.

Ø

Use tires of the same manufacturer, brand and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Ø

Do not mix worn tires.

Ø The DSC/RSC may not operate correctly when tire chains are used or a temporary spare tire is installed because the tire diameter changes.

Ø Do not modify the suspension, steering wheel, and tires. It may affect the DSC/RSC.

Ø Do not install non-genuine speakers since their vibration may affect the DSC/RSC sensors.

qTCS/DSC/RSC Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC/

RSC is operating, the indicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC/RSC may have a malfunction and they may not operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an


5-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Black plate (188,1)



Black plate (189,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Tire Pressure Monitoring System

í

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.

If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.

The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to the receiver unit in the vehicle.

Tire pressure sensors

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.

When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire pressure gauge is recommended.

TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires regularly.

í

Some models.

5-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (190,1)

Driving Your Mazda


CAUTION

Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow out.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

5-28

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (191,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qTire Pressure Monitoring System

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Thereafter, the warning light illuminates and a beep is heard when tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, and flashes when there is a system malfunction.

WARNING

If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard, decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid sudden maneuvering and braking:

If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard, it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen and result in an accident.

To determine if you have a slow leak or a flat, pull over to a safe position where you can check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again, an

Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station.

Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:

Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous, even if you know why it is illuminated. Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident.

Warning light illuminates/Warning beep sounds

When the warning light illuminates, and the warning beep sound is heard (about 3 seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.

5-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (192,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire pressure. Refer to the specification charts

(page 10-6).

CAUTION

When replacing/repairing the tires or wheels or both, have the work done by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors may be damaged.

NOTE l

Perform tire pressure adjustment when the tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary l l according to the tire temperature, therefore let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting the tire pressures. When pressure is adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may turn on after the tires cool and pressure drops below specification.

Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light, resulting from the tire air pressure dropping due to cold ambient temperature, may go out if the ambient temperature rises. In this case, it will also be necessary to adjust the tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning light illuminates due to a drop in tire air pressure, make sure to check and adjust the tire air pressures.

After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may require some time for the TPMS warning light to go out. If the TPMS warning light remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10 minutes, and then verify that it goes out.

Tires can loose a little air quite naturally over time and the TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too soft over time or you have a flat. However, when you find one low tire in a set of four - that is an indication of trouble; you should have someone drive the vehicle slowly forward so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and any metal sticking through tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be addressed by more than simply refilling the trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer which has all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems and order the best replacement tire for your vehicle.

5-30

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (193,1)

Driving Your Mazda


If the warning light illuminates again even after the tire pressures are adjusted, there may be a tire puncture. Replace the punctured tire with the temporary spare

tire (page 7-8).

NOTE

A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the temporary spare tire. The warning light will flash continuously while the temporary spare tire is being used.

Warning light flashes

When the warning light flashes, there may be a system malfunction. Consult an


qSystem Error Activation

When the TPMS warning light flashes, there may be a system malfunction.


A system error activation may occur in the following cases: l l

When there is equipment or a device near the vehicle using the same radio frequency as that of the tire pressure sensors.

When using the following devices in the vehicle that may cause radio interference with the receiver unit.

l l l l l l l

A digital device such as a personal computer.

A current converter device such as a

DC-AC converter.

When excess snow or ice adheres to the vehicle, especially around the wheels.

When the tire pressure sensor batteries are exhausted.

When using a wheel with no tire pressure sensor installed.

When using tires with steel wire reinforcement in the side walls.

When using tire chains.

qTires and Wheels

CAUTION

When inspecting or adjusting the tire air pressures, do not apply excessive force to the stem part of the wheel unit. The stem part could be damaged.

Changing tires and wheels

The following procedure allows the

TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's unique ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are changed, such as changing to and from winter tires.

NOTE

Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID signal code. The signal code must be registered with the TPMS before it can work.

The easiest way to do it is to have an

Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and complete ID signal code registration.

When having tires changed at an

Authorized Mazda Dealer

Tire pressure sensor ID signal code registration is completed when an

Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your vehicle's tires.

When changing tires yourself

If you or someone else changes tires, you or someone else can also undertake the steps for the TPMS to complete the ID signal code registration.

1. After tires have been changed, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then turn it back to the ACC or LOCK position.

2. Wait for about 15 minutes.

5-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (194,1)

Driving Your Mazda


3. After about 15 minutes, drive the vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h

(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire pressure sensor ID signal code will be registered automatically.

NOTE

If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will flash because the sensor ID signal code would not have been registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID signal code will register upon driving the vehicle for 10 minutes.

Replacing tires and wheels

CAUTION

Ø When replacing/repairing the tires or wheels or both, have the work done by an Authorized Mazda

Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors may be damaged.

Ø The wheels equipped on your

Mazda are specially designed for installation of the tire pressure sensors. Do not use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it may not be possible to install the tire pressure sensors.

Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors installed whenever tires or wheels are replaced.

When having a tire or wheel or both replaced, the following types of tire pressure sensor installations are possible.

l

The tire pressure sensor is removed from the old wheel and installed to the l new one.

The same tire pressure sensor is used with the same wheel. Only the tire is replaced.

5-32 l

A new tire pressure sensor is installed to a new wheel.

NOTE l

The tire pressure sensor ID signal code l must be registered when a new tire pressure sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire pressure sensor and registration of the tire pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an


When reinstalling a previously removed tire pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the grommet (seal between valve body/sensor and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (195,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

Meters and Gauges

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the dashboard gauges illuminate.

Speedometer ...................................................................................................... page 5-34

Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................. page 5-34

Tachometer ........................................................................................................ page 5-35

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................................................................. page 5-35

Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 5-36

Dashboard Illumination ..................................................................................... page 5-36

5-33

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (196,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qSpeedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle.

qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip

Meter Selector

The display mode can be changed between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the selector while one of them is displayed. The selected mode will be displayed.

Selector

Odometer

Trip meter A

Odometer

Trip meter B

Press the selector

Press the selector

Odometer

Trip meter

Odometer

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

The trip meter can record the total distance of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter A, and the other is recorded in trip meter B.

For instance, trip meter A can record the distance from the point of origin, and trip meter B can record the distance from where the fuel tank is filled.

When trip meter A is selected, pressing the selector again within one second will change to trip meter B mode.

When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. When trip meter B is selected, TRIP B will be displayed.

5-34

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (197,1)

The trip meter records the total distance the vehicle is driven until the meter is again reset. Return it to

“0.0” by holding the selector depressed for more than 1 second. Use this meter to measure trip distances and to compute fuel consumption.

NOTE l

Only the trip meters record tenths of l l l kilometers (miles).

The trip record will be erased when:

The power supply is interrupted (blown fuse or the battery is disconnected).

The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km

(mile).

qTachometer

The tachometer shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute

(rpm).

Driving Your Mazda


qEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The engine coolant temperature gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant.

If the needle is near H, it indicates overheating.

CAUTION

Driving with an overheated engine can cause serious engine damage

(page 7-14).

Red zone

CAUTION

Don't run the engine with the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

5-35

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Driving Your Mazda


qFuel Gauge

The fuel gauge shows approximately how much fuel is in the tank. We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full. When the low fuel warning light illuminates or when the needle is near E, refuel as soon as possible.

Dim

Bright

Black plate (198,1)

Low fuel warning light

NOTE

The direction of the arrow ( ) shown next to the low fuel warning light indicates that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of the vehicle.

qDashboard Illumination

Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument cluster and other illuminations in the dashboard.

NOTE l

The brightness of dashboard illuminations can be adjusted when the headlight switch l l is in the or position.

When the dashboard illumination brightness cannot be adjusted any more, a beep sound will be heard.

(Black-out meter)

The brightness of the instrument cluster illumination can be adjusted when the headlight switch is in any position.

Canceling the illumination dimmer

(Black-out meter and dashboard illuminations)

When the headlight switch is in the or position, the illumination of the instrument cluster and the information display dims.

When driving on snowy or foggy roads, or in other situations when the instrument cluster or information display's visibility is reduced due to glare from surrounding brightness, cancel the illumination dimmer and increase the illumination intensity.

To cancel the illumination dimmer, press the dashboard illumination knob.

NOTE

If the dashboard illumination knob is kept at the illumination dimmer cancel position, the instrument cluster and the information display will not dim when the headlight switch is turned to the or position again.

5-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (199,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds

Warning/Indicator Lights

Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas

Signal Warning/Indicator Lights

Brake System Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

Check Engine Light

Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power Warning Light

ABS Warning Light

Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light

Page

5-39

5-40

5-41

5-41

5-42

5-39

5-42

5-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (200,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Signal

Low Fuel Warning Light

Warning/Indicator Lights

Check Fuel Cap Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep

Door-Ajar Warning Light

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

Automatic Transaxle Warning Light

AWD Warning Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light

KEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY Indicator Light (Green)

Security Indicator Light

Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light

Shift Position Indicator Light

TCS/DSC Indicator Light

TCS OFF Indicator Light

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)

Light-On Indicator Light

5-43

5-45

5-45

5-45

5-45

Page

5-43

5-43

5-46

5-50

5-50

5-51

5-51

5-51

5-48

5-49

5-50

5-38

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (201,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Signal Warning/Indicator Lights

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights

qBrake System Warning Light

This warning has the following functions:

Parking brake warning

The light comes on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. It goes off when the parking brake is fully released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the light stays on after the parking brake is fully released, you may have a brake problem.

Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.

You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or that it may go closer to the floor.

In either case, it will take longer to stop the vehicle.

1. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required (page 8-23).

2. After adding fluid, check the light again.

If the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an


Page

5-51

Even if the light goes out have your brake system inspected as soon as possible by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTE

Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the brake light is no longer illuminated.

WARNING

Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an

Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately.

qABS Warning Light

The warning light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

5-39

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (202,1)

Driving Your Mazda


If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS.

Should this happen, consult an Authorized


NOTE

When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS warning light comes on. This is due to a weak battery, not a malfunction.

Recharge the battery.

qElectronic Brake Force

Distribution System Warning

WARNING

Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated at the same time is dangerous.

When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

qCharging System Warning Light

If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may turn the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light on at the same time. The problem is likely to be an electronic brake force distribution system.

This warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off when the engine is started.

If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system.

Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

CAUTION

Don't continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly.

5-40

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (203,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qEngine Oil Pressure Warning Light qCheck Engine Light

This warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off when the engine is started.

This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.

If the light illuminates while driving:

1. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.

2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 8-20).

If it's low, add oil.

4. Start the engine and check the warning light.

If the light remains illuminated even after you add oil, stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an


CAUTION

Don't run the engine if oil pressure is low. It could result in extensive engine damage.

This indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes off when the engine is started.

If this light comes on while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light came on and consult an


The check engine light may come on in the following cases: l

The fuel tank level being very low or l l l approaching empty.

The engine's electrical system has a problem.

The emission control system has a problem.

The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely.

If the check engine light remains on or flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer as soon as possible.

5-41

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (204,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qPowertrain Malfunction/Reduced

Power Warning Light qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt

Pretensioner System Warning Light


If this light comes on while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light came on and consult an


The powertrain malfunction/reduced power warning light may come on in the following cases: l

The engine's electrical system has a l problem.

The emission control system has a problem.

If the powertrain malfunction/reduced power warning light remains on, do not drive at high speeds and consult an



A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If any of these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work in an accident.

WARNING

Never tamper with the air bag/ pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:

Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/ pretensioner could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.

5-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (205,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qLow Fuel Warning Light qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep

Low fuel warning light

This warning light in the fuel gauge signals that the fuel tank will soon be empty.

Refuel as soon as possible.

qCheck Fuel Cap Warning Light


If the check fuel cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel-filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel-filler cap.

Refer to the fuel-filler cap on page 3-42.

The seat belt warning light illuminates and a beep sound will be heard if the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Conditions of operation

Condition

The driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The driver's seat belt is fastened while the warning light and the beep sound are activated.

The driver's seat belt is fastened before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Result

The warning light flashes and a beep sound will be heard for about 6 seconds.

The warning light turns off and the beep sound stops.

The warning light will not illuminate and the beep sound will not be heard.

Belt minder

NOTE

The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate and restore the seat belt minder.

5-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (206,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Driver seated/Front passenger not seated

The belt minder is a supplemental warning to the seat belt warning function.


ON position, the warning light/beep operates to give you further reminders according to the chart below.

Condition

Vehicle speed

Between 0

― 20 km/h

(0

― 12 mph)

20 km/h

(12 mph) or more

Seat belt

Indicator

Beep

: Fastened

: Unfastened

: Illuminated

: Flashing

: Beep


Driver seated/Front passenger seated

The seat belt warning function reminds the front passenger to fasten the seat belt according to the chart below.

Condition

Vehicle speed

Between 0

― 20 km/h

(0

― 12 mph)

20 km/h

(12 mph) or more

Seat belt

(Driver)

Seat belt

(Passenger)

Indicator

Beep

: Fastened

: Unfastened

: Illuminated

: Flashing

: Beep


NOTE l

To allow the front passenger seat weight l sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the front passenger seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.

Placing packages, luggage, pets or other items on the front passenger seat may cause the front passenger seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item.

5-44

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (207,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qDoor-Ajar Warning Light

This warning light comes on when any door isn't securely closed.

qLow Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light

í

CAUTION

If the automatic transaxle warning light illuminates, the transaxle has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause damage to your transaxle. Consult an Authorized


qAWD Warning Light (AWD)

This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add fluid (page

8-26).

qAutomatic Transaxle Warning Light


The light illuminates when the transaxle has a problem.


Thereafter, the warning light will illuminate or flash under the following conditions: l

Illuminates when there is an abnormality with the AWD system.

l l

Flashes when the differential oil temperature is abnormally high.

Flashes when there are continually large differences between front and rear wheel rotation, such as when trying to pull away from an icy surface.

If the AWD warning light illuminates:

If the AWD warning light illuminates, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

If the AWD warning light flashes:

Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a few moments; if the warning light stops flashing, you can resume driving. If the light does not stop flashing, contact an


í

Some models.

5-45

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (208,1)

Driving Your Mazda


WARNING

Never spin a wheel that is off the ground:

Spinning a wheel that is off the ground as a result of the vehicle being stuck or in a ditch is dangerous. The drive assembly could be seriously damaged which could lead to an accident or could even lead to overheating, oil leakage, and a fire.

qTire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Warning Light

í


Thereafter, the warning light illuminates when tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, and flashes when there is a system malfunction.

WARNING

If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard, decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid sudden maneuvering and braking:

If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire pressure warning beep sound is heard, it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen and result in an accident.

To determine if you have a slow leak or a flat, pull over to a safe position where you can check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again, an

Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station.

Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:

Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous, even if you know why it is illuminated. Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident.

Warning light illuminates/Warning beep sounds

When the warning light illuminates, and the warning beep sound is heard (about 3 seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.

5-46

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (209,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire pressure. Refer to the specification charts

(page 10-6).

CAUTION


NOTE l

Perform tire pressure adjustment when the tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary l l according to the tire temperature, therefore let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting the tire pressures. When pressure is adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may turn on after the tires cool and pressure drops below specification.

Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light, resulting from the tire air pressure dropping due to cold ambient temperature, may go out if the ambient temperature rises. In this case, it will also be necessary to adjust the tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning light illuminates due to a drop in tire air pressure, make sure to check and adjust the tire air pressures.

After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may require some time for the TPMS warning light to go out. If the TPMS warning light remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10 minutes, and then verify that it goes out.

Tires can loose a little air quite naturally over time and the TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too soft over time or you have a flat. However, when you find one low tire in a set of four - that is an indication of trouble; you should have someone drive the vehicle slowly forward so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and any metal sticking through tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be addressed by more than simply refilling the trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer which has all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems and order the best replacement tire for your vehicle.

5-47

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (210,1)

Driving Your Mazda


If the warning light illuminates again even after the tire pressures are adjusted, there may be a tire puncture. Replace the punctured tire with the temporary spare

tire (page 7-8).

NOTE

A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the temporary spare tire. The warning light will flash continuously while the temporary spare tire is being used.

Warning light flashes

When the warning light flashes, there may be a system malfunction. Consult an


qKEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY

Indicator Light (Green) (with

Advanced Key)

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the KEY warning light illuminated:

If the KEY warning light remains illuminated, do not continue to drive using the advanced key system. Park the vehicle in a safe place and use the auxiliary key to continue driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda

Dealer as soon as possible.

When flashing l l l

Under the following conditions, the

KEY warning light (red) flashes to inform the driver that the start knob will not rotate to the ACC position l l even if it is pushed in from the LOCK position.


The advanced key is not within operational range.

The advanced key is placed in areas where it is difficult for the system to

detect the signal (page 3-7).


This indicator has two colors.

KEY Warning Light (Red)

When illuminated l l

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, it illuminates momentarily and then goes out.

If any malfunction occurs in the advanced keyless system, it illuminates continuously.

5-48

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (211,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds l l

Under the following conditions, the

KEY warning light (red) will flash continuously when the start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position to notify the driver that the advanced key has been removed from the vehicle. It will stop flashing when l the advanced key is back inside the vehicle.

The start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position, the driver's door is open, and the advanced key is removed from the vehicle.

The start knob has not been returned to the LOCK position and all the doors are closed after removing the advanced key from the vehicle.

NOTE

The flashing KEY warning light (red) and the beep sound operate simultaneously (page

3-20).

KEY Indicator Light (Green)

When illuminated

When the start knob is pushed in from the

LOCK position, the system confirms that the correct advanced key is inside the vehicle, the KEY indicator light (green) illuminates, and the start knob can be

turned to the ACC position (page 3-9).

When flashing

When the advanced key battery power is low, the KEY indicator light flashes for 30 seconds after the start knob is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position. Replace with a new battery before the advanced key becomes

unusable (page 3-6).

NOTE

The advanced key can be set so that the KEY indicator light (green) does not flash even if the battery power is low.

Refer to Setting Change (Function

Customization)(page 3-19).

qSecurity Indicator Light

This indicator light starts flashing every 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the ACC position and the immobilizer system is armed.

The light stops flashing when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the correct ignition key.

At this time, the immobilizer system is disarmed and the light illuminates for about 3 seconds and then goes out.


5-49

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (212,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator

Light


When the shift lever is in the D or M position, the numeral for the selected gear displays.

qTCS/DSC Indicator Light

This light indicates one of two things: l

The high-beam headlights are on.

l

The turn signal lever is in the flash-topass position.

qShift Position Indicator Light

This indicates the selected shift position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC/

RSC is operating, the indicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and they may not operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an



5-50

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (213,1)

Driving Your Mazda


qTCS OFF Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

It also illuminates when the TCS OFF switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.

Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 5-24.

If the light remains illuminated and the

TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic stability control may have a malfunction.

NOTE

If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the TCS

OFF indicator light remain illuminated even after turning the ignition switch to the ON position, attempt the procedure again. If this still does not work, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

qCruise Main Indicator Light

(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator

Light (Green)

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)

The indicator light illuminates amber when the ON/OFF switch pulled up and the cruise control system is activated.

Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)

The indicator light illuminates green when a cruising speed has been set.

qLight-On Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on when the exterior lights and dashboard illumination are on.

qTurn-Signal/Hazard Warning

Indicator Lights

The indicator light has two colors.

When operating the turn signal lights, the left or right turn signal indicator light flashes to indicate which turn signal light

is operating (page 5-56).

When operating the hazard warning lights, both turn signal indicator lights

flash (page 5-63).

NOTE

If an indicator light remains illuminated (does not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out.

5-51

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (214,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Beep Sounds qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt

Pretensioner System Warning Beep

If a malfunction is detected in both the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system and the warning light, a warning beep sound will be heard for about 1 minute.

After that, the one-minute beep will be repeated every 30 minutes.

Have your vehicle inspected at an


WARNING


Driving the vehicle with the air bag/ front seat belt pretensioner system warning beep sounding is dangerous.

In a collision, the air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy and this could result in death or serious injury.


qSeat Belt Warning Beep


ON position, a beep sound will be heard for about 6 seconds.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), a beep sound will be heard again for a specified period of time.

Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on

page 5-43.

5-52

í

Some models.

qIgnition Key Reminder

If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or

ACC position with the key inserted, a continuous beep sound will be heard when the driver's door is opened.

qLights-On Reminder

If lights are on and the key is removed from the ignition switch, a continuous beep sound will be heard when the driver's door is opened.

NOTE

When the advanced keyless function is used and the start knob is in the ACC position, the

“Start Knob Not in LOCK Warning Beep”

(page 3-16) overrides the lights-on reminder.

qParking Brake Reminder

If the parking brake has not been completely released and the vehicle is driven at about 5 km/h (3 mph) or faster, a continuous beep sound will be heard to notify the driver that the parking brake has not been released.

Beep

The warning beep sound will be heard for about 3 seconds when there is any abnormality in tire inflation pressures

(page 5-27).

qAdvanced Keyless Warning

Warning indicators for the advanced key, such as

“the advanced key removed from vehicle warning

”, use a beep sound and warning/indicator lights in the instrument cluster.

Refer to Warning and Beep Sounds on

page 3-16.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Lighting Control qHeadlights

Type A (Without AUTO position)

Black plate (215,1)

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

Type B (With AUTO position)

Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off.

Switch Position

Headlights

Taillights

Parking lights

License lights

Side-marker lights

Dashboard illumination

Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

NOTE l

If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30 l seconds after turning the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

To prevent discharging the battery, don't leave the lights on while the engine is off unless safety requires them.

Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off.

Switch Position

Headlights

Taillights

Parking lights

License lights

Side-marker lights


Off

Off

Off

On

On

On

Auto

NOTE l

If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30 l seconds after turning the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

To prevent discharging the battery, don't leave the lights on while the engine is off unless safety requires them.

AUTO(Auto-light control)

When the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns on or off the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination (see chart above).

5-53

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (216,1)

Driving Your Mazda


CAUTION

Ø Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise the light sensor will not operate correctly.

Light sensor

Ø The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the ignition switch is in the ON position as fingers pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when they activate automatically.

If you are going to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned off completely - this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow - when it is particularly tempting to leave the engine running.

NOTE l

The light may not turn off immediately even if the surrounding area becomes well-lit l l because the light sensor determines that it is nighttime if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.

In this case, the light turns off if the light switch is turned to the OFF position. (If the light switch is turned to the AUTO position again after turning it to the OFF position, the light turns on/off depending on the surrounding brightness.)

When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position, the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination will turn off.

The timing for turning on the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination can be delayed by adjusting the sensitivity of the light sensor. Consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding sensor adjustment.

Xenon fusion headlight bulbs

í

The low-beam bulbs of the headlights have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a bright white beam over a wide area.

WARNING

Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs yourself:

Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs yourself is dangerous. Because the xenon fusion bulbs require high voltage, you could receive an electric shock if the bulbs are handled incorrectly. Consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary.

5-54

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (217,1)

NOTE

If the headlights flicker, or the brightness weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a replacement is necessary. Consult an


qLights-On Reminder

If lights are on and the key is removed from the ignition switch, a continuous beep sound will be heard when the driver's door is opened.

NOTE

When the advanced keyless function is used and the start knob is in the ACC position, the

“Start Knob Not in LOCK Warning Beep”

(page 3-16) overrides the lights-on reminder.

qHeadlight High-Low Beam

Push the lever forward for high beam.

Pull back to original position for low beam.

High beam

Low beam

Driving Your Mazda


qFlashing the Headlights

To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully toward you. The headlight switch does not need to be on, and the lever will return to the normal position when released.

qHeadlight Leveling

í

The number of passengers and weight of cargo in the luggage compartment change the angle of the headlights.

The headlight leveling switch adjusts this angle.

í

Some models.

5-55

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (218,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Select the proper setting from the following chart.

Front seat

Driver Passenger

×

―

× ×

×

×

×

×

×

―

×: Yes

―: No

Rear seat

―

―

×

×

―

Load

―

―

―

×

×

Switch

Position

0

2

3

0

1

qDaytime Running Lights (Canada)

In Canada, vehicles must be driven with the headlights on during daytime operation.

For that reason, the daytime running lights automatically turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

NOTE

The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the parking brake is applied.

Turn and Lane-Change

Signals qTurn Signal

Move the signal lever down (for a left turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop position. The signal will self-cancel after the turn is completed.

If the indicator light continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to its original position.

Right turn

Right lane change

OFF

Left lane change

Left turn

Green indicators on the dashboard show which signal is working.

Lane-change signals

Move the lever slightly toward the direction of the change

―until the indicator flashes

― and hold it there. It will return to the off position when released.

NOTE

If an indicator light stays on without flashing or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out.

5-56

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (219,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Fog Lights

í

Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.

They help you to see as well as to be seen.

To turn the front fog lights on, rotate the fog light switch to the position.

The headlight switch must be in the position to turn on the front fog lights.

Fog light switch

To turn them off, rotate the fog light switch to the OFF position or turn the headlight switch to the or OFF position.

NOTE l

The fog lights will turn off when the l headlights are set at high beam.

(With auto-light control)

If the fog light switch is in the ON position and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the front fog lights will be turned on when the headlights, the exterior lights and dashboard illumination are automatically turned on.

Windshield Wipers and

Washer

The ignition switch must be in the ON position.

WARNING

Use only windshield washer fluid or plain water in the reservoir:

Using radiator antifreeze as washer fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the windshield, it will dirty the windshield, affect your visibility, and could result in an accident.

Do not use the washer without first warming the windshield and never use plain tap water:

Using windshield washer fluid without anti-freeze protection in freezing temperatures is dangerous.

The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield and block your vision. You could have an accident.

NOTE

Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper blades, the wiper motor is protected from motor breakdown, overheating and possible fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will automatically stop operation of the blades, but only for about 5 minutes.

If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow and ice.

After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the blades should operate normally. If they don't resume functioning, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-ofway. Wait until the weather clears before trying to drive with the wipers inoperative.

í

Some models.

5-57

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Driving Your Mazda


qWindshield Wipers

Type A (With INT position)

Black plate (220,1)

Type B (With AUTO position)

Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever down.

MIST

― Mist

INT

― Intermittent

1

― Low speed

2

― High speed

For a single wiping cycle, push the lever up to MIST.forward and release it.

Variable-speed intermittent wipers

Set the lever to INT and choose the interval timing by rotating the ring.

Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever down.

MIST

― Mist

AUTO

― Auto control

1

― Low speed

2

― High speed

For a single wiping cycle, push the lever up to MIST.forward and release it.

AUTO (Auto-wiper control)

When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position, the rain sensor senses the amount of rainfall on the windshield and turns the wiper on or off automatically

(off

―intermittent―low speed―high speed).

INT ring

5-58

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted by turning the switch on the wiper lever.

From the center position (normal), turn the switch towards (+) for higher sensitivity (faster response) or turn the switch towards (_) for less sensitivity

(slower response).

Less sensitivity

Switch

Center position

Higher sensitivity

CAUTION

Ø Do not shade the rain sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor will not operate correctly.

Black plate (221,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Ø When the wiper lever is in the

AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position, the wipers may move automatically in the following cases:

Ø

If the windshield above the rain sensor is touched.

Ø

If the windshield above the rain sensor is wiped with a cloth.

Ø

If the windshield is struck with a hand or other object.

Ø

If the rain sensor is struck with a hand or other object from inside the vehicle.

Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the ignition switch is in the ON position as fingers pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when they activate automatically. If you are going to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned off completely - this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow - when it is particularly tempting to leave the engine running.

Light sensor

5-59

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (222,1)

Driving Your Mazda


NOTE l

The auto-wiper control may not operate when the rain sensor temperature is about

_10 °C(14 °F) or lower, or about 85 °C

(185 °F) or higher.

l l

If the windshield is coated with water repellent, the rain sensor may not be able to sense the amount of rainfall correctly and auto-wiper control may not operate properly.

If dirt or foreign matter (e.g. ice or matter containing salt water) adheres to the windshield above the rain sensor or if the windshield is iced, it could cause the wipers to move automatically. However, if the wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or foreign matter, the auto-wiper control will stop operation. In this case, pull the wiper lever to the 1 or 2 position for manual operation, or remove the ice, dirt or foreign matter by hand to restore the auto-wiper operation.

qWindshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you and hold it to spray washer fluid.

OFF

If the washer doesn't work, inspect the

fluid level (page 8-26). If it's OK, consult

an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Washer

NOTE

With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT position, the wipers will operate continuously until the lever is released.

5-60

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (223,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Rear Window Wiper and

Washer


qRear Window Wiper

Turn the wiper on by turning the rear wiper/washer switch.

ON

― Normal

INT

― Intermittent

qRear Window Washer

To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/ washer switch to the position. After the switch is released, the washer will stop.

If the washer doesn't work, inspect the

fluid level (page 8-26). If it's OK and the

washer still doesn't work, consult an


Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster clears frost, fog, and thin ice from the rear window.


Press the switch to turn on the rear window defroster. The rear window defroster operates for about 15 minutes and turns off automatically.

The indicator light illuminates during operation.

The defroster operation can be confirmed by the indicator in the display.

To turn off the rear window defroster before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press the switch again.

Indicator light

CAUTION

Don't use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of the rear window surface. They may damage the defroster grid inside the window.

5-61

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (224,1)

Driving Your Mazda


NOTE

This defroster is not designed for melting snow.

If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear window, remove it before using the defroster.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the the steering wheel.

mark on

5-62

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Hazard Warning Flasher

The hazard warning lights should always be used when you stop on or near a roadway in an emergency.

The hazard warning lights warn other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard and that they must take extreme caution when near it.

Black plate (225,1)

Driving Your Mazda


Depress the hazard warning flasher and all the turn signals will flash.

NOTE l

The turn signals do not work when the hazard warning lights are on.

l

Check local regulations about the use of hazard warning lights while the vehicle is being towed to verify that it is not in violation of the law.

5-63

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (226,1)

5-64

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (227,1)

6

Interior Comfort

Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio system.

Climate Control System .......................... 6-2

Operating Tips .................................... 6-2

Vent Operation (Front) ........................ 6-4

Fully Automatic Type ......................... 6-6

Vent Operation (Rear) ....................... 6-12

Control Panel (Rear) ......................... 6-14

Bluetooth Hands-Free ......................... 6-103

Bluetooth Hands-Free

í

.................. 6-103

Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free

Operation ........................................ 6-106

Convenient Use of the Hands-Free

System ............................................. 6-109

Hands-Free Telephone Setting ........ 6-113

When the Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used ................................................. 6-118

Safety Certification ......................... 6-119

Audio System ......................................... 6-17

Antenna ............................................. 6-17

Operating Tips for Audio System ..... 6-17

Audio Set .......................................... 6-27

Audio Control Switch Operation (Steering

Wheel) ............................................... 6-46

Auxiliary Input (AUX mode) ............ 6-48

Safety Certification ........................... 6-50

Interior Equipment ............................. 6-120

Sunvisors ......................................... 6-120

Interior Lights ................................. 6-121

Information Display ........................ 6-123

Cup Holder ...................................... 6-125

Bottle Holder ................................... 6-127

Storage Compartments .................... 6-127

Accessory Sockets .......................... 6-131

Power Outlet

í

................................ 6-132

Rear Entertainment System ................. 6-51

Rear Entertainment System

í

............ 6-51

Part Names ........................................ 6-60

Before Operation ............................... 6-63

Sound Output .................................... 6-69


Functions ........................................... 6-73

DVD video, DVD audio, Video CD, Audio

CD and MP3/WMA CD Playback (Disc

Mode) ................................................ 6-74

Auxiliary Input (AUX mode) ............ 6-88

Language Code List .......................... 6-92

Country Code List ............................. 6-94

Error Message ................................... 6-98

Symptoms and Actions ................... 6-100

í

Some models.

6-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (228,1)

Interior Comfort

Climate Control System

Operating Tips qOperating the Climate Control

System

Operate the climate control system with the engine running.

NOTE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the fan control dial on for a long period of time with the ignition switch in the

ACC position when the engine is not running.

qClearing the Air Inlet

Clear all obstructions like leaves, snow and ice from the hood and the air inlet in the cowl grille to improve the system efficiency.

qFoggy Windows

The windows may fog up easily in humid weather. Use the climate control system to defog the windows.

To help defog the windows, operate the air conditioner to dehumidify the air.

NOTE

The air conditioner may be used along with the heater to dehumidify the air.

qOutside/Recirculated Air Position

Use the outside air position in normal conditions. The recirculated air position should be used only when driving on dusty roads or for quick cooling of the interior.

qParking in Direct Sunlight

If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows to let warm air escape, then run the climate control system.

qNot Using for a Long Period

Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes at least once a month to keep internal parts lubricated.

qCheck the Refrigerant before the

Weather Gets Hot

Have the air conditioner checked before the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant may make the air conditioner less efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer for refrigerant inspection.

The air conditioner is filled with

HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will not damage the ozone layer.

If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant or has a malfunction, consult an


qReplacement of the Cabin Air Filter

If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary to change the filter periodically as indicated in scheduled maintenance (page

8-3). Consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer for replacement of the cabin air filter.

6-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qSunlight/Temperature Sensor

The fully automatic air conditioner function measures inside and outside temperatures, and the temperature of direct sunlight. It then sets temperatures inside the passenger compartment accordingly.

CAUTION

Do not obstruct either sensor, otherwise the automatic air conditioner will not operate properly.

Sunlight sensor

Black plate (229,1)

Interior Comfort


Interior temperature sensor

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-3



Interior Comfort


Vent Operation (Front)

Black plate (230,1)

Open

Close

qAdjusting the Vents

Directing airflow

You can direct air flow by moving the adjustment knob.

Opening/closing vents

The two outside vents can be opened and closed with wheel.

NOTE

When using the air conditioner, mist may come out from the vents. This is not a sign of trouble but a result of humid air being suddenly cooled.

6-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (231,1)

Interior Comfort


qSelecting the Airflow Mode

Dashboard Vents

Defroster and Floor Vents

Dashboard and Floor Vents

Defroster Vents

Floor Vents

6-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort


Fully Automatic Type

Climate control information is displayed on the information display.

Information display

A/C

Air intake display

AUTO DUAL

Black plate (232,1)

Airflow display

Mode selector display

Temperature setting display(driver)

Ambient temperature /Temperature setting display(front passenger)

Driver temperature control dial

A/C switch

Fan control dial

AUTO switch

Front passenger temperature control dial

DUAL switch

Mode selector switch

Windshield defroster switch

OFF switch

OUTSIDE (Ambient temperature) switch

Air intake selector

6-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (233,1)

Interior Comfort


Temperature control dial

qControl Switches

AUTO switch

Cold

Hot

By pressing the AUTO switch the following functions will be automatically controlled in accordance with the set temperature: l

Airflow temperature l

Amount of airflow l l l

Selection of airflow mode

Outside/Recirculated air selection

Air conditioner operation

NOTE

AUTO switch indicator light l l

When on, it indicates AUTO operation, and the system will function automatically.

When off, it indicates the operation of other switches such as the mode selector switch, fan control dial, A/C switch and windshield defroster switch. Other functions will continue to operate automatically.

OFF switch

This dial controls temperature. Turn it clockwise for hot and counterclockwise for cold.

l l

When the DUAL switch is off:

Turn the driver temperature control dial to control the temperature.

When the DUAL switch is on:

Turn the driver or front passenger temperature control dial to control the temperature.

NOTE

The system changes to the individual operation mode (DUAL switch indicator light illuminated) by turning the front passenger temperature control dial even when the DUAL switch is off, which allows individual control of the set temperature for the driver and front passenger.

Fan control dial

Slow Fast

The fan has seven speeds. The selected speed will be displayed.

Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the climate control system.

6-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort


Mode selector switch Air intake selector

Black plate (234,1)

The desired airflow mode can be selected

(page 6-5).

NOTE l

With the airflow mode set to the l position and the temperature control dial set at a medium temperature, heated air is directed to the feet and a comparably lower air temperature will flow through the central, left and right vents.

To set the air vent to , press the windshield defroster switch.

A/C switch

Outside or recirculated air positions can be selected. Press the switch to select outside/recirculated air positions.

Recirculated air position

(indicator light illuminated)

Use this position when going through tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high engine exhaust areas) or when quick cooling is desired.

Outside air position light turned off)

(indicator

Use this position for normal conditions and defogging.

WARNING

Do not use the rainy weather:

Using the position in cold or position in cold or rainy weather is dangerous as it will cause the windows to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, which could lead to a serious accident.

With the AUTO or fan control dial ON, press the A/C switch to turn the air conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying functions) on or off.

NOTE

The air conditioner may not function when the outside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).

(Indicator light remains on even when system is off.)

6-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (235,1)

Interior Comfort


OUTSIDE (Ambient Temperature) switch

Press the OUTSIDE switch to display the ambient temperature.

NOTE l l l

The displayed ambient temperature may vary from the actual ambient temperature depending on the surrounding area and vehicle conditions.

Press the OUTSIDE switch 3 seconds or more to switch the display from Fahrenheit to Centigrade or vice versa.

Press the OUTSIDE switch again to switch the display from ambient temperature to the temperature set for the air conditioner.

DUAL switch

Interconnection mode (indicator light turned off)

The set temperature for the driver and front passenger is controlled simultaneously.

NOTE l l l

The set temperature for the front passenger changes to that of the driver while in the interconnected mode.

is displayed on the information display while in the individual operation mode.

The system changes to the interconnection mode automatically if the windshield defroster switch is pressed. The system will not change to the individual operation mode by pressing the DUAL switch or turning the front passenger temperature control dial.

Windshield defroster switch

Press the switch to defrost the windshield and front door windows.

Use the DUAL switch to change the mode between the individual operation and interconnection modes.

Individual operation mode (indicator light illuminated)

The set temperature can be controlled individually for the driver and front passenger.

6-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (236,1)

Interior Comfort


qOperation of Automatic Air

Conditioning

1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of the airflow mode, air intake selector and amount of airflow will be automatically controlled.

qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging

2. Use the temperature control dial to select a desired temperature.

Press the DUAL switch or turn the front passenger temperature control dial to control the set temperature individually for the driver and front passenger.

Cold Hot

To turn off the system, press the OFF switch.

NOTE l

Setting the temperature to the maximum high or low will not provide the desired l temperature at a faster rate.

When selecting heat, the system will restrict airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold air from blowing out of the vents.

Press the windshield defroster switch.

In this position, the position is automatically selected, and the air conditioner automatically turns on. The air conditioner will directly dehumidify the air to the front windshield and side

windows (page 6-5). Airflow amount will

be increased.

WARNING

Set the temperature control to the hot or warm position when defogging ( position):

Using the position with the temperature control set to the cold position is dangerous as it will cause the outside of the windshield to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, which could lead to a serious accident.

6-10

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



NOTE l

Press the windshield defroster switch to change the mode to the interconnection l mode automatically. The system does not change to the individual operation mode by pressing the DUAL switch or turning the front passenger temperature control dial.

Use the temperature control dial to increase the air flow temperature and defog the windshield more quickly.

Black plate (237,1)

Interior Comfort


Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-11



Interior Comfort


Vent Operation (Rear)

Black plate (238,1)

qAdjusting the Vents

Directing airflow

You can direct air flow by moving the adjustment knob.

NOTE

When using the air conditioner, mist may come out from the vents. This is not a sign of trouble but a result of humid air being suddenly cooled.

6-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (239,1)

Interior Comfort


qSelecting the Airflow Mode

For vehicles with rear full-auto air conditioning, the airflow mode can be selected according to the purpose of use.

Instrument panel Vents Floor Vents

Instrument panel and Floor Vents

6-13

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort


Front

Control Panel (Rear)

AUTO switch

Black plate (240,1)

Rear

Fan control dial

REAR CONTROL switch


6-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qControl Switches

Rear air conditioning on switch

Black plate (241,1)

Interior Comfort


This dial controls temperature. Turn it clockwise for hot and counterclockwise for cold.

Fan control dial

Slow Fast

Press the REAR CONTROL switch to operate the rear air conditioning from the rear seats.

Fan and temperature adjustment from the rear control panel is possible only when

“CONTROL ON” in the rear control panel is illuminated.

NOTE l

When the rear control switch is off, l l operation of the rear airflow amount and vent temperature from the rear seats is not possible.

When the rear control switch is off, the airflow amount and the vent temperature for the rear are changed by operating the temperature control dial of the front control panel.

When the rear control switch is off, the mode for the rear is changed according to the mode selector switch and the temperature control dial of the front control panel.


Cold Hot

The fan has 15 speeds.

qOperation of Automatic Air

Conditioning

Operation from front seats

1. Turn the front air conditioning on.

2. Turn the REAR CONTROL switch off.

(indicator light turned off.)

NOTE l

Setting the temperature to the maximum high or low will not provide the desired l l l l temperature at a faster rate.

When selecting heat, the system will restrict airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold air from blowing out of the vents.

While in individual operation mode, the temperature setting is controlled at the driver's temperature.

When operating the air conditioning from the front seats (REAR CONTROL switch is off), operation from the rear seats is not possible.

Airflow amount and the mode for the rear cannot be changed by operating the mode selector switch and fan control dial of the front control panel. Airflow amount and the mode are automatically changed according to the temperature control dial.

6-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort


Operation from rear seats

1. Turn the front air conditioning on.

2. Turn the REAR CONTROL switch on in the front control panel. (indicator light illuminated.)

NOTE

“CONTROL ON” illuminates in the REAR

CONTROL panel.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Cold Hot

NOTE

The airflow mode may change depending on the set temperature.

4. Set the fan control dial to the desired position.

Slow Fast

6-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Black plate (242,1)



Black plate (243,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Antenna qRear Window Antenna

The rear window antenna receives both

AM and FM signals.

Rear window antenna

CAUTION

When washing the inside rear window, use a soft cloth dampened in lukewarm water, gently wiping the antenna lines.

Use of glass cleaning products could damage the antenna.

Operating Tips for Audio

System

WARNING

Do not adjust the audio control switches while driving the vehicle:

Adjusting the audio while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to a serious accident. Always adjust the audio while the vehicle is stopped.

Even if the audio control switches are equipped on the steering wheel, learn to use the switches without looking down at them so that you can keep your maximum attention on the road while driving the vehicle.

CAUTION

Ø For the purposes of safe driving, adjust the audio volume to a level that allows you to hear sounds outside of the vehicle.

Ø Do not install non-genuine speakers since their vibration may affect the DSC/RSC sensors.

NOTE l

Do not use the audio for long periods of time while the engine is off. Otherwise the l battery could go dead.

If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to occur from the audio system, however, this does not indicate that the system has been damaged.

6-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (244,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qRadio Reception

AM characteristics

AM signals bend around such things as buildings or mountains and bounce off the ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach longer distances than FM signals. Because of this, two stations may sometimes be picked up on the same frequency at the same time.

Ionosphere

Station 1 Station 2

FM characteristics

An FM broadcast range is usually about

40

―50 km (25―30 miles) from the source. Because of extra coding needed to break the sound into two channels, stereo

FM has even less range than monaural

(non-stereo) FM.

FM Station

40—50km

(25—30 miles)

Signals from an FM transmitter are similar to beams of light because they do not bend around corners, but they do reflect.

Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM stations cannot be received at the great distances possible with AM reception.

Ionosphere

FM wave

AM wave

FM wave

100—200 km (60—120 miles)

Atmospheric conditions can also affect

FM reception. High humidity will cause poor reception. However, cloudy days may provide better reception than clear days.

Multipath noise

Since FM signals can be reflected by obstructions, it is possible to receive both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the same time. This causes a slight delay in reception and may be heard as a broken sound or a distortion. This problem may also be encountered when in close proximity to the transmitter.

Reflected wave

Direct

6-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (245,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Flutter/Skip noise

Signals from an FM transmitter move in straight lines and become weak in valleys between tall buildings, mountains, and other obstacles. When a vehicle passes through such an area, the reception conditions may change suddenly, resulting in annoying noise.

Strong signal noise

This occurs very close to a transmitter tower. The broadcast signals are extremely strong, so the result is noise and sound breakup at the radio receiver.

Weak signal noise

In suburban areas, broadcast signals become weak because of distance from the transmitter. Reception in such fringe areas is characterized by sound breakup.

Station drift noise

When a vehicle reaches the area of two strong stations broadcasting at similar frequencies, the original station may be temporarily lost and the second station picked up. At this time there will be some noise from this disturbance.

Station 1

88.1 MHz

Station 2

88.3 MHz

6-19

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (246,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-

Dash CD Changer

Condensation phenomenon

Immediately after turning on the heater when the vehicle is cold, the CD or optical components (prism and lens) in the

CD player/In-dash CD changer may become clouded with condensation. At this time, the CD will eject immediately when placed in the unit. A clouded CD can be corrected simply by wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded optical components will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait for normal operation to return before attempting to use the unit.

Handling the CD player/In-dash CD changer

The following precautions should be observed.

l

Do not spill any liquid on the audio system.

l

The CD revolves at high speed within the unit. Defective (cracked or badly bent) CDs should never be used.

l

Do not use non-conventional discs such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, etc. The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction.

l

If the memory portion of the CD is transparent or translucent, do not use the disc.

l

Do not insert any objects, other than

CDs, into the slot.

Transparent

6-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (247,1) l

A new CD may have rough edges on its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc with rough edges is used, proper setting will not be possible and the CD player/In-dash CD changer will not play the CD. In addition, the disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction.

Remove the rough edges in advance by using a ball-point pen or pencil as shown below. To remove the rough edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil against the inner and outer perimeter of the CD.

CD Player

In-dash CD changer

Interior Comfort

Audio System l

When driving over uneven surfaces, the sound may jump.

l

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling the CDs. Pick up a CD by grasping the outer edge or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

l l

The CD player/In-dash CD changer has been designed to play CDs bearing the identification logo as shown. No other discs can be played.

Use discs that have been legitimately produced. If illegally-copied discs such as pirated discs are used, the system may not operate properly.

l l

Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.

Avoid scratching the reverse side (the side without a label). The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction.

Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can decrease the amount of light reflected from the signal surface, thus affecting sound quality. If the CD should become soiled, gently wipe it with a soft cloth from the center of the CD to the edge.

6-21

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (248,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System l l l l l l l l

Do not use record sprays, antistatic agents, or household spray cleaners.

Volatile chemicals such as benzine and thinner can also damage the surface of the CD and must not be used. Anything that can damage, warp, or fog plastic should never be used to clean CDs.

Insert discs one by one. If two discs are inserted at the same time, the system may not operate properly.

CD TEXT textual information cannot be displayed by audio units other than the In-dash CD changer (MP3 file support type only). (Only playback is possible.)

The following player can play MP3 files recorded in CD-ROM, CD-R, and

CD-RW.

· In-dash CD changer (MP3 file support type only)

The CD player/In-dash CD changer ejects the CD if the CD is inserted upside down. Also dirty and/or defective CDs may be ejected.

An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the

CD player.

The In-dash CD changer is specially made for 12 cm (5 in) CDs.

An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the

In-dash CD changer (MP3 file support type only) if an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is used.

If an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is not used, the In-dash CD changer (MP3 file support type only) may be damaged. Always use a CD adapter.

An 8 cm (3 in) CD cannot be played in the In-dash CD changer (MP3 file nonsupport type only) even if an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is used.

Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD player/In-dash CD changer.

Do not insert any disc with a peel-off seal affixed to it.

6-22

Handling the In-dash CD changer l l l l l l l l

This unit may not be able to play certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a computer or music CD recorder due to disc characteristics, scratches, smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or condensation on the lens inside the unit.

Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to direct sunlight or high temperature may damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make them unplayable.

CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB cannot be played.

This unit may not be able to play certain discs made using a computer due to the application (writing software) setting used. (For details, consult the store where the application was purchased.)

It is possible that certain text data, such as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW may not be displayed when musical data (CD-DA) is playing.

The period from when a CD-RW is inserted to when it begins playing is longer than a normal CD or CD-R.

Completely read the instruction manual and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.

Do not use discs with cellophane tape adhering, partially peeled off labels, or adhesive material exuding from the edges of the CD label. Also, do not use discs with a commercially-available

CD-R label affixed. The disc may not eject resulting in a malfunction.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (249,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qOperating tips for MP3

NOTE

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenuegenerating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via the Internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.

An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.

l l l l l

This audio system handles MP3 files that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been l recorded using the following formats can be played:

ISO 9660 level 1 l l

ISO 9660 level 2

Joliet extended format l

Romeo extended format

This unit handles MP3 files conforming to the MP3 format containing both header frames and data frames.

This unit can play multi-session recorded discs that have up to 99 sessions.

This unit can play MP3s with sampling frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz.

This unit can play MP3 files that have been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to

320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure enjoyment of music with consistent sound quality, it is recommended to use discs that have been recorded at a bit rate of 128 kbps or more.

l l l

If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs depending on how the disc was recorded.

Packet written discs cannot be played on this unit.

This unit does not play CDs recorded using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3

PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.

6-23

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (250,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

About folders and files l l

The order of hierarchy for MP3 files and folders during playback or other functions is from shallow to deep. The arrangement and playing order of a l recorded disc containing MP3 files is as follows:

File number

A numerical file number is assigned to each file in a folder in the order of hierarchy from shallow to deep.

Folder number

A numerical folder number is assigned to each folder in the order of hierarchy from shallow to deep.

Folder

No.

01

02

04

3

03

2

05

4

06

5

1

Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4 l l

The folder order is automatically assigned and this order cannot be optionally set.

Any folder without an MP3 file will be ignored. (It will be skipped and the folder number will not be displayed.) l l l l l

MP3 files not conforming to the MP3 format containing both header frames and data frames will be skipped and not played.

This unit will play MP3 files that have up to eight levels. However, the more levels a disc has, the longer it will take to initially start playing. It is recommended to record discs with two levels or less.

A single disc with up to 999 files can be played and a single folder with up to

255 files can be played.

When naming an MP3 file, be sure to add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after the file name.

The maximum number of characters that can be used for file names is as follows. However, this unit will only display up to 30 characters, including the file extension (.mp3).

ISO9660 level 1

ISO9660 level 2

Joliet extended format


Maximum number of characters in a file name

(including a separator

“.” and the three letters of the file extension)

12

*

31

*

64

128

* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and underbar

“_” are available.

CAUTION

This unit can only play MP3 files that have an MP3 file extension (.mp3) attached. Do not attach an MP3 file extension to any other type file as it could cause noise to be emitted or a malfunction in the unit.

6-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (251,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

About ID3 Tag display l l

This unit can only display ID3 Tag album, track and artist names that have been input using Ver1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3

formats. Any other data that may have been input cannot be displayed.

This unit can only display English

(including numerals) one-byte characters. Use only English (including numerals) one-byte characters when inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters and some special symbols cannot be displayed.

Specialized glossary

MP3

Abbreviation for

“MPEG Audio Layer 3”.

A technical standard for audio compression as decided by an ISO

(International Organization for

Standardization) MPEG working group.

Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be compressed to approximately a tenth of the source data size.

ISO 9660

An international standard for logical formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.

It is divided into three separate levels based on differences in file naming procedures, data configuration and other characteristics.

Multi-session

A session is the complete amount of data recorded from the beginning to the end of a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-

RW data recording. Multi-session refers to the existence of data from two or more sessions on a single disc.

Sampling

Refers to the process of encoding analog audio data at regular intervals and converting it to digital data. The sampling rate refers to the number of times a sample is taken in one second and is expressed in Hz units. Increasing the sampling rate improves the sound quality but also increases the data size.

Bit rate

Refers to the volume of data per second, expressed in bps (bits per second).

Generally, the larger the number of the transfer bit rate when compressing an

MP3 file, the more information regarding musical reproduction it carries, and therefore the better the sound quality.

Packet writing

A general term for the method, similar to that used for floppy discs or hard drives, of recording the required file in a single increment on a CD-R and similar.

ID3 Tag

ID3 tag is a method for storing information related to the music in an

MP3 file. Information such as track, artist and album name can be stored. This content can be freely edited using ID3 editing function software.

VBR

Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While

CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio compression according to compression conditions and this allows for compression with preference given to sound quality.

6-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



MEMO

Black plate (252,1)

6-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (253,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Audio Set

Audio information is displayed on the information display.

CD Player In-Dash CD Changer (Music CD Player)

In-Dash CD Changer (Music CD/MP3 CD Player)

Power/Volume/Sound Controls .............................................................................. page 6-28

Operating the Radio ............................................................................................... page 6-34

Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .............................................................. page 6-38

Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ....................................................................... page 6-40

Operating the Auxiliary jack .................................................................................. page 6-44

Error Indications ..................................................................................................... page 6-45

6-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Audio System

qPower/Volume/Sound Controls

Black plate (254,1)

Power/Volume dial Audio control dial

Power ON/OFF

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or

ON position.

Press the power/volume dial to turn the audio system on.

Press the power/volume dial again to turn the audio system off.

NOTE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio system on for a long period of time when the engine is not running.

Volume adjustment

To adjust the volume, turn the power/ volume dial.

Turn the power/volume dial to the right to increase volume, to the left to decrease it.

6-28

Audio sound adjustment

1. Press the audio control dial to select the function. The selected function will be indicated.

Standard audio- equipped model

Depending on the mode selected, the indication changes.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (255,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Bose Sound

Systemequipped model

Depending on the mode selected, the indication changes.

2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the selected functions as follows:

Standard audio-equipped model

Indication Turn Left Turn Right

Select mode

Decrease bass

Increase bass

Decrease treble

Shift the sound to the front

Increase treble

Shift the sound to the rear

Shift the sound to the left

Shift the sound to the right

OFF ON

OFF ON

Bose

®

Sound System-equipped model

(Stereo mode)


OFF ON

OFF ON

Decrease bass

Increase bass

Decrease treble

Increase treble





OFF ON

OFF ON

(5.1-channel sound mode)


OFF ON

Select mode

Decrease bass

Decrease treble

Increase bass

Increase treble





OFF ON

OFF ON

6-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (256,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE l

“DVD” or “Surround” is displayed in l l areas depending on the model.

“MUSIC” or “ALL” is displayed in areas depending on the model.

“MOVIE” or “Rr” is displayed in areas depending on the model.

The display switches to the 5.1-channel sound mode when the following conditions are met: l l l

The vehicle is Rear Entertainment

System equipped.

The mode is switched to

“RSES” (page

6-47).

A CD or a DVD is inserted in the Rear

Entertainment System or the sound of the disc is 5.1 Dolby Digital/DTS audio.

NOTE

About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the volume function will be automatically selected.

To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit will beep and

“CLEAR” will be displayed.

Automatic Level Control (ALC)

(Standard audio-equipped model)

The automatic level control is a feature that automatically adjusts audio volume and sound quality according to the vehicle speed.

The volume increases in accordance with the increase in vehicle speed, and decreases as vehicle speed decreases.

The following four modes are available.

Select the desired mode.

Mode Volume change

No change

Minimum

Medium

Maximum

Turn the audio control dial to select ALC

OFF or ALC LEVEL1

―3 modes. The selected mode will be indicated.

*

AudioPilot

TM

(Bose

® equipped model)

Sound System-

AudioPilot automatically adjusts audio volume and sound quality in accordance with the level of noise entering the vehicle interior while driving. When AudioPilot is turned ON, the system automatically calculates the conditions for optimum hearing of sound which may be difficult to hear depending on exterior noise.

* AudioPilot

TM is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation.

6-30

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (257,1)

*

Centerpoint

®

(Bose

® equipped model)

Sound System-

Centerpoint offers you the experience of

5.1-channel surround sound in your vehicle even with your conventional 2channel stereo DVDs inserted in the Rear

Entertainment System main unit or 2channel stereo CDs.

Turn up the volume to enhance the surround sound effect, or down to lessen it.

Indication Volume change

Minimum

Low

Medium

High

Maximum

1. Turn the audio control dial and select

CENTERPT ON.

2. Press the audio control dial and select the surround effect mode.

3. Turn the audio control dial to select

CENTERPT MIN

―MAX mode. The selected mode will be indicated.

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE l

Centerpoint

® operates only with a 2l channel stereo CD.

Centerpoint

® does not work with AM/FM/

SIRIUS/AUX.

* Centerpoint

® is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation.

Rear seat-optimized

The rear seat-optimized function allows passengers to optimize the audio output to the rear for a more pleasurable acoustic field when selecting the 5.1-channel sound mode.

Select DVD MOVIE

*1 to increase the surround effect to the rear seat. Select

DVD MUSIC

*2 to apply the surround effect to all seats.

*1

“Surround” and “Rr” will be displayed instead of

“DVD” and “MOVIE” depending on the model.

*2

“Surround” and “ALL” will be displayed instead of

“DVD” and

“MUSIC” depending on the model.

NOTE

Rear seat-optimized is only effective if a CD or a DVD inserted in the Rear Entertainment

System main unit is 5.1 Dolby Digital/DTS audio.

6-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Audio System

Surround

When the rear seat-optimized function is operating, the surround effect can be enjoyed at five separate levels.

Indication Volume change

Minimum

Low

Medium

High

Maximum

Turn the audio control dial to select

MIN-MAX mode. The selected mode will be indicated.

Black plate (258,1)

NOTE

“DVD” or “Surround” is displayed in areas depending on the model.

BEEP setting

The beep-sound when operating the audio system can be set on or off.

ILLM EFT setting (Illumination setting during operation)

The audio system illumination during operation can be set on or off.

6-32

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



MEMO

Black plate (259,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-33



Interior Comfort

Audio System

qOperating the Radio

Scan button

Band selector button

Satellite button

Black plate (260,1)

Seek tuning buttons

Manual tuning dial/Auto memory button/Electric serial number

Radio ON

Press a band selector button ( turn the radio on.

) to

Band selection

Successively pressing the band selector button ( ) switches the bands as follows: FM1

→FM2→AM.

The selected mode will be indicated. If

FM stereo is being received,

“ST” will be displayed.

NOTE

If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak, reception automatically changes from

STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the

“ST” indicator will go out.

Channel preset buttons

Tuning

The radio has the following tuning methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset channel, and Auto memory tuning. The easiest way to tune stations is to set them on preset channels.

NOTE

If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the battery is disconnected), the preset channels will be canceled.

Manual tuning

Turning the manual tuning dial will change the frequency higher or lower.

Seek tuning

Pressing the seek tuning button ( , ) will cause the tuner to seek a higher or lower frequency automatically.

6-34

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (261,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE

If you continue to press and hold the button, the frequency will continue changing without stopping.

Scan tuning

Press the scan button ( ) to automatically sample strong stations.

Scanning stops at each station for about 5 seconds. To hold a station, press the scan button ( ) again during this interval.

Preset channel tuning

The 6 preset channels can be used to store

6 AM and 12 FM stations.

1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1, or FM2. Tune to the desired station.

2. Depress a channel preset button for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard. The preset channel number and station frequency will be displayed.

The station is now held in the memory.

3. Repeat this operation for the other stations and bands you want to store.

To tune one in the memory, select AM,

FM1, or FM2 and then press its channel preset button. The station frequency and the channel number will be displayed.

NOTE

If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the battery is disconnected), the preset channels will be canceled.

Auto memory tuning

This is especially useful when driving in an area where the local stations are not known. Additional AM/FM stations can be stored without disturbing the previously set channels.

Press and hold the auto memory button

( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard; the system will automatically scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations with the strongest frequencies in each selected band in that area.

After scanning is completed, the station with the strongest frequency will be tuned and its frequency displayed.

Press and release the auto memory button

( ) to recall stations from the autostored stations. One stored station will be selected each time; its frequency and channel number will be displayed.

NOTE

If no stations can be tuned after scanning operations,

“A” will be displayed.

SATELLITE RADIO (SAT)

Vehicles equipped with the separately purchased SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit have the ability to receive up to 100 channels of digital quality programming coast to coast via satellite. For information on use, read the Satellite Radio Kit manual accompanying the SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit. A subscription to

SIRIUS digital satellite radio service is required (available in the U.S. - Except

Alaska and Hawaii) to enable this feature once the separately purchased SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit has been installed. For subscription information or digital satellite radio technical issues contact SIRIUS directly at:

- Web: www.siriusradio.com

- Phone (24 hrs/day, 7 days/week): 888-

539-SIRI (7474)

- E-mail: [email protected]

- Mailing Address: Sirius Satellite Radio

6-35

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Audio System

1221 Avenue Of The Americas

New York, NY 10020

Attention: Customer Care

Include your Sirius Radio ESN

(Electronic Serial Number) when subscribing or requesting technical assistance. See the Satellite Radio Kit manual accompanying the SIRIUS unit for complete satellite radio activation procedures and information on how to display the ESN#.

Black plate (262,1)

6-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



MEMO

Black plate (263,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-37



Black plate (264,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player

í

Load button

Track up button

Repeat button

Scan button CD slot

CD eject button

Random button

Track down button CD play button Reverse button Fast-forward button

Power/Volume dial

Type

Music CD player

Playable data

· Music data (CD-DA)

Inserting the CD

Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.

The auto-loading mechanism will set the

CD and begin play. There will be a short lapse before play begins while the player reads the digital signals on the CD.

Ejecting the CD

Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the

CD.

Playing

Press the CD play button ( ) to start play when a CD is in the unit.

If there isn't a CD in the unit when the CD play button ( ) is pressed,

“NO DISC” will flash on and off.

NOTE

When the load button ( ) is pressed, the

CD will load and play even if the CD eject button ( ) had been previously pressed.

Fast-forward/Reverse

Press and hold the fast-forward button

( speed.

) to advance through a track at high

Press and hold the reverse button ( to reverse through a track at high speed.

)

Track search

Press the track up button ( ) once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track.

Press the track down button ( ) once to skip back to the beginning of the current track.

6-38

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Music scan

This feature helps to find a program by playing about the first 10 seconds of each track.

Press the scan button ( ) during play to start scan play operation (the track number will flash).

Press the scan button ( to cancel scan play.

) once again

NOTE

If the unit is left in scan, normal play will resume where scan was selected.

Repeat play

This feature makes it possible to listen to a selection repeatedly.

Press the repeat button ( ) during play.

The current selection will be repeated

(

“RPT” will be displayed).

Press the repeat button ( ) once again to cancel repeat play.

Random play

This feature allows the CD player to randomly select the order of the songs.

Press the random button ( ) during play. The next selection will be randomly selected (

“RDM” will be displayed).

Press the random button ( ) once again to cancel random play.

Message display

If

“CHECK CD” is displayed, it means that there is some CD malfunction. Check for damage, dirt, or smudges on the CD, and then properly reinsert. If the message appears again, take the unit to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Black plate (265,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

6-39



Black plate (266,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qOperating the In-Dash CD Changer

í

(Music CD player)

(Music CD/MP3 CD player)

CD slot

Load button Scan button

CD eject button

Fast-forward button

Random button

Disc up/Folder up button

Track up button

Track down button

Display button

Display feed dial

CD play button

Repeat button

Reverse button

Channel preset

Power/Volume dial buttons

Disc down/Folder down button

There are two types of In-dash CD changers. Check which In-dash CD changer type you own.

Type

Music CD player

Music CD/MP3 CD player

Playable data



· MP3 file

NOTE

If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and

MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs depending on how the disc was recorded.

Inserting the CD

The CD must be label-side up when inserting. The auto-loading mechanism will set the CD and begin play. There will be a short lapse before play begins while the player reads the digital signals on the

CD.

The disc number and the track number will be displayed.

NOTE

The CD will begin playback automatically after insertion.

A CD cannot be inserted while the display reads

“WAIT”. A beeping sound can be heard during this waiting time. Simultaneously pressing the power/volume dial and the load button ( ) for about 2 seconds will turn this beeping sound ON or OFF.

6-40

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (267,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Normal insertion

1. Press the load button ( ).

2. When

“IN” is displayed, insert the CD.

Inserting CDs into desired tray number

1. Press and hold the load button ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard.

2. Press the channel preset button for the desired tray number while

“WAIT” is displayed.

3. When


NOTE

The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray number if the number is already occupied.

Multiple insertion

1. Press and hold the load button ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard.

2. When


3. When

“IN” is displayed again, insert the next CD.

NOTE

The first-inserted CD will be played automatically when: l l

No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds after

“IN” is displayed.

The CD trays are full.

Displaying the CD-inserted tray number

When you want to know the number for a

CD-inserted tray, press the display button

( ). The tray number will be displayed for 5 seconds.

Ejecting the CD

Normal ejection

1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The disc number and

“DISC OUT” will be displayed.

2. Pull out the CD.

NOTE l

When the CD is ejected during play, the l next CD will be played automatically.

(Music CD player)

If the CD is not removed from the slot within approximately 10 seconds after ejection, it will be re- inserted automatically.

Ejecting CDs from desired tray number

1. Press and hold the CD eject button ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard.

The

“DISC OUT” display flashes.

2. Press the channel preset button for the desired CD number for less than 5 seconds after the beep sound is heard.

3. Pull out the CD.

NOTE

(Music CD player)


Multiple ejection

1. Press and hold the CD eject button ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard.

The

“DISC OUT” display flashes.

2. Press the CD eject button ( ) again for less than 5 seconds after the beep sound is heard.

6-41

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (268,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE

If the button is not pressed and about 5 seconds have elapsed while

“DISC OUT” is flashing, CDs are automatically ejected.

3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will be ejected.

NOTE l

CDs will be ejected starting with the one l l l with the lowest number.

All CDs in the tray will be ejected continuously.

CDs can be ejected when the ignition switch is off. Press and hold the CD eject button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all

CDs will eject.

(Music CD player)


Playing

Press the CD play button ( ) to start play when a CD is in the unit.

If there isn't a CD in the unit when the CD play button ( ) is pressed,

“NO DISC” will flash on and off.


Press and hold the fast-forward button

( ) to advance through a track at high speed.

Press and hold the reverse button ( to reverse through a track at high speed.

)

Track search

Press the track up button ( ) once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track.

Press the track down button ( ) once to skip back to the beginning of the current track.

Disc search

During music CD playback

To change the disc, press the DISC button

( or ) during playback.

During MP3 CD playback

To change the disc, press the DISC button

( or ) for 1.5 seconds or more during playback.

Folder search (during MP3 CD playback)

To change to the previous folder, press the folder down button ( ) for less than

1.5 seconds, or press the folder up button

( ) for less than 1.5 seconds to advance to the next folder.

Music scan

This feature helps to find a program by playing about the first 10 seconds of each track.

Press the scan button ( ) during play to start scan play operation (the track number will flash).

Press the scan button ( to cancel scan play.

) once again

NOTE

If the unit is left in scan, normal play will resume where scan was selected.

Repeat play


1. Press the repeat button ( ) during playback to play the current track repeatedly.

“RPT” is displayed.

2. Press the button again to cancel the repeat play.

6-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (269,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System


(Track repeat)

1. Press the repeat button ( ) during playback to play the current track repeatedly.


2. To cancel the repeat play, press the button again after 3 seconds.

(Folder repeat)

1. Press the repeat button ( ) during playback, and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the current folder repeatedly.


2. Press the button again to cancel the repeat play.

Random play

Tracks are randomly selected and played.


1. Press the random button ( ) during playback to play the tracks in the CD randomly.

“RDM” is displayed.

2. Press the button again to cancel the random play.


(Folder random)

1. Press the random button ( ) during playback to play the tracks in the folder randomly.


2. To cancel the random play, press the button again after 3 seconds.

(CD random)

1. Press the random button ( ) during playback, and then press the button again within 3 seconds to play the tracks in the CD randomly.


2. Press the button again to cancel the random play.

Switching the display (Music CD/MP3

CD player)

Each time the display button ( ) is pressed during playback, the display will switch in the following order.

Music CD

Track number/Elapsed time

Disc tray number

File name

Album name

Artist name

6-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (270,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

MP3 CD

Disc number/File number/Elapsed time

Disc tray number

Folder number/Track number

File name

Folder name

Album name (ID3 Tag)

Song name (ID3 Tag)

Artist name (ID3 Tag)

NOTE

(MP3 CD)

This unit can only read English (including numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on the CD writing software used, proper display may not be possible.

Display scroll (Music CD/MP3 CD player)

Only 12 characters can be displayed at one time. To display the rest of the characters of a long title, turn the display feed dial ( ) to the right. Hidden titles can be scrolled into the display one character at a time.

NOTE

The displayable number of characters is limited. If the number of characters, including the file extension (.mp3), exceeds 32 characters, it may not be fully displayed.

6-44

Message display

If

“CHECK CD” is displayed, it means that there is some CD malfunction. Check for damage, dirt, or smudges on the CD, and then properly reinsert. If the message appears again, take the unit to an

Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.

qOperating the Auxiliary jack

You can connect portable audio units or similar products on the market to the auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio over the vehicle's speakers, refer to

Auxiliary Input (page 6-48).

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (271,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

qError Indications

If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Indication

CHECK CD

CD is defective

Cause

CD is inserted upside down

Solution

Insert the CD properly. If the error indication does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer

Insert another CD properly. If the error indication does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-45



Black plate (272,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Audio Control Switch

Operation (Steering Wheel)

When the audio unit is turned on, operation of the audio unit from the steering wheel is possible.

NOTE

Because the audio unit will be turned off under the following conditions, the switches will be inoperable.

l

When the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position.

l l

When the power button on the audio unit is pressed and the audio unit is turned off.

When CD being played is ejected. (For the

In-dash CD changer, when all CDs are ejected.)

Without navigation system

Mute switch

Mode switch

Volume switch Seek switch

With navigation system

Use the VOICE switch for navigation system sound operation.

For details, refer to the separate manual

“NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.

VOICE switch

Mode switch

Volume switch

Seek switch

NOTE l

The VOICE switch is operable with the l audio unit turned off.

Mazda has installed this system to prevent distraction while driving the vehicle and using audio controls on the dashboard.

Always make safe driving your first priority.

qAdjusting the Volume

To increase the volume, pull up the volume switch.

To decrease the volume, press down the volume switch.

6-46

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qChanging the Source

Press the mode switch ( ) to change the audio source (FM1 radio> FM2 radio>

AM radio> CD player or CD changer>

SIRIUS1> SIRIUS2> SIRIUS3> RSES or

AUX> cyclical).

qSeek Switch

Black plate (273,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE

CD, CD changer, RSES, and SIRIUS digital satellite radio modes cannot be selected in the following cases: l

CD, CD changer, RSES, or SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit is not equipped on the audio system.

l

CD has not been inserted.

Connect a portable audio unit or similar product on the market to the auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio over the vehicle's speakers. Change the audio source to AUX

mode (page 6-48).

The audio source is changed to the AUX mode only when a commercially available portable audio unit is connected to the auxiliary jack.

When listening to the radio

Pull up or press down the seek switch, the radio switches to the next/previous stored station in the order that it was stored

(1

―6).

Pull up or press down the seek switch for about 2 seconds until a beep sound is heard to seek all usable stations at a higher or lower frequency whether programmed or not.

When playing a CD

Pull up the seek switch to skip to the next track.

Press down the seek switch to repeat the current track.

qMute Switch

Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute audio, press it again to resume audio output.

NOTE

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position with the audio muted, the mute will be canceled.

Therefore, when the engine is restarted, the audio is not muted. To mute the audio again, press the mute switch ( ).

6-47

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Audio System

Black plate (274,1)

Auxiliary Input (AUX mode)

You can connect portable audio units or similar products on the market to the auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio over the vehicle's speakers.

Auxiliary jack

WARNING

Do not adjust the portable audio unit or a similar product while driving the vehicle:

Adjusting the portable audio unit or a similar product while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to a serious accident. Always adjust the portable audio unit or a similar product while the vehicle is stopped.

6-48

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (275,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

NOTE l

Before using the auxiliary jack, read the manufacturer's instructions for the product l l l l being connected.

Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5

) stereo mini plug for connecting the portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary jack, read the manufacture's instructions for connecting a portable audio unit to the auxiliary jack.

To prevent discharging of the battery, do not use the auxiliary input for long periods with the engine off or idling.

Noise may occur depending on the product connected to the auxiliary jack.

If a power supply from the portable audio unit is needed, use the unit's batteries.

Using the power socket equipped on the vehicle may cause noise depending on the unit connected to the power supply socket.

WARNING

Do not allow the connection plug cord to get tangled with the parking brake or the shift lever:

Allowing the plug cord to become tangled with the parking brake or the shift lever is dangerous as it could interfere with driving, resulting in an accident.

CAUTION

Do not place objects or apply force to the auxiliary jack with the plug connected.

NOTE l

Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack securely.

l l

Insert or remove the plug with the plug perpendicular to the auxiliary jack hole.

Insert or remove the plug by holding its base.

To operate the portable audio unit

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or

ON position.

2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the audio system on.

3. Press the MEDIA button ( ) of the audio unit or the mode switch

( ) of the audio control switch to change to the AUX mode.

NOTE l l

Set the volume of the portable audio unit to the maximum within the range that the sound does not become distorted, then adjust the volume using the power/volume dial of the audio unit or the volume button

( , ) of the audio control switch.

If the connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise may occur.

6-49

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (276,1)

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Safety Certification

This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of

Health and Human Services.

CAUTION

Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified service personnel.

If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD player with the top case of the unit removed.

Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

NOTE

For CD player section:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

6-50

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (277,1)

Interior Comfort



í

qRear Entertainment System Outline

The Rear Entertainment System has a 9.0-inch wide LCD, as well as DVD video, DVD audio, video CD, audio CD, and MP3/WMA CD playback functions. Moreover, the system is equipped with input terminals for video picture and audio sound, and AV equipment such as a video game player or a video camera can be connected and displayed on the monitor screen.

qProper Operation of Rear Entertainment System

For safe driving, read the following warnings and cautions before starting operation, and use the system properly.

WARNING

Ø Do not disassemble or modify this unit.

It may cause an accident, fire, or electrical shock.

Ø Do not use if there is a malfunction condition such as no screen image or sound.

It may cause an accident, fire, or electrical shock. Follow the procedures in

“Symptoms and Actions” (page 6-100) and if the problem is not resolved, consult

an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø Do not use if some problem has occurred.

If any problem occurs, such as a foreign material penetration, spilled liquid, smoking from internal burning, or other abnormal smells, stop operation immediately and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If operation is continued, it may cause an accident, fire, or electrical shock.

Ø Lower the volume to minimum before turning off the power.

If the volume is set high, loud sound will be produced when turning on the power, causing auditory problems or an accident.

Ø Adjust the volume while driving so that ambient sound can be heard.

If the volume is too high and ambient sound cannot be heard while driving, driving operation could be obstructed causing an accident.

Ø Do not leave the remote controller and the headphones unstowed.

If the remote controller and the headphone are not stowed, they could fall under the brake pedal during a sudden stop or while turning, which could obstruct driving operation and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Ø Do not put foreign material into the disc slot.

It may cause a fire or malfunction.

Ø Do not clean plastic finished parts with solvent such as benzene or thinner.

The parts may deform causing a fire or malfunction.

í

Some models.

6-51

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (278,1)

Interior Comfort


qOperating Tips for Disc

Playable discs

DVD video

*1

, DVD audio

*2 dts CD

*3 can be played.

, video CD, audio CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-RW and

NOTE

It may not be possible to play DVD video, DVD audio, video CD, audio CD, and MP3/WMA CD according to the procedures indicated in these instructions if the playback conditions have been restricted by the producer.

Read the instruction manual accompanying the DVD video, video CD, DVD audio, audio CD.

6-52

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



DVD video

DVD videos bearing the following logo can be played.

Black plate (279,1)

Interior Comfort


DVD audio

DVD audio bearing the following logo can be played.

DVD-R and DVD-RW

DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs bearing each of the following logos can be played.

●Region code must include “1” or “ALL”.

●NTSC

(National Television System Committee) recorded type.

●8 cm (3in) or 12 cm (5in) size

Video CD, audio CD, CD-R, and CD-RW

Video CDs, audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs bearing each of the following logos can be played.

●Playback control function supported.

●8 cm (3in) or 12 cm (5in) size

●MP3 recorded type.

*1: Audio is not produced by the headphones when DTS audio is selected. Listen to DTS audio over the vehicle's speakers.

*2: Stereo playback is produced.

*3: Audio is not produced from the headphones. Listen to this audio from the speakers.

Unplayable discs l l l

Discs not bearing the logo mark indicated in the above table.

Discs not including

“1” or “ALL” in region code.

Discs recorded in other than NTSC (e.g. PAL or SECAM).

6-53

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (280,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System l l l

DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, CVD, VSD, SVCD,

SACD, photo CDs, non-conventional discs (e.g. heart-shaped), and partially transparent discs.

Discs recorded in CD-TEXT format.

HD DVD and Blu-ray discs

Handling of discs l

Do not use non-conventional discs such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, or discs with a memory portion that is transparent or translucent. The unit could be damaged.

Transparent l l l l l

When driving over uneven surfaces, the sound may jump.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling the discs. Pick up the discs by grasping the outer edge or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Do not write on or attach labels, stickers or similar to discs.

Defective (cracked or badly bent) discs should never be used.

A new disc may have rough edges on its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc with rough edges is used, proper setting will not be possible and the unit will not play the disc.

Remove the rough edges in advance by using a ball-point pen or pencil as shown below.

To remove the rough edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil against the inner and outer perimeter of the discs.

6-54

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (281,1)

Interior Comfort


Disc cleaning

Do not use record sprays, antistatic agents, or household spray cleaners. Volatile chemicals such as benzine and thinner can also damage the surface of the disc and must not be used.

Anything that can damage, warp or fog plastic should never be used to clean discs.

Condensation

Immediately after turning on the heater when the vehicle is cold, the disc or optical components (prism and lens) in the unit may become clouded with condensation. At this time, the disc will eject immediately when placed in the unit. A clouded disc can be corrected simply by wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded optical components will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait for normal operation to return before attempting to use the unit.

Operating tips for DVD video

Region code

The playback restriction area is set in a DVD video. The playback restriction area is indicated by a region code, and a DVD video can be played only in its indicated area.

The region code for U.S.A. and Canada are

“1”. DVD videos bearing region code including

“1” or “ALL” on the package or the instruction manual can be played by this unit. The region code setting for this unit has been set to

“1”.

DVD videos bearing any of the following logos on the package or instruction manual can be played.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-55



Black plate (282,1)

Interior Comfort


Playable DISC specification

CD-R and CD-RW including MP3/WMA files can be played with this unit. Discs which conform to the following formats can be played.

Name Standard Explanation

CD-R, CD-RW format

ISO9660

ISO9660 extension

Level 1

Level 2

Joliet

Romeo

Multi-session

Maximum hierarchy number

Maximum folder number

Supported

8 hierarchies (Including root)

256 folders

Maximum file number

512 files (Total capacity included in a disc.) Files other than MP3 or WMA are not included.)

Operating tips for MP3

NOTE

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via the

Internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.

Playable MP3 file specification

Playable MP3 files are as follows:

Item

Specification

Sampling frequency

MPEG1

MPEG2

MPEG1

Bit rate

VBR (Variable Bit Rate)

Channel mode

ID3 tag

MPEG2, 2.5

Content

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYER3

MPEG2.5 AUDIO LAYER3

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3

32, 44.1, 48kHz

16, 22.05, 24kHz

32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 kbps

32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 kbps

Supported

Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Monaural

Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1 title, artist name, album name l

This unit corresponds to MP3 files in which both header and data comply with the MP3 format.

6-56

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (283,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System l l l l l l

This unit corresponds to multi-session recorded disc playback at a maximum of 49 sessions.

Some data on multi-session recorded discs cannot be played.

Playback of discs with added sessions is possible.

Packet Write recorded discs cannot be played.

This unit does not correspond to MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3 PRO, and RIFF-style

MP3 formats.

The maximum number of characters available for a file name is as follows, however, the displayable number of characters on this unit is limited.

Maximum number of characters in a file name

(including a separator

“.” and the three letters of the file extension)

ISO9660 level 1

ISO9660 level 2

Joliet extended format


* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and underbar

“_” are available.

12

*

31

*

64

128

MP3

CAUTION

This unit plays files with the (.mp3) file extension as a MP3 file. Do not use the MP3 file extension for files other than MP3 files. It may cause noise or a malfunction.

l l l

In a MP3 file, the track name, artist name, album name and category name are recorded with data called

“ID3-Tag”, and the information can be displayed on the monitor.

MP3 files which do not comply with the specific standard may not be played correctly or its file and folder name may not be displayed correctly.

The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system, version, software, or settings. In this case, add the file extension

“.mp3” to the end of the file name, and then write the disc.

Playlist

This unit can play playlist files. Playlist is a function that allows free setting of the playback order of MP3 files. The file extension of a playlist file in which the order of playback is recorded is

“. m3u” or “. pls”.

Operating tips for WMA

WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and is the audio compression format used by

Microsoft.

Audio data can be created and stored at a higher compression ratio than MP3.

*

Microsoft and Window Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation U.S. in the United States and other countries.

6-57

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (284,1)

Interior Comfort


Playable WMA file specification

CD-R and CD-RW including WMA files can be played with this unit. Discs which conform to the following formats can be played.

Playable WMA files are as follows:

Specification

Sampling frequency

Item

VBR (Variable Bit Rate)

Channel mode

WMA tag

Bit rate

Content

Windows Media Audio Version7.0

22.05kHz . . . . 32 kbps

32kHz. . . . . . . 48, 64 kbps

44.1kHz . . . . . 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 kbps

48kHz. . . . . . . 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 kbps

Supported

Stereo/Monaural

Title, artist name, album name

WMA

CAUTION

This unit plays files with the (.wma) file extension as a WMA file. Do not use the

WMA file extension for files other than WMA files. It may cause noise or a malfunction.

l l l

In a WMA file, the track name, artist name, album name and category name are recorded with data called

“WMA-Tag”, and the information can be displayed on the monitor.

WMA files which do not comply with the specific standard may not be played correctly or its file and folder name may not be displayed correctly.

The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system, version, software, or settings. In this case, add the file extension

“.wma” to the end of the file name, and then write the disc.

Operating tips for Dolby

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby,” “MLP Lossless,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

6-58

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (285,1)

Interior Comfort


Operating tips for dts

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,

Inc.

qOperation Tips for Headphones

To listen to audio other than from the speakers of the Rear Entertainment System, it is necessary to use the wireless headphones that are included.

Specification

Item

Transmission system

Modulation system

Carrier frequency

Content

Infrared light

Frequency modulation

Right channel 2.8 MHz, left channel 2.3 MHz

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-59



Black plate (286,1)

Interior Comfort


Part Names qRear Entertainment System Main Unit

DISC IN indicator light

Monitor screen release knob

Disc slot Eject button

Wireless headphone signal transmitter/Remote control signal receiver

Monitor screen

6-60

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (287,1)

Interior Comfort


qRemote Controller

No.

Name

RETURN button

MENU button

ENTER/Select button

STOP button

PAUSE button

Fast-forward button

Rewind button

PREVIOUS (Track down) button

NEXT (Track up) button

DISPLAY button

No.

Name

PLAY button

Slow playback button

POWER button

SOURCE button

Picture adjust mode button

Picture adjust button

SET UP button

Number keys

DISPLAY MODE button

6-61

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort


qHeadphone

Power button Volume dial

Black plate (288,1)

Power indicator L (left) side

Arm

R (right) side Infrared receiver

6-62

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (289,1)

Interior Comfort


Before Operation qDisplay Opening/Closing

CAUTION

Ø Close the display while the Rear

Entertainment System is not in use. If the display is left open, a passenger could be injured by hitting the display, or the display could be damaged.

Ø Do not press the monitor screen while opening the display. It may cause a malfunction.

NOTE l

If the display is closed while the power is on, it automatically turns off.

l

The display locks in two positions when opened to 100 or 120-degrees.

Opening the display

Press the monitor screen release knob and open the display until it is in the lock position.

Monitor screen release knob

qDisc Insertion/Ejection

CAUTION

If the signal surface of a disc is touched, it could cause the sound to skip. Pick up a disc by grasping the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

NOTE

When no disc is inserted,

“No Disc” is displayed on the monitor.

Closing the display

Close and press the display until a clicking sound can be heard.

6-63

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (290,1)

Interior Comfort


Inserting the disc

Insert the disc into the disc slot with the label-side up.

Disc slot

CAUTION

Insert the disc with its label-side

(decorated side) facing upward. If the disc is inserted upside-down, it may cause a malfunction.

NOTE

If a disc is inserted while the Rear

Entertainment System is turned off but the display is open, and when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the system automatically turns on and starts playback.

Ejecting the disc

Press the eject button to eject the disc.

Eject button

NOTE l

When the eject button is pressed, the disc is ejected halfway.

l

A disc can be ejected with the Rear

Entertainment System turned off.

qPicture Adjustment

The brightness (BRIGHT), color adjustment (TINT), color density

(COLOR), and contrast (CONTRAST) of the screen can be adjusted.

Press the picture adjust button

(PICTURE) on the remote controller to change to the picture adjustment mode.

The picture mode changes in the order of

BRIGHT

→TINT →COLOR

→CONTRAST →OFF each time the button is pressed in this mode.

Press the picture adjust button ( ) or ( ), positioned to top/bottom of the picture adjustment mode button (PICTURE), to adjust each picture mode.

NOTE l

If the picture adjustment mode is on and no operation has been done for about 5 l seconds, the mode is canceled automatically.

If the picture is no longer adjustable by pressing the picture adjust button ( ) or

( ), it indicates that the adjustment value has reached the maximum/minimum value.

Adjusting the brightness

1. Press the picture adjustment mode button (PICTURE) and select the

BRIGHT mode.

2. Press the picture adjust button ( ) or

( ) to adjust.

l

Picture adjust button ( ): Brighten

6-64

Form No.8V83-EA-06I


Monday, February 26 2007 7:19 PM l

Picture adjust button ( ): Darken

Black plate (291,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System l

Picture adjust button ( ): Lighten

Adjusting the color adjustment

1. Press the picture adjustment mode button (PICTURE) and select the TINT mode.


( ) to adjust.

l l

Picture adjust button ( ): Green

Picture adjust button ( ): Red

Adjusting the contrast (definition)


CONTRAST mode.


( ) to adjust.

l l

Picture adjust button ( ): Higher

Picture adjust button ( ): Lower

Adjusting the color density


COLOR mode.


( ) to adjust.

l

Picture adjust button ( ): Darken

qScreen Size Setting

The size of the screen can be changed.

Press the DISPLAY MODE button to set the desired screen size.

The screen size changes in the order of

Full

→Normal →Wide →Cinema each time the button is pressed.

6-65

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (292,1)

Interior Comfort


Full screen

Image is displayed on the full screen.

Cinema screen

The image is enlarged upward and downward. A 4:3 and 16:9 screen ratio image are displayed with the upper/lower part of the image cut off.

NOTE

Because images are enlarged lengthwise for display, a horizontal streak may be seen, however, it does not indicate a malfunction.

* A 16:9 screen ratio image is shown in the above figure.

Normal screen

A 4:3 screen ratio image is the standard display, and black bands appear on each side of the screen.

* A 16:9 screen ratio image is scaled to a

4:3 screen ratio.

Wide screen

The center part of the image is compressed toward the center, and the surrounding area is enlarged toward the edge.


NOTE

The display varies depending on the style of the image recorded on the disc.

Refer to the following table and set the screen size.

Image style

4:3

16:9

Letter box

Recommendation

Normal or wide screen

Full screen

Full or cinema screen

qDisplay Off

Only sound, without image, can be played.

Press and hold the DISPLAY button

( ) on the remote controller.

“DISPLAY OFF” is displayed, and then image turns off.

Press any button on the remote controller to display the image.


6-66

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (293,1)

qRemote Controller

Operate the Rear Entertainment System with the remote controller except for disc insertion/ejection.

CAUTION

Do not apply excessive force to the remote controller or get it wet. Also, do not leave the remote controller in a place exposed to direct sunlight or high temperature. It could cause a malfunction.

NOTE

Operate the remote controller with it pointed to the disc slot of the unit. Signals may not be received depending of the angle.

Maintenance

Stow the remote controller in its case and put it in the seatback pocket of a front seat.

Place the remote controller into its case properly in the direction shown in the figure and stow it in the front seatback pocket.

Interior Comfort


Using the remote controller

A battery has already been installed in the remote controller.

Remove the electrical leak-protection insulation sheet before using the remote controller.

Insulation sheet

Replacing the battery

If the buttons on the remote controller are inoperable, or the operation range becomes narrow or unsteady, the battery may be dead.

Replace the battery using the following procedure.

NOTE

If the remote controller is placed in the incorrect direction, abnormal noise or an operation error could result.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-67



Interior Comfort


Battery: CR2025 LITHIUM or equivalent (1)

1. Press the battery case tab in the direction indicated by the arrow using your thumbnail, and pull out the battery case.

Black plate (294,1)

CAUTION

Ø Install the battery with the correct pole pointing in the correct direction. Battery leakage could occur if they are not installed correctly.

Ø When replacing the batteries, be careful not to bend the electrical terminals or get oil on them. Also, be careful not to get dirt in the remote controller as it could be damaged.

Battery case

Tab

2. Remove the old battery and install a new one with the plus pole pointed up.

Battery

3. Press the battery case tab in the direction of the arrow until a click sound is heard.

NOTE

If the remote controller is inoperable even after the batteries are replaced, consult an


6-68

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (295,1)

Interior Comfort


Sound Output qSound Output from Vehicle Speakers

Vehicles with audio system

Change the audio system to the Rear Entertainment System mode. Sound/Music being played by the Rear Entertainment System can be heard from the vehicle speakers.

For audio operation, refer to

“Audio System” (page 6-17).

Press the MEDIA button ( ) on the audio unit or the mode switch ( ) of the audio control switch.

“RSES” is displayed on the information display and it changes to the

Rear Entertainment System sound.

Adjust the volume with the dial on the audio unit.

Vehicles with navigation system

Change the navigation system to the Rear Entertainment System mode. Sound/Music being played by the Rear Entertainment System can be heard from the vehicle speakers.

For navigation system operation, refer to the separate manual


Press the MEDIA button ( ) on the navigation unit or the mode switch ( ) of the audio control switch.

“RSES” is displayed on the information display and it changes to the


Adjust the volume with the dial on the navigation unit.

qUsing the Headphone Speakers

CAUTION

Ø For safety reasons, the driver should never wear the headphones while driving.

Not being able to hear sound outside of the vehicle could result in a serious accident.

Ø Use the headphones with the volume set at moderate level. Listening at an excessive volume level for extended periods of time will have an adverse effect on your hearing ability.

Ø If the headphone arms are spread excessively is could result in damage.

Ø Do not apply excessive force to the headphones or get them wet. Also, do not leave the headphones in a place exposed to direct sunlight or high temperature. It could cause a malfunction.

6-69

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (296,1)

Interior Comfort


NOTE l l

To listen to audio other than from the speakers of the rear entertainment system, it is necessary to use the wireless headphones that are included. For headphone specification, refer to

“Operation Tips for Headphones” (page 6-59).

When the headphones are not in use, turn them off.

l l l

DTS formatted sound cannot be generated through the headphones. Use the vehicle's speakers.

If there is no sound produced from a signal for 3 minutes or longer after the headphone power is turned on, or there is no signal reception, the headphone power turns off automatically.

If the headphones are continuously used for 4 hours or more after the sound signal is received, the headphone power turns off automatically.

The acceptable range for signals (infrared rays) from the Rear Entertainment System is as follows:


Wireless headphone signal

(infrared rays) transmitter

The signals (infrared rays) can be received in any location on the rear seats. However, the rear of the transmitter is out of the acceptable range.

A wireless headphone can be used in any position on the rear seats, however, the sound may skip under the following conditions because the acceptable range varies or the signals are blocked.

l

When affected by intense light such as direct sunshine.

6-70

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (297,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System l l

When the wireless headphone receiver does not point to the Rear Entertainment System transmitter.

When the signal is blocked by an obstruction such as the seat.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove the screw using a coin or equivalent, and remove the cover. Remove the batteries.

Cover

Screw

2. Insert two AAA-size batteries. Match the polarity of the batteries with the and marks in the battery case.

3. Install the cover.

4. Install the screw.

NOTE

Battery life (reference)

Manganese batteries: About 20 hours

Alkaline batteries: About 40 hours

The battery life is indicated as a reference and does not provide any guarantees. The battery life varies depending on usage conditions (volume, surrounding environment).

6-71

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (298,1)

Interior Comfort


CAUTION

Ø If the battery power is depleted the headphones will not operate properly. If any of the following occurs, replace the batteries.

Ø

Ø

Ø

The power indicator does not illuminate even when the power is turned on.

Noise is mixed with the sound.

The reception range narrows.

Ø Periodically inspect the batteries for leakage.

Ø If the headphones are not to be used for an extended period, remove the batteries.

Ø Be careful not to allow the battery case screw to become loose.

Ø Install the batteries with the ( )/( ) poles correctly positioned. Battery leakage could occur if they are not installed correctly.

Ø When replacing the batteries, be careful not to bend the electrical terminals or get oil on them.

Ø Be careful not to allow dirt to get into the headphones as it could damage them.

The following points regarding the battery must be observed.

If the batteries are not handled properly, it could result in a headphone malfunction.

Ø Do not use rechargeable batteries.

Ø When replacing the batteries, replace both batteries at the same time. Do not use a new battery and an old battery, or the different types of battery.

6-72

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (299,1)

Interior Comfort


Rear Entertainment System Functions qMode

The Rear Entertainment System has Disc and AUX modes.

Disc mode

Mode

AUX (Auxiliary) mode

*

Function

DVD video, video CD, DVD audio, and audio CD can be played.

AV equipment with output terminals for image and sound, such as a video game player and a video camera, can be used.

* Auxiliary terminals in which AV equipment can be connected are equipped.

Refer to Auxiliary terminals and accessory socket on page 6-88.

Mode change

Press the SOURCE button. The mode changes between Disc and AUX.

Page

6-74

6-88

Disc mode

("DISC" is displayed.)

AUX mode

("AUX" is displayed.)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-73



Black plate (300,1)

Interior Comfort


DVD video, DVD audio,

Video CD, Audio CD and

MP3/WMA CD Playback

(Disc Mode)

DVD video, DVD audio, Video CD,

Audio CD, and MP3/WMA CD can be played in the Disc mode.

CAUTION

For safe driving, adjust the volume while driving so that ambient sound can be heard.

NOTE l

Do not use the Rear Entertainment System l l l for a long period with the engine off. The vehicle battery could run down.

To listen to the Rear Entertainment System sound from the vehicle speakers, change the audio or navigation system sound to the


Refer to Sound on page 6-69.


“Operation Tips for Headphones” (page

6-59).

The cooling fan of this unit may activate if the temperature of the unit is high, however, this does not indicate a malfunction.

qBasic Operation

Power ON/OFF

Turning on the power

The Rear Entertainment System automatically turns on when any of the following operations are done with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.

l

The display is open and a disc is l inserted.

The POWER button on the remote controller is pressed.

Turning off

The Rear Entertainment System turns off when any of the following operations are done.

l l l

The POWER button on the remote controller is pressed.

The ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position.

The display is closed.

Playback

The top menu or disc menu may be displayed on the monitor screen when a disc is played. From these menus, the disc functions can be performed.

Refer to Top menu and disc menu on page

6-77.

NOTE l

For some discs, the top menu or disc menu may be displayed automatically after l playback.

Refer to the instruction manual attached to the disc for the top menu or disc menu.

When no disc is inserted


ON position.

6-74

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (301,1)

Interior Comfort


2. Insert the disc into the disc slot.

After the disc is inserted, the playback starts.

CAUTION

Insert the disc with its label-side

(decorated side) facing upward. If the disc is inserted upside-down, it may cause a malfunction.

When a disc has been inserted


ON position.

2. Turn on the Rear Entertainment

System.

3. Press the PLAY button to start playback.

NOTE

If the Rear Entertainment System has been turned off during a previous playback, playback automatically resumes when the system is turned on.

Stopping the playback

Press the STOP button to stop the playback.

To resume the playback, press the PLAY button.

Resume playback function

The Rear Entertainment System stores the position where the playback has been stopped using the resume playback function.

Press the PLAY button to resume the playback from the position previously stopped.

NOTE

If the RETURN button is pressed after the playback has been stopped, the resume playback function is canceled. Once the resume playback function is canceled, the playback starts from the first chapter (DVD video)/track (video CD, audio CD, DVD audio, or MP3/WMA CD) when the PLAY button is pressed.

Pausing the playback

Press the PAUSE button to pause the playback.

Press the PAUSE or PLAY button to resume the playback.


Fast-forward

Image and sound is fast-forwarded while the FWD button ( ) is pressed.

Reverse

Image and sound is reversed while the

REW button ( ) is pressed.

Slow playback (DVD video and video

CD)

Press the SLOW button to slow the playback.

Press the SLOW or PLAY button to return to normal playback speed.

NOTE l

Slow playback is not available for audio

CD, DVD audio and MP3/WMA CD.

l

The unit is muted while in slow playback.

Skipping the chapter/track

Chapter (DVD video) or track (video CD,

DVD audio, audio CD, and MP3/WMA

CD) can be skipped (changed).

6-75

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (302,1)

Interior Comfort


Fast-forward skip

Press the NEXT button ( the next chapter/track.

) to skip to

Reverse skip

Press the PREV button ( ) to return to the beginning of the current chapter/track.

NOTE

To return to the beginning of the previous chapter/track, press the PREV button ( again within 2 seconds after the button is pressed.

)

Skipping to desired chapter/track

The playback can be started from the desired chapter (DVD video)/track (video

CD, DVD audio and audio CD) by entering the chapter/track number.

1. Enter the chapter/track number using the number keys (0 to 9) while the disc is being played.

2. Press the ENTER button to start the playback from the selected chapter/ track.

Example: when selecting chapter/track number

“10”

1.Press the number key (1).


3.Press the ENTER button.

NOTE l

If a chapter/track number not in the disc is input, the last chapter/track is played.

l

Refer to the instruction manual attached to the disc for chapter/track numbers.

Skipping to desired title/group

The playback can be started from the desired title/group by entering the title/ group number.

1. Enter the title/group number using the number keys (0 to 9) while the playback is stopped.

2. Press the ENTER button to start the playback from the selected title.

Example: When selecting title number

“2”


2.Press the ENTER button.

NOTE l l

If a title/group number not in the disc is input, the last title/group is played.

Refer to the instruction manual attached to the disc for the title/group numbers.

Bonus group playback

1. Press the number button (0) while a disc is not being played.

If the disc has a bonus group

*

, the display shows as follows.

6-76

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (303,1)

Interior Comfort


2. Press the ENTER button to change the display to the password input screen, then enter the password.

For the password, see the instruction manual attached to the disc.

* Bonus group means the 'Bonus tracks' originally recorded in the disc.

qAssist Functions (DVD video, DVD audio, video CD and audio CD)

Top menu and disc menu

NOTE

Operation may vary or cannot be performed depending on the disc. Refer to the instruction manual attached to the disc.

Top menu

Multiple titles may have been recorded on some discs.

For these DVD discs, the desired title can be selected in the top menu.

Disc menu

The unique functions of each DVD disc are recorded as the menu. This is referred to as the disc menu.

Various menu related images and sound are recorded in the disc menu.

Displaying/selecting top menu/disc menu

1. To display the top menu on the screen, press the MENU button while the disc is not being played. To display the disc menu on the screen, press the MENU button during playback.

2. Move the cursor to the desired menu by operating the select button up/down or left/right.

3. Press the ENTER button to operate the selected menu.

4. To return to playback, press the MENU button or the STOP button, then the

PLAY button.

Function menu

In the function menu, the following items can be selected/operated while in playback.

Language (sound and subtitle) selection (DVD video and DVD audio)

Subtitle ON/OFF (DVD video)

Display angle change (DVD video and

DVD audio)

Sound output balance adjustment

(Video CD)

Repeat/random playback (Video CD,

DVD audio and audio CD)

DVD video function menu

6-77

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (304,1)

Interior Comfort


DVD audio function menu

Video CD/audio CD function menu

NOTE

For audio CD, the function menu is automatically displayed when playback is started.

Language (sound and subtitles) selection (DVD video and DVD audio)

Sound and subtitles can be changed to the desired language.

NOTE

Available languages varies depending on the

DVD disc.

1. Press the DISPLAY button to display the function menu.

2. Move the cursor and select the sound select mode or subtitle select mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

NOTE l

In the function menu, the title/group l number, chapter/track number, and playback elapsed time cannot be selected/ changed.

Settings set in the function menu are available only for the current disc. Settings set in the initial setting function menu are available for the Rear Entertainment

System unit itself so that the settings remain after the disc is changed. Refer to Initial

setting function on page 6-83.

Displaying the function menu

Press the DISPLAY button while in playback to display the function menu on the monitor screen.

Press the DISPLAY button again to cancel.

6-78

3. Move the cursor and select the desired language by operating the select button up or down.

4. Press the DISPLAY button to finish the function menu.

Subtitle ON/OFF (DVD video)

Subtitle on/off can be set.


Form No.8V83-EA-06I



2. Move the cursor to the subtitle ON/

OFF mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

Black plate (305,1)

Interior Comfort


2. Move the cursor to the display angle change mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

3. Select ON to display the subtitles, or

OFF to hide them by operating the select button up or down.


Display angle change (DVD video and

DVD audio)

The image can be displayed at the desired angle.

NOTE l l

Display angle change is not available for discs other than multi-angle recorded DVD discs. Refer to the instruction manual attached to the disc for details.

The available angles vary depending on the disc.


3. Move the cursor and select the desired angle by operating the select button up or down.


Sound output balance adjustment

(Video CD)

1. Press the DISPLAY button during the video CD playback to display the function menu.

2. Move the cursor to the sound output balance adjustment mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

6-79

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (306,1)

Interior Comfort


3. Set the sound output to the desired balance by operating the select button up or down.

Press the button and the settings changes in the order of L+R

→L →R.

The sound balance changes according to the setting.

L: Audio recorded in the audio output channel from the left is output.

R: Audio recorded in the audio output channel from the right is output.

L R: Audio recorded in the audio output channel from the left/right is output.


Repeat/random playback (Video CD,

DVD audio and audio CD)

Tracks can be played repeatedly or randomly.

1. Press the DISPLAY button while in the playback to display the function menu on the monitor screen.

2. Move the cursor to the repeat/random playback mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

3. Select the desired mode by operating the select button up or down.

(1) During DVD audio:

Each time the button is pressed, the mode changes in the order of 1

―

NON

― RPF ― NOF ― RND ―

RNF

― ALL ― 1.

ALL: Repeats all tracks.

1: Repeats the current track.

RPF: Repeats all tracks in the current group

NOF: Stops playback after all tracks in the current group are played.

RND: Randomly selects and plays a track from all tracks.

RNF: Randomly selects and plays a track from the current group.

(2) During video CD and audio CD

Each time the button is pressed, the mode changes in the order of 1

―

NON

― RND ― ALL ― 1.

ALL: Repeats all tracks. (Returns to the beginning of the disc after all tracks are played.)

1: Repeats the current track.

NON: Stops playback after all tracks in the disc are played.

RND: Randomly plays a track.


NOTE

The function menu is displayed during audio

CD playback and it cannot be canceled by pressing the DISPLAY button during playback.

qAssist Functions (MP3/WMA CD)

Folders and files

The order of MP3/WMA file playback is as follows: l

A folder number is assigned to each folder on a disc.

6-80

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (307,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System l l l l

For example, the folder numbers for folders (1), (3), and (5) in the figure are not displayed because they do not contain MP3/WMA files.

Folders and files in a hierarchy are played in the order that they are recorded on the disc by the writing software.

Up to 255 files in 8 hierarchies can be played.

The loading time may be longer depending on the disc.

: Folder

: Order of playback

: MP3 file

: WMA file

Folder/File information display window

Display mode

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Function menu

If MP3/WMA files are to be played, operate the select button and move the cursor to select the playback file, playback mode, and display mode.

Folder number/Playback list number

File number

Playback elapsed time

Playback mode

Playback status

Changing the display mode

1. Move the cursor to the display mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

2. Change the display mode by operating the select button up or down.

Display

FOLDER

TAG INFO

TREE IDX

PLST IDX

PLAYLIST

CD TRACK

Displayed information

All folders and files display

File tag display

(FOLDER name, FILE name,

TITLE name, ARTIST name, and ALBUM name) display

Folder tree display

Playlist display

(If there is a playlist on the disc.)

Files on playlist display

(If the files on the playlist are being played.)

CD track display

(If CD tracks on a disc which has both MP3/WMA and CD audio files are being played.)

Changing the playback mode

1. Move the cursor to the playback mode by operating the select button to the left or right.

6-81

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (308,1)

Interior Comfort


2. Change the display mode by operating the select button up or down.

Display

ALL

1

NON

RPF

NOF

RND

RNF

Playback mode

All files are played repeatedly.

The current file is played repeatedly.

All files are played once and the playback stops.

All files in the current folder are played repeatedly.

Files in the current folder are played once and the playback stops.

All files are played randomly.

Files in the current folder are played randomly.

NOTE

If RND or RNF is selected during a playlist playback, files on the playlist are played randomly. Refer to Playlist File Playback on

page 6-82.

Selection file

While in FOLDER display mode

1. Move the cursor to the folder/file information display window by operating the select button to the left or right.

2. Move the cursor to the desired folder/ file by operating the select button up or down.

3. Press the ENTER button to play the selected file or to move to the selected folder.

NOTE

To return to an upper hierarchy, move the cursor to the

“PARENT FOLDER” and press the ENTER button.

While in TREEIDX display mode

1. Move the cursor to the folder/file information display window by operating the select button to the left or right.

2. Move the cursor to the folder where the desired file is located by operating the select button up or down.

3. Press the ENTER button. Playback starts from the first track in the selected folder.

NOTE l

“ ” mark is attached to a folder if the folder has a playable MP3/WMA file.

l

If a disc including a playlist is being played, the playlist file can be selected.

Playlist file playback

Playlist files can be played using the following procedure:

1. Set the display mode to the TREEIDX mode. Refer to Changing the display

mode on page 6-80.

2. Move the cursor to the PLAYLIST by operating the select button.

3. Press the ENTER button to change the display from TREEIDX to PLSTIDX.

4. Move the cursor to the desired playlist file by operating the select button up or down.

5. Press the ENTER button. Playback starts in the order programmed in the playlist file.

NOTE

The loading time after pressing the ENTER button may be longer depending on the disc.

6-82

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (309,1)

Interior Comfort


qInitial Setting Function

The settings set in the initial setting function remain after the unit is turned off or the disc is changed.

The following items can be set in the initial setting.

Lang: Sound and subtitle setting

Rating: Parental lock setting

Mark: On-Screen Mark, Angle Mark and

Mode Priority settings

Audio: Audio DRC setting

Aspect: Not available

Displaying/selecting the initial setting function menu

1. Press the SET UP button while the disc is not being played to display the initial setting function menu on the monitor screen.

NOTE l

The initial setting can be performed with no l disc inserted.

After setting the initial setting, the playback starts from the first chapter/track.

3. Press the ENTER button. The selected menu is highlighted to indicate that the menu is selected.

4. Select the item to be set by operating the select button up or down.

2. Move the cursor to the desired menu by operating the select button up/down or left/right.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-83



Black plate (310,1)

Interior Comfort


5. Press the ENTER button. The highlighted color returns to the previous color to indicate that the selected item is set.

Changing to a language other than

English and Japanese

NOTE l

Languages other than English and l

Japanese can be set by entering the language code in the language code list.

Refer to Language code list on page 6-92.

If the selected language is not recorded in the disc, the language is not available.

1. Move the cursor to

“Other” by operating the select button up or down.

2. Press the ENTER button, and then operate the select button to the right.

6. To finish the function menu on the monitor display, press the SET UP,

MENU, or STOP button.

Lang (Language)

Sound and subtitles can be changed to the desired language.

Menu language: Language used for top menu/disc menu

Sound language: Language used for movie sound (voice)

Subtitle language: Language used for subtitles

3. Enter the desired language code by pressing the number keys (0 to 9) or operating the select button up or down.

4. Press the ENTER button to set the language of the entered language code.

NOTE

If

“English” or “Japanese” is selected afterward, the previously entered language code is cleared.

Rating

If the disc has a parental lock code, viewing can be restricted. Also, the setting can be protected by a password to prevent someone changing the setting.

6-84

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (311,1)

Interior Comfort


Viewing can be restricted by setting the parent lock level.

For example, if the level is set to 6, level 7 or higher viewing is locked and cannot be played.

NOTE l l

Parent lock is not available depending on the disc.

The initial password setting (when purchased) is

“0000”.

Changing the Rating setting

1. Enter the password by pressing the number keys (0 to 9) or operating the select button up or down.

Rating change: Parent lock level setting

Country change: Setting for the country where the disc is being played.

Password change: Registered password changes

2. Press the ENTER button.

If the password is confirmed, the

Rating change mode is displayed.

NOTE

The setting cannot be changed without the correct password. Note down the password so you don't forget it.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

3. Select the desired parent lock level and press the ENTER button to set.

6-85



Black plate (312,1)

Interior Comfort


Country change

NOTE

It is necessary to set the country code because the parent lock level is different depending on the country. When using the unit in U.S.A., set the country code to

“3018”. The parent lock function is disabled without the country code

setting (page 6-94).


3. Enter the country code by pressing the number keys (0 to 9) or operating the select button up or down.

4. Press the ENTER button to set the country of the entered country code.

Changing the password



If the password is confirmed, the password change mode is displayed.

NOTE



If the password is confirmed, the password change mode is displayed.

NOTE


6-86

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (313,1)

Interior Comfort


Mark

The DVD video playback status and angle display on/off, and priority of the inserted discs can be set.

3. Enter the new password by pressing the number keys (0 to 9) or operating the select button up or down.

4. Press the ENTER button to set the new password.

On-Screen Mark

Select ON to display, OFF not to display the DVD video playback status on the upper right corner of the screen.

When the screen display is on, the following marks are displayed on the upper right corner of the screen (in Disc mode).

Mark Condition

Playback

Stop (Resume standby)

Pause

Fast-forward

Reverse

Angle display

The camera mark display when multiangle can be performed.

6-87

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (314,1)

Interior Comfort


NOTE l

The display angle change is not available for discs other than multi-angle recorded l

DVD discs. Refer to the instruction manual accompanying the disc for details.

The screen size and angle can be changed when On-Screen Mark and Angle Mark is off.

Mode Priority

The priority of the inserted discs (CD-R/

CD-RW) can be selected.

Audio

Digital Output

Not used with this unit.

Audio DRC

The audio dynamic range can be adjusted to reduce the difference between the maximum and minimum audio output.

Audio compression of the DVD video playback can be selected or deselected during playback using the following modes:

Mode

NONE

LINE

RF

Function

Playback with normal volume

Lower volume is increased to reduce difference in volume range.

Use when it is still difficult to hear sound while using LINE.

Sound quality is reduced while using RF.

NOTE

Only sound output from the headphones is available.

Auxiliary Input (AUX mode)

In AUX mode, AV equipment such as a video game player or a video camera can be used by connecting the image and sound cables to the auxiliary terminals.

NOTE l

Before operating, read the instruction l l manual accompanying the AV equipment to be used.

To listen to the Rear Entertainment System sound from the vehicle speakers, change the audio or navigation system sound to the


Refer to Sound on page 6-69.


“Operation Tips for Headphones” (page

6-59).

The cooling fan for this unit may activate if the temperature of the unit is high, however, this does not indicate a malfunction.

qAuxiliary Terminals and Power

Outlet

The auxiliary terminals and power outlet are positioned as shown in the figure.

Power outlet

(AC115V)

Auxiliary terminals

6-88

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (315,1)

Interior Comfort


Auxiliary terminals

The auxiliary terminals consist of one image input terminal and two sound input terminals (for left and right).

Image input terminal: Yellow

Sound input (Right) terminal: Red

Sound input (Left) terminal: White

To use, open the cover.

CAUTION

Close the cover when the terminals are not in use. If foreign material penetrates, or liquid is spilled on it, it may cause a malfunction.

NOTE l

For monaural equipment (with one sound l output terminal), connect the terminal to the sound input terminal (White). The sound is output from the speaker to which the terminal has been connected.

Noise may occur depending on the connected equipment.

Power Outlet

The power outlet can be used as a power supply for electrical devices when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Only use AC 115 V electrical appliances requiring no greater than 100 W

Open the cover to use the power outlet.

WARNING

Ø Never use medical instruments with the power outlet.

Ø Follow the cautions below to prevent electrical shock.

Ø

Do not plug accessories into the power outlet or unplug them with wet hands.

Ø

Do not put anything other than plugs into the outlet.

Ø

Do not disassemble the outlet.

CAUTION

Ø Always close the cover when not in use. If foreign objects or liquid penetrate the outlet, it may cause a malfunction.

Ø Do not use electrical appliances that exceed the prescribed power capacity. It may cause a malfunction.

NOTE

To prevent discharging of the battery, do not use the auxiliary input for long periods with the engine off or idling.

Plug-in

1. Open the cover.

6-89

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (316,1)

Interior Comfort


2. Lightly insert the plug and turn the outlet 90 degrees, then insert it fully.

POWER OUTLET

Unplug

1. Pull the plug out.

2. Close the cover.

NOTE

The following electrical appliances may not operate even if their electrical capacity is 100

W or less.

l

Appliances requiring large amounts of power for activation (such as cathode-ray tube televisions, refrigerators with a l compressor, electrical pumps, and electrical tools)

Appliances with a power supply frequency l switch function (such as clocks and audio)

Appliances for precise data processing

(such as measurement equipment)

Some electrical appliances other than the above may not operate.

The protection circuit may operate and the power supply may be stopped to prevent battery depletion.

When using an electrical appliance for data processing such as a personal computer, back up the data frequently.

The power outlet (AC115V) cannot be used in the following cases: l l

Battery power is weak

Appliances with a capacity of 100 W or more are used l

Cabin temperature is extremely hot

Noise may occur during radio or television operation depending on the electrical appliance being used.

qUsing AV Equipment

CAUTION

For safe driving, adjust the volume while driving so that ambient sound can be heard.

NOTE

Before operating, read the instruction manual accompanying the AV equipment to be used.

6-90

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (317,1)

Interior Comfort


1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. If a power supply is necessary, connect the outlet to the power outlet.

Refer to Power outlet on page 6-88.

3. Connect the image cable and sound cables to the input terminals.

Accessory socket

(DC12 V, 10 A) Plug

Auxiliary terminals

Red

White

Yellow

AV equipment

Sound cable (Right)

Sound cable (Left)

Image cable

NOTE l

For monaural equipment (with one sound output terminal), connect the terminal to l either of the sound input terminals (Red) and (White). The sound is output from the speaker to which the terminal has been connected.

Noise may occur depending on the connected equipment.


ON position.

5. Press the SOURCE button and select the AUX mode.

Refer to Mode on page 6-73.

6. Operate the equipment following the instruction manual accompanying the equipment.

6-91

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (318,1)

Interior Comfort

Rear Entertainment System fo fj fi fr fy gl de ka km ca zh co hr cs da nl en eo et bi br bg my be ba eu bn dz bh ar hy as ay az ab aa af sq am

Abkhazian

Afar

Afrekaans

Albanian

Amharic

Arabic

Armenian

Assamase

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Language

Bashkir

Basque

Bengali

Bhutani

Bihari

Bislama

Breton

Bulgarian

Burmese

Byelorussian

Cambodian

Catalan

Chinese

Corsican

Croatian

Czech

Danish

Dutch

English

Esperanto

Estonian

Faroese

Fiji

Finnish

French

Friesian

Galician

German

Gorgian

6-92

Language Code List

1514

1509

1508

1517

1524

1611

1304

2000

1108

1117

1106

2224

1104

2012

1200

3507

1214

1717

1218

1300

2311

1413

1414

1419

1017

1724

1018

1024

1025

1100

1420

1113

1325

1107

Code

1001

1000

1005

2816

1012

Greek

Greenlandic

Guarani

Gujarati

Language

Hausa

Hebrew

Hindi

Hungarian

Icelandic

Indonesian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Irish

Italian

Japanese

Javanese

Kannada

Kashmiri

Kazakh

Kinyarwanda

Kirghiz

Kirundi

Korean

Kurdish

Laothian

Latin

Latvian

Lingala

Lithuanian

Macedonian

Malagasy

Malay

Malayalam

Maltese

Maori

Marathi

Moldavian

Mongolian mg ms ml mt mi mr mo mn rw ky rn ko ku lo la lv ln lt mk ha iw hi hu is in el kl gn gu ja jw kn ks kk ia ie ik ga it

2722

2024

2713

2014

2020

2114

2100

2121

2113

2119

2210

1800

1804

1810

1600

1819

1900

1922

2013

2018

2010

2206

2218

2211

2219

2208

2217

2214

2213

Code

1411

2011

1613

1620

1700

1822

1708

1720

1818

1813

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Language

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Occtian

Oriya

Oromo

Panjabi

Pashto, Pushto

Persian

Polish

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Romanian

Russian

Samoan

Sangho

SanSkrit

Scots-Gaelic

Serbian

Serbo-Croatian

Sesotho

Setswana

Shona

Sindhi

Singhalese

Siswaiti

Slovak

Slovenian

Somali

Spanish

Sundanese

Swahili

Swedish

Tagalog

Tajik

Tamil

Tatar

Telugu

Thai

Tibetan pl pt qu rm ro ru sm sg sa gd sr or om pa ps fa na ne no oc su sw sv tl tg ss sk sl so es te th ta tt bo sh st tn sn sd si

Code

2300

2304

2314

2402

2417

2412

2500

2518

1500

2511

2519

2620

2712

2714

2720

2812

2806

2800

1603

2817

2818

2810

2811

2814

1418

2820

2822

2821

2911

2906

2807

2819

2913

2813

2803

2808

2900

2919

2904

2907

1114

Black plate (319,1)

Interior Comfort


Tigrinya

Tonga

Tsonga

Tukmen

Turkish

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapuk

Welsh

Wolof

Xhosa

Yiddish

Yoruba

Zulu

Language vi vo cy wo xh ji yo zu tr tw uk ur uz ti to ts tk

Code

2908

2914

2918

2910

2917

2922

3010

3017

3025

3108

3114

1224

3214

3307

1908

3414

3520

6-93

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (320,1)

Interior Comfort


Country

Afghanistan

Albania

Algeria

American Samoa

Andorra

Angola

Anguilla

Antarctica

Antigua and Barbuda

Argentina

Armenia

Aruba

Australia

Austria

Azerbaijan

Bahamas

Bahrain

Bangladesh

Barbados

Belarus

Belgium

Belize

Benin

Bermuda

Bhutan

Bolivia

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Botswana

Bouvet Island

Brazil

British Indian Ocean

Territory

Brunei

Bulgaria

Burkina Faso

Burundi

Cambodia

Cameroon

Canada

6-94

IO

BN

BG

BF

BI

KH

CM

CA

BS

BH

BD

BB

BY

AM

AW

AU

AT

AZ

AO

AI

AQ

AG

AR

AF

AL

DZ

AS

AD

BA

BW

BV

BR

BE

BZ

BJ

BM

BT

BO

1814

1113

1106

1105

1108

2007

1212

1200

1014

1008

1016

1006

1017

1012

1022

1020

1019

1025

Code

1005

1011

1325

1018

1003

1104

1125

1109

1112

1119

1114

1118

1107

1103

1101

1124

1100

1122

1121

1117

Country Code List

Country

Cape Verde

Cayman Islands

Central African Republic

Chad

Chile

China

Christmas Island

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

Colombia

Comoros

Congo

Congo,The Democratic

Republic of the

Cook Islands

Costa Rica

Cote D'Ivoire

Croatia (Hrvatska)

Cuba

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Denmark

Djibouti

Dominica

Dominican Republic

East Timor

Ecuador

Egypt

El Salvador

Equatorial Guinea

Eritrea

Estonia

Ethiopia

Falkland Islands (Malvinas)

Faroe Islands

Fiji

Finland

France

French Guiana

French

CD

TP

EC

EG

SV

GQ

ER

CZ

DK

DJ

DM

DO

CK

CR

CI

HR

CU

CY

FI

FR

GF

PF

EE

ET

FK

FO

FJ

CV

KY

CF

TD

CL

CN

CX

CC

CO

KM

CG

1203

1225

1310

1309

1312

1314

2915

1402

1406

2821

1616

1417

1210

1217

1208

1717

1220

1224

1404

1419

1510

1514

1509

1508

1517

1605

2505

Code

1221

2024

1205

2903

1211

1213

1223

1202

1214

2012

1206

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



French Southern Territories

Gabon

Gambia

Georgia

Country

Germany

Ghana

Gibraltar

Greece

Greenland

Grenada

Guadeloupe

Guam

Guatemala

Guinea

Guinea-Bissau

Guyana

Haiti

GY

HT

Heard and McDonald Islands HM

Holy See (Vatican City State) VA

Honduras HN

GD

GP

GU

GT

GN

GW

DE

GH

GI

GR

GL

TF

GA

GM

GE

Hong Kong

Hungary

Iceland

India

Indonesia

Iran, Islamic Republic of

Iraq

Ireland

Israel

Italy

Jamaica

Japan

Jordan

Kazakstan

Kenya

Kiribati

Korea (North), Democratic

People's Republic

Korea (South), Republic of

Kuwait

Kyrgyzstan

KP

KR

KW

KG

JP

JO

KZ

KE

KI

IQ

IE

IL

IT

JM

HK

HU

IS

IN

ID

IR

Code

2905

1600

1612

1604

1304

1607

1608

1617

1611

1603

1615

1620

1619

1613

1622

1624

1719

1712

3100

1713

1816

1804

1811

1819

1912

1915

1914

2025

2004

2008

1710

1720

1818

1813

1803

1817

2015

2017

2022

2006

Black plate (321,1)

Interior Comfort


LR

LY

LI

LT

LU

LA

LV

LB

LS

MO

MK

FM

MD

MC

MN

MS

MQ

MR

MU

YT

MX

MA

MZ

MM

NA

NR

NP

NL

AN

NC

NZ

NI

NE

MG

MW

MY

MV

ML

MT

MH

Country

Lao People's Democratic

Latvia

Lebanon

Lesotho

Liberia

Libyan Arab Jamahiriya

Liechtenstein

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Macau

Macedonia, the Former

Yugoslav Republic of

Madagascar

Malawi

Malaysia

Maldives

Mali

Malta

Marshall Islands

Martinique

Mauritania

Mauritius

Mayotte

Mexico

Micronesia, Federated States

Moldova, Republic

Monaco

Mongolia

Montserrat

Morocco

Mozambique

Myanmar (Burma)

Namibia

Nauru

Nepal

Netherlands

Netherlands Antilles

New Caledonia

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Niger

Code

2100

2121

2101

2118

2117

2124

2108

2119

2120

2214

2210

2216

2217

2220

3419

2223

1512

2203

2202

2213

2218

2200

2225

2212

2300

2317

2315

2311

1013

2302

2325

2308

2304

2206

2222

2224

2221

2211

2219

2207

6-95

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (322,1)

Interior Comfort


Country

Nigeria

Niue

Norfolk Island

Northern Mariana Islands

Norway

Oman

Pakistan

Palau

Palestinian Territory,

Occupied

Panama

Papua New Guinea

Paraguay

Peru

Philippines

Pitcairn

Poland

Portugal

Puerto Rico

Qatar

Reunion

Romania

Russian Federation

Rwanda

Saint Helena

Saint Kitts and

Saint Lucia

Saint Pierre and Miquelon

Saint Vincent and the

Grenadines

Samoa

San Marino

Sao Tome and Principe

Saudi Arabia

Senegal

Seychelles

Sierra Leone

Singapore

Slovakia (Slovak Republic)

Slovenia

Solomon Islands

Somalia

6-96

SH

KN

LC

PM

QA

RE

RO

RU

RW

PH

PN

PL

PT

PR

PA

PG

PY

PE

VC

SN

SC

SL

SG

SK

WS

SM

ST

SA

SI

SB

SO

NO

OM

PK

PW

NG

NU

NF

MP

PS

2600

2704

2714

2720

2722

2807

2013

2102

2512

2500

2506

2524

2504

2507

2513

2511

2519

2517

3102

3218

2812

2819

2800

2813

2802

2811

2806

2810

2808

2801

2814

Code

2306

2320

2305

2215

2314

2412

2510

2522

2518

VE

VN

VG

VI

UM

UY

UZ

VU

VA

ZA

GS

ES

LK

SD

SR

SJ

SZ

SE

CH

SY

TW

TJ

TZ

TH

TG

TK

TO

TT

TN

TR

TM

TC

TV

UG

UA

AE

GB

US

Country

South Africa

South Georgia and the South

Sandwich Islands

Spain

Sri Lanka

Sudan

Suriname

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Islands

Swaziland

Sweden

Switzerland

Syrian Arab Republic

Taiwan, Province of China

Tajikistan

Tanzania,United Republic

Thailand

Togo

Tokelau

Tonga

Trinidad and Tobago

Tunisia

Turkey

Turkmenistan

Turks and Caicos Islands

Tuvalu

Uganda

Ukraine

United Arab Emirates

United Kingdom

United States

United States Minor Outlying

Islands

Uruguay

Uzbekistan

Vanuatu

Vatican City State See Holy

See

Venezuela

Viet Nam

Virgin Islands, British

Virgin Islands, U.S.

3012

3024

3025

3120

3100

3104

3113

3106

3108

Code

3500

1618

1418

2110

2803

2817

2809

2825

2804

1207

2824

2922

2909

2925

2907

2906

2910

2914

2919

2913

2917

2912

2902

2921

3006

3000

1004

1601

3018

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Country

Wallis and Futuna Islands

Western Sahara

Yemen

Yugoslavia

Zaire See Congo, The

Democratic Republic of the

Zambia

Zimbabwe

WF

EH

YE

YU

ZR

ZM

ZW

Code

3205

1407

3404

3420

3517

3512

3522

Black plate (323,1)

Interior Comfort


Form No.8V83-EA-06I

6-97



Black plate (324,1)

Interior Comfort


Error Message qMessage

Disc mode error message

Use of Non-supported Disc

An error message is displayed if a nonsupported DVD-ROM disc, a nonsupported disc format or a disc (PAL, other) with a different image signal encoding is read.

Incorrect region code

An error message is displayed if a disc other than one with region code 1 or including region 1 is inserted.

If the disc content cannot be read:

An error message is displayed if the disc cannot be read due to scratches or the content cannot be read.

High temperature malfunction

If the temperature surrounding the DVD player area exceeds 88°C (190°F), the

DVD player operation is stopped to protect the unit. When the temperature decreases to 70°C (158°F) or less, the protective circuit function is cleared and the operation is restored.

6-98

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



System errors (Common to each mode)

Power malfunction

An error message is displayed if the power supply to the rear entertainment system drops (About 9.5 V or less), and the power is turned off.

The power is restored when the power supply to the rear entertainment system is

10 V or more.

Black plate (325,1)

Interior Comfort


High temperature malfunction

If the temperature around the LCD area exceeds 95°C (203°F), the power supply is turned off to protect the LCD.

When the temperature around the LCD area is 85°C (185°F) or less, the protective circuit function is cleared and the operation is restored.

6-99

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (326,1)

Interior Comfort


Symptoms and Actions

If any malfunction is suspected, verify the following before requesting a repair.

If the problem cannot be solved after performing the procedure, have the system inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Some functions are not available depending on the disc. Read the instruction manual attached to the disc before operating.

Symptom

System cannot be turned on

Image cannot be displayed

Disc cannot be played

Sound cannot be output

Cause

The ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

The remote controller batteries are weak.

Remote controller batteries poles are pointed in the wrong direction.

The vehicle battery is weak.

The cabin temperature

(Rear Entertainment System unit temperature) is high.


No disc is inserted.

Action

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position.

Replace the batteries with new ones.

Refer to Remote Controller on page 6-67.

Install the batteries in the correct direction.


Recharge or replace the vehicle battery.

Retry after the temperature has lowered.


An invalid disc is inserted.

The wrong mode has been selected.


Disc is inserted upside down.

Parent lock level is set.


Insert a disc.

Insert a disc which can be played by this unit.

Refer to Operating Tips for Discs on page 6-52.

Select the correct mode by pressing the SOURCE button.

Refer to Mode on page 6-73.

Insert a disc.

Insert the disc with the label-side up.

Clear or change the parent lock level.


Volume is too low.

The audio unit/navigation system is not set in the Rear Entertainment System mode.

An invalid disc has been inserted.

Adjust the volume.

Set the audio unit/navigation system in the Rear

Entertainment System mode.

Refer to Sound Output on page 6-69.

Insert a disc which can be played by this unit.

Refer to Operating Tips for Discs on page 6-52.

Insert a disc.


Disc is inserted upside down.

Playback has been paused.

Insert the disc with the label-side up.

Cancel the pause.

The playback is in slow, fast-forward, or reverse mode.

Select normal playback.

Refer to Basic operation on page 6-74.

6-100

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (327,1)

Interior Comfort


Symptom weak.

Cause

Audio output from vehicle speakers but not from headphones

There are subtle spots or luminescent spots on the screen.

DTS format language is selected and played back.

(The wireless headphones cannot playback DTS format language)

Image and/or sound is distorted.

The disc is dirty.

The disc has a scratch.

Dew condensation on the disc

The LCD is high tech equipment with a

99.99% effective sensor resolution.

However, please be aware that 0.01% pixel failure or pixel continuous illuminated pixels may exist.

Subtitles cannot be changed

Display angle cannot be changed

Other languages are not recorded on the disc.

Multiple angles are not recorded on the disc.

The remote controller is not pointed toward the receiver on the unit.

Remote controller is inoperable

There is an obstruction between the remote controller and the unit.

The remote controller batteries are

Remote controller batteries poles are pointed in the wrong direction.

No power to the headphones.

Action

Select audio other than DTS format.

Clean the signal surface of the disc.

Replace the disc with another one.

Clear the dew condensation.

―

Check the available language in the instruction manual accompanying the disc.

Check the available angle in the instruction manual accompanying the disc.

Point the remote controller toward the receiver on the unit.

The receiver is near the disc slot.

Operate the remote controller avoiding the obstruction so that the signal reaches the receiver on the unit. The receiver is near the disc slot.



Install the batteries in the correct direction.


Turn on the power to the headphones.

The headphones' optical receiver is not pointed towards the main unit's transmitter.

Point the headphones' optical receiver towards the main unit's transmitter. The main unit's transmitter is located near the disc insertion area.

There is an obstruction between the headphones and the main unit.

Avoid the obstruction.

No audio output from the headphones.

The headphones' batteries are depleted. Replace the batteries with new ones.

The headphones' batteries have not been correctly inserted in the / directions.

Insert the batteries correctly.

The headphones are exposed to direct sunlight.

Use the headphones while avoiding direct sunlight.

Power turns off automatically.

If there is no sound for 3 minutes or longer, or if the headphones are continuously used for 4 hours, there is a function which automatically turns the power off. Turn the power to headphones back on.

6-101

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (328,1)

Interior Comfort


Symptom

The headphones' optical reception range is too narrow.

There is excessive noise in the headphone audio

Cause

The headphones' batteries are weak.

The headphones' batteries are weak.

Action



6-102

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (329,1)

Interior Comfort



í

qWhat is a Bluetooth Hands-Free?

Bluetooth Hands-Free Outline

By connecting a Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone to the hands-free unit equipped on the vehicle, making and receiving calls are possible using the phone button located on the steering wheel and voice commands.

Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone

A Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone communicates with the hands-free unit equipped on the vehicle using radio transmission (Bluetooth).

For example, if the mobile telephone is placed in a coat pocket, the phone calls can be made through your mobile service without direct use of the mobile telephone.

Applicable Bluetooth specification

Ver. 1.1 or higher

Response profile l

HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0

l

DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile)

Ver.1.1

NOTE l

If the ignition switch is turned off during a hands-free call, the line is transferred to the l mobile telephone automatically.

If the mobile telephone is in a location where radio reception is difficult such as a metal container or in the trunk, the call may not be connected using Bluetooth. If communication is not possible, change the location of the mobile telephone.

qComponent parts

The Bluetooth Hands-Free consists of the following parts: l l l l

Phone button

Information display

Microphone

Audio unit/Navigation system

Phone button

Basic functions of the Bluetooth Hands-

Free can be used such as making calls or hanging up by operating the phone button.

Bluetooth is the registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Phone button

Phone button operations

A short press or a long press of the phone button is used depending on the operation status as follows: l l

Short press (Press the button less than

0.7 sec.)

Long press (Press the button 0.7 sec. or more.)

í

Some models.

6-103

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (330,1)

Interior Comfort


Information display

Telephone numbers, Bluetooth Hands-

Free messages, and operation status are displayed.

If the Bluetooth Hands-Free is operated, information such as radio wave reception conditions of the Bluetooth Hands-Free are displayed on the screen. (With navigation system)

Microphone

The microphone is used for inputting voice commands or exchanging conversation.

Bluetooth Hands-Free information

qVoice

To prevent the deterioration in voice recognition rate and voice quality, the following points must be observed: l

It is not necessary to face the microphone or approach it. Call out the voice commands while maintaining a safe driving position.

Microphone

Audio unit/Navigation system

The audio unit or navigation system is used for adjusting the volume.

6-104

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (331,1)

Interior Comfort

Bluetooth Hands-Free l l l l

Close the windows and/or the moonroof to shut out loud noises from outside the vehicle, or turn down the airflow of the climate control system while the Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used. Voice recognition may not function correctly or voice quality may l deteriorate under the following conditions.

A passenger is speaking.

Driving with the window and/or the moonroof open.

Driving on bumpy roads.

Noise outside of the vehicle is loud.

(Construction sites, inside tunnels, excess oncoming traffic, or heavy rain.) l l l l

Operation noise from turn signals, wipers, or the horn is heard.

A/C airflow is strong or wind is blowing on the microphone.

l

There is noise coming from cargo loaded inside of the vehicle.

Voice commands may not be recognized depending on the voice. If the voice commands are not recognized correctly, repeat the commands in a louder voice.

Dialects or different wording other than hands-free prompts cannot be recognized by voice recognition. Call out in the wording specified by the voice commands.

Please be aware that the voice recognition may error despite following the above points.

qFunction restrictions while using


Functions are limited as follows while the

Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used.

l

Beep sound and voice guidance related l l to the audio unit and navigation system are not heard.

Beep sound related to the A/C operation is not heard.

The VOICE switch of the navigation system located on the steering wheel cannot be used.

qHow to use this section

Descriptions in the text are as follows:

Say: Voice commands to be called out by you.

Prompt: Voice guidance output from the speaker.

A beep sound [Beep] is output from the speaker. Call out after the beep sound is heard.

Example)

Say: [Beep]

“Dial”

Prompt:

“Number, please”

Say: [Beep]

“XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.

“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”

6-105

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (332,1)

Interior Comfort


Basic Bluetooth Hands-

Free Operation qBluetooth Hands-Free preparation

Language setting

1. Press the phone button (Short press).

2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:

“Select one of the following:

Pairing options, confirmation prompts, select phone, language, or passcode, or say

“cancel” to return to the main menu.

”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Language”

5. Prompt:

“Select a language: English,

French, or Spanish.

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“French” (Call out the desired language:

“English”, “French” or

“Spanish”)

7. Prompt:

“French (Desired language) selected. Is this correct?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

9. Prompt:

“French (Desired language) selected, returning to main menu.

”

Mobile telephone programming

(Pairing)

To use a Bluetooth Hands-Free, the phone has to be programmed to the hands-free unit using the following procedure.

Up to seven Bluetooth equipped mobile telephones can be programmed to your vehicle.

NOTE l

A mobile telephone can be programmed only when the vehicle is parked.

l

Since the communication range of a

Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone is about 10 meters (32 ft), if a mobile telephone is placed within a 10-meter (32 ft) radius of the vehicle, it may be detected/ programmed unintentionally while another telephone is being programmed.

1. Activate the Bluetooth application of the mobile telephone.

NOTE

For the operation of the mobile telephone, refer to its instruction manual.


3. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

4. Prompt:

“Select one of the following:

Pairing options, confirmation prompts, select phone, language, or passcode, or say

“cancel” to return to the main menu.

”

5. Say: [Beep]

“Pairing options”

6. Prompt:

“Do you want to pair a phone, delete a phone, or list paired phones?

”

7. Say: [Beep]

“Pair a phone”

8. Prompt:

“Please say a 4-digit pairing code.

”

9. Say: [Beep]

“XXXX” (Call out an arbitrary 4-digit pairing code. This can be any combination of 4 numbers.)

NOTE

Record the code as it will be used to program your phone in Step 16.

10. Prompt:

“Pairing code XXXX (4digit number). Is this correct?

”

6-106

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (333,1)

Interior Comfort


11. Say: [Beep]

“Yes” or “No”

12. If

“Yes”, go to Step 13.

If

“No”, the procedure returns to Step

8.

13. Prompt:

“Start pairing procedure on phone. See phone's manual for instructions.

”

14. Using the mobile telephone, perform a search for the Bluetooth device

(Peripheral device).

NOTE

For the operation of the mobile telephone, refer to its instruction manual.

15. Select

“Mazda” from the device list searched by the mobile phone.

16. Input the 4-digit pairing code set in

Step 9 to the mobile telephone.

17. Prompt:

“Please say the name of the phone after the beep.

”

18. Say: [Beep]

“XXXX - - -” (Call out a

“phone tag”, an arbitrary name for the phone.)

Example:

“Stan's phone.”

NOTE

Call out a programmed

“phone tag” within 10 seconds.

If more than two mobile telephones are to be programmed, they cannot be programmed with the same or similar

“phone tag”.

19. Prompt:

“Adding XXXXXX - - -

(Ex.

“Mary's phone”) (Phone tag). Is this correct?

”

20. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

21. Prompt:

“Assign a priority for this phone between 1 and 7, where 1 is the phone used most often.

”

22. Say: [Beep]

“1” (Call out a number of the desired priority from 1 to 7.)

NOTE l

Normally,

“1” is to be input (Highest priority).

l

If more than two mobile telephones are registered, input the priority order from 1 to

7.

23. Prompt:

“XXXXXX - - - (Ex.

“Mary's phone”) (Phone tag) set to priority X (Priority number). Is this correct?

”

24. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

25. Prompt:

“Pairing complete”

After a mobile telephone is registered, the system automatically identifies the phone.

By pressing the phone button again, or by pressing the phone button first after turning the ignition switch from the

LOCK to the ACC position, the system reads out a voice guidance

“XXXXXX - -

- (Ex.

“Mary's phone”) (Phone tag) is connected

”. If two or more telephones are registered, the one with the highest priority is selected.

qMaking a call using a telephone number


2. Say: [Beep]

“Dial”

3. Prompt:

“Number, please”

4. Say: [Beep]

“XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.

“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”

5. Prompt:

“Dialing XXXXXXXXXXX

(Ex.

“555-1234”) (Telephone number) is this correct?

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes” or “No”.

6-107

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (334,1)

Interior Comfort


7. When

“Yes” is called out, the call is made.

When

“No” is called out, the procedure returns to Step 3.

qReceiving an incoming call

1. Prompt: Incoming call, press the phone button to answer.

2. To accept the call, press the phone button (Short press).

To reject the call, press the phone button (Long press).

qHanging up a call

Press the phone button during the call

(Long press).

Beep will confirm call is ended.

qVolume adjustment

Turn the power/volume dial of the audio unit or navigation system to adjust the volume.

Turn the power/volume dial to the right to increase volume, to the left to decrease it.

Audio unit Navigation system

qHelp function use

The help function informs the user of all the available voice commands under the current conditions.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Help”

3. Follow prompts to get the appropriate voice guidance.

NOTE

The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.

6-108

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (335,1)

Interior Comfort


Convenient Use of the

Hands-Free System qPhone book usage

Phone book registration

Phone numbers can be registered to the

Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Phone book”

3. Prompt:

“Select one of the following: new entry, edit, list names, delete or erase all..., or say

“cancel” to return to main menu.

”

4. Say: [Beep]

“New entry”

5. Prompt:

“Name please.”

6. Say: [Beep]

“XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's phone

”)” (Say a voice tag for the name registered.)

7. Prompt:

“Adding XXXXX... (Ex.

“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice tag). Is this correct?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

9. Prompt:

“Home, Work, Mobile, or

Pager?

”

10. Say: [Beep]

“Mobile” (Say “Home”,

“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Pager”, for the desired location to be registered.)

11. Prompt:

“Mobile” (Location to be registered). Is this correct?

12. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

13. Prompt:

“Number, please.”

14. Say: [Beep]

“XXXXXXXXXXX

(Ex.

“555-1234”)” (Say the phone number to be registered.)

15. Prompt:

“XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.

“555-1234”) (Phone number registration). Is this correct?

”

16. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

17. Prompt:

“Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?

”

18. Say: [Beep]

“Yes” or “No”.

19. If

“Yes”, an additional phone number registration can be made for the same entry.

If

“No”, the procedure proceeds to

Step 20.

20. Prompt:

“Returning to main menu.”

Making calls using the phone book

Telephone calls can be made by saying the name of a person (voice tag) whose phone number has been registered in the

Bluetooth Hands-Free system in advance.

For the phone book setting method, refer

to (page 6-111).


2. Say: [Beep]

“Call”

3. Prompt:

“Name please.”

4. Say: [Beep]

“XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone

”)” (Say a voice tag registered in the phone book.)

5. Prompt:

“Calling XXXXX... (Ex.

“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at home

”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and phone number location registered in phone book).

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

7. Prompt:

“Dialing”

6-109

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (336,1)

Interior Comfort


qRedialing function

Redialing the number of the person previously dialed is possible.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Redial”

3. Prompt:

“Dialing”

qEmergency calls

A call can be made to the emergency phone number (911) using the voice input command.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Emergency”

3. Prompt:

“Calling “911”, is this correct?

”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

5. Prompt:

“Dialing”

qRefusing an incoming call

For incoming call refusal, refer to

“Receiving an incoming call” (page

6-108).

qMute

The microphone can be muted during a call.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Mute”

3. Prompt:

“Microphone muted”

Canceling mute


2. Say: [Beep]

“Mute off”

3. Prompt:

“Microphone unmuted”

6-110

qTransferring a call

Transferring a call from the Hands-

Free system to a mobile phone

Communication between the hands-free unit and a mobile phone is canceled, and the line can be switched to a standard call using a mobile phone.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Transfer call”

3. Prompt:

“Transferred call to phone”

Transferring a call from a mobile phone to the Hands-Free system

Communication between mobile phones can be switched to the Bluetooth Hands-

Free system.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Transfer call”

3. Prompt:

“Transferred call to Hands

Free system

”

Call waiting

A call can be interrupted to receive and incoming call from a third party.

Call interrupt

A call can be switched to a new incoming call.

l

Press the phone button (Short press).

NOTE l

To refuse an incoming call, press the phone button (Long press).

l

After receiving a new incoming call, the previous call is placed on hold.

Switching calls

Switching back to the previous call can also be done.

l

Press the phone button (Short press).

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (337,1)

Ending the current call l

Press the phone button during the call

(Long press).

qVoice guidance interrupt operation

Voice guidance can be stopped by pressing the phone button (Short press) while it is being heard. A new voice input command can then be called out by the user.

· Press the phone button (Short press).

qPhone book settings

Editing phone book

The data registered to the Bluetooth

Hands-Free phone book can be edited.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Phone book”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Edit”

5. Prompt:

“Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say

“List names”..., or say “cancel” to return to main menu.

”

6. Say: [Beep]


”)” (Say the voice tag for the registered name to be edited in the phone book.)

7. Prompt:

“Home, Work, Mobile, or

Pager?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Home” (Say the registered location to be edited:

“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or

“Pager”).

Interior Comfort


9. Prompt:


”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX

(Ex.

“home”) (Registered location). Is this correct?

”

10. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

11. Prompt:

“The current number is

XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.

“555-1234”)

(Currently registered number). New number, please.

”

NOTE

If there was no previous phone number registered to a location (Ex.

“Work”), the prompt will only read out

“Number, please”.

12. Say: [Beep]

“XXXXXXXXXXX

(Ex.

“555-1234”)” (Say the new phone number to be registered.)

13. Prompt:

“XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.

“555-1234”) (The new phone number to be registered). Is this correct?

”

14. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

15. Prompt:

“Number changed. Would you like to call this number, edit another entry..., or say


”

Phone book data deletion

Erasing individual phone book data

Individual data registered to the Bluetooth

Hands-Free phone book can be cleared.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Phone book”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Delete”

6-111

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (338,1)

Interior Comfort


5. Prompt:

“Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say

“List names”..., or say “cancel” to return to main menu.

”

6. Say: [Beep]


”)” (Say the registered voice tag to be deleted from the phone book.)

7. Prompt:

“Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.

“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)

Home (Registered location). Is this correct?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

9. Prompt:


”) (Registered voice tag) Home

(Registered location) deleted, returning to main menu.

”

Complete deletion of the phone book data

All data registered to the Bluetooth

Hands-Free phone book can be erased.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Phone book”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Erase all”

5. Prompt:

“Are you sure you want to erase everything from your Hands Free system phone book?

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

7. Prompt:

“You are about to delete everything from your Hands Free system phone book. Do you want to continue?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

6-112

9. Prompt:

“Please wait, erasing the

Hands Free system phone book.

”

10. Prompt:

“Hands-Free system phone book erased, returning to main menu.

”

Read-out of names registered to the

Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book

The Bluetooth Hands-Free system can read out the list of names registered to its phone book.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Phone book”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“List names”

5. Prompt:

“XXXXX..., XXXXX...,

XXXXX... (Ex.

“John's phone”, Mary's phone, Bill's phone)

” (Voice guidance reads out the voice tags registered to the phone book.)

Press the phone button during the read-out at the desired name, and then say one of the following voice commands to execute it.

l l l l

“Continue”: Continues the voice guidance.

“Call”: Calls the registered phone number.

“Edit”: Edits the registered phone number.

“Delete”: Deletes the registered phone l l number.

“Previous”: Returns to the previous phone number.

“Cancel”: Returns to main menu.

6. Prompt:

“End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?

”

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



7. Say: [Beep]

“No”

8. Prompt:


Black plate (339,1)

Interior Comfort


Hands-Free Telephone Setting qMobile phone

Mobile phone registration

For the registration of a Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone to the

Bluetooth Hands-Free system, refer to

“Bluetooth Hands-Free preparation” (page

6-106).

Registered mobile phone read-out

The Bluetooth Hands-Free system can read-out the mobile phones registered to its system.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:

“Select one of the following: pairing options, confirmation prompts, select phone, language, or passcode..., or say


”

4. Say: [Beep]


5. Prompt:


”

6. Say: [Beep]

“List phones”

7. Prompt:

“XXXXX..., XXXXX...,

XXXXX... (Ex. Phone A, phone B, phone C)

” (The voice guidance reads out the phone tags registered to the phone book.)

Press the phone button during the read-out at the desired phone, and then say one of the following voice commands to execute it.

l

“Select”: Registers the mobile phone when the phone button was pressed.

6-113

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (340,1)

Interior Comfort

Bluetooth Hands-Free l l l

“Continue”: Continues the voice guidance.

“Delete”: Deletes the registered mobile phone.

“Previous”: Returns to the previous mobile phone.

8. Prompt:

“End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?

”

9. Say: [Beep]

“No”

10. Prompt:


Mobile phone selection

This function is for switching to a different mobile phone which has been registered beforehand. The selected mobile phone will remain in effect until the ignition switch is turned off.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Select phone”

5. Prompt:

“Please say 1 (priority 1) for

XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority

2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“2” (Say the priority number for the mobile phone to be used as first priority.)

7. Prompt:

“XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)

(Registered phone tag) selected, is this correct?

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

9. Prompt:

“XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)

(Phone tag) will temporarily override phone priorities, returning to main menu.

”

Registered mobile phone deletion

Registered mobile phones can be deleted individually or collectively.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]


5. Prompt:


”

NOTE

A registered mobile phone can be deleted using the registration list.

6. Say: [Beep]

“Delete phone”

7. Prompt:

“Please say 1 (priority 1) for

XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority

2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)

”

(The voice guidance reads out each phone in the order of priority and the phone tag).

8. Say: [Beep]

“2” (Say the order of priority of the mobile phone to be deleted.)

NOTE

Say

“All” to delete all mobile phones.

9. Prompt:

“Removing XXXXX... (Ex.

phone B...) (Registered phone tag). Is this correct?

”

6-114

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (341,1)

10. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

11. Prompt:

“Deleted”

qLanguage setting

English, Spanish, and Canadian French are available. If the language setting is changed, all of the voice guidance and voice input commands are done in the selected language.

Method 1

Refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free

preparation on page 6-106.

Method 2


2. Say: [Beep]

“French” (Say the desired language:

“English”, “French”, or

“Spanish”.)

3. Prompt:

“Would you like to change the language to French (Desired language) ?

”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

5. Prompt:

“Please wait. Switching to

French phone book. French selected, returning to main menu.

”

qSecurity setting

If a passcode is set, the system cannot be activated unless the passcode is input.

Passcode setting


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:



”

Interior Comfort


4. Say: [Beep]

“Passcode”

5. Prompt:

“Passcode is disabled. Would you like to enable it?

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

7. Prompt:

“Please say a 4-digit passcode.

Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system.

”

8. Say: [Beep]

“XXXX” (Say a desired 4digit passcode,

“PCode”.)

9. Prompt:

“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,

PCode). Is this correct?

”

10. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

11. Prompt:

“Passcode is enabled, returning to main menu.

”

Using the Bluetooth Hands-Free system with a passcode


2. Prompt:

“Hands-Free system is locked.

State the passcode to continue.

”

3. Say: [Beep]

“XXXX” (Say the set passcode

“PCode”.)

4. If the correct passcode is input, voice guidance

“XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's phone) (Phone tag) is connected

” is announced.

If the passcode is incorrect, voice guidance

“XXXX (4-digit passcode,

Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try again

” is announced.

Canceling the passcode


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

6-115

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (342,1)

Interior Comfort


3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Passcode”

5. Prompt:

“Passcode is enabled. Would you like to disable it?

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

7. Prompt:

“Passcode is disabled, returning to main menu.

”

Confirmation Prompts

The confirmation prompt confirms the command content to the user before advancing to the operation requested by the user. When this function is turned on, the system reads out the voice input command previously received and confirms whether the command is correct before advancing to the command execution.

When the confirmation prompt function is turned on:

(Ex.

“Calling John's phone. Is this correct?

”)

When the confirmation prompt function is turned off:

(Ex.

“Calling John's phone.”)

NOTE

If the confirmation prompt function is turned off when making an emergency call, the system reads out and confirms the command before executing it.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Setup”

3. Prompt:



”

4. Say: [Beep]

“Confirmation prompts”

5. Prompt:

“Confirmation prompts are on/off. Would you like to turn confirmation prompts off/on?

”

6. Say: [Beep]

“Yes”

7. Prompt:

“Confirmation prompts are off/on, returning to main menu.

”

qVoice recognition learning function (Speaker enrollment)

The voice recognition learning function enables voice recognition appropriate to the characteristics of the user's voice.

If the recognition of the voice input commands to the system is not adequate, this function can largely improve the system's voice recognition of the user. If your voice can be recognized sufficiently without using this function, you may not realize the added benefit of the function, as high-level voice recognition can be achieved by using this function.

To register your voice, the voice input command list must be read out. Read out the list when the vehicle is parked.

Perform the registration in as quite a place

as possible (page 6-104).

The registration must be performed completely. The required time is about 10 to 15 minutes. The user needs to be seated in the driver's seat with the voice input command list for voice recognition learning open to the page indicated below.


2. Say: [Beep]

“Voice training”

6-116

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (343,1)

Interior Comfort


3. Prompt:

“This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the phone button when you are ready to begin.

Press and hold the phone button to cancel at any time.

”


5. The voice guidance reads out the voice input command (refer to the voice input command list for voice recognition learning). (Ex.

“Please read phrase 1

”)

6. Say: [Beep]

“#790” (Say the voice input command for voice recognition learning (1 to 45) according to the voice guidance.)

7. Prompt:

“Speaker enrollment is complete, returning to main menu.

”

Voice input command list for voice recognition learning

When reading out, the following points must be observed: l

Read out the numbers one at a time correctly and naturally.

(For example,

“1234” must be read out

“one, two, three, four”, not “twelve, thirty four

”.) l l l

“#” Must be read out “Pound”.

“ ” Must be read out “Star”.

Do not read out parentheses.

“ (” and hyphens

“-” are used for separating

Ex.

numbers in a phone number.

“ (888) 555-1212” must be called out

“Eight, eight, eight, five, five, five, one, two, one, two.

”

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Explanation

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

6

7

4

5

8

15

16

17

18

19

English

#790

671

212-4903

235-3494

315-5657

456-7930

793-5462

794-1826

826-3145

962-7305

(531) 742-9860

(632) 807-4591

(800) 222-5015

(888) 555-1212

0123456789

55 66 77 88 99

44 33 22 11 00

Call 293-5804

Call 350

Call 1 (234) 567-8901

Dial 639-1542

Dial #780

Dial (987) 654-3210

1058# 3794# Send

27643# 4321# Send

Cancel

Continue

Emergency

Erase All

Help

Home, Work, Mobile, Pager

List Names

No

Phonebook: Delete

Phonebook: New Entry

Previous

Phonebook: Erase All

Redial

6-117

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (344,1)

Interior Comfort


Explanation

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

English

Retrain

Setup Confirmation Prompts

Setup Language

Setup Pairing Options

Pair A Phone

Transfer Call

Yes

NOTE

After user voice registration is completed, voice guidance

“Speaker enrollment is complete, returning to main menu

” is announced.

qDTMF (dial tone multi-frequency signal) transmission

This function is used when transmitting

DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver of a DTMF transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company's automated guidance call center

(When you send tone signals back according to the voice guidance recording).


2. Say: [Beep]

“Send XXXX...” (Say

DTMF code)

3. Prompt:

“Sending XXXX... (DTMF code)

”

When the Bluetooth

Hands-Free cannot be used

The Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used under the following conditions: l

Outside of the communication area.

l l

Mobile telephone has a malfunction.

Mobile telephone is not connected to the hands-free unit equipped on the vehicle.

l l l

The mobile telephone battery is weak.

The mobile telephone is turned off.

The mobile telephone is placed where radio reception is difficult.

6-118

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Safety Certification

FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC:279B-

MBLUEC07

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The term

“IC: ” before the radio certification number only signifies that

Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.

Black plate (345,1)

Interior Comfort


6-119

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (346,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Sunvisors

When you need a sunvisor, lower it for use in front or swing it to the side.

Sunvisor

qVanity Mirrors

To use the vanity mirror, lower the sunvisor.

The vanity mirror light will illuminate when you open the cover.

qSide Extention Sunvisors

The visor extender extends the sunvisor's range of sun shading.

To use, pull it out.

CAUTION

When moving the sunvisor, reinsert the visor extender, otherwise the visor extender could hit the rearview mirror.

6-120

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (347,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Interior Lights qIlluminated Entry System

When the illuminated entry system operates, the overhead light (switch is in the DOOR position) and the courtesy lights turn on for: l

About 30 seconds after the driver's door is unlocked and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position (with the ignition key removed).

l

About 15 seconds after all doors are closed (If your vehicle is equipped with the advanced key, the overhead light turns on for about 5 seconds when the l advanced key is outside of the vehicle).

About 15 seconds after the ignition switch is in the LOCK position (with the ignition key removed) with all doors closed.

The light also turns off when: l l

The ignition switch is turned to the ON position and all doors are closed.

The driver's door is locked.

NOTE

Battery saver

If any door is left opened, the light goes out after about 30 minutes to save the battery.

The light turns on again when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or when any door is opened after all doors have been closed.

qOverhead Lights

When the center/rear overhead light switch is in the DOOR position, the center/rear overhead light can be turned on or off using the front overhead light switch.

Front

Switch

Position

Overhead Lights l l l l l l

Light off

All overhead lights are off when the center/rear overhead light switch is in the DOOR position

Light is on when any door is open

Light is on or off when the illuminated entry system is on

Light on

All overhead lights are on when the center/rear overhead light switch is in the DOOR position

6-121

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Center/Rear

Black plate (348,1)

qLuggage Compartment Light

Switch

Position

Overhead Lights

Light off

Light on or off in accordance with the operation of front overhead light switch

Light on

qMap Lights

The map lights are switched on or off by pressing the switches.

Switch

Position

Luggage Compartment Light

Light off

Light on when the liftgate is open

qCourtesy Lights

Turns on when any door is open or the illuminated entry system is on.

Courtesy Light

6-122

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Information Display

Black plate (349,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Climate control display

(Driver)

Clock Audio display

Climate control display (Front passenger)/ Ambient temperature display

Without navigation system

qInformation Display Functions

The information display has the following functions: l

Clock l

Ambient Temperature Display (Outside Temperature Display) l l

Climate Control Display

Audio Display

6-123

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (350,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

qClock

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the time is displayed.

Without navigation system

Time setting

1. Press the CLK switch until a beep sounds, and

“12Hr” and “24Hr” will be displayed.

2. Press the SET switch to switch between

“12Hr” and “24Hr” displays. The selected display will flash.

To select the desired clock setting, press the CLK switch again while the preferred setting is flashing.

3.

“Hr. ADJUST” will be displayed next, and the hour portion of the display will flash. Press the SET switch to set the hour, then press the CLK switch.

4.

“Min. ADJUST” will be displayed next, and the minutes portion of the display will flash. Press the SET switch to set the minutes, then press the CLK switch.

Time resetting

While the clock is displayed, press the

SET switch 1.5 seconds or more. When the switch is released, a beep will sound and the clock will be reset as follows:

(Example)

12:01

―12:29→12:00

12:30

―12:59→1:00

NOTE

When the SET switch is released, the seconds are reset to

“00”.

With navigation system

Refer to the separate manual


NOTE

Minutes and seconds are adjusted by the GPS, however, it is necessary to adjust hours under the following conditions: l

Driving across different time zones l

Daylight saving time start and end

qAmbient Temperature Display

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, press the OUTSIDE switch

(page 6-6) to display the ambient

temperature.

6-124

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (351,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

NOTE l

Under the following conditions, the ambient temperature display may differ from the l l l l actual ambient temperature depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions:

Significantly cold or hot temperatures.

Sudden changes in ambient temperature.

l l

The vehicle is parked.

The vehicle is driven at low speeds.

Press the OUTSIDE switch a few seconds or more to switch the display from

Fahrenheit to Centigrade or vice versa.

Press the OUTSIDE switch again to switch the display from ambient temperature to the temperature set for the air conditioner.

qClimate Control Display

The climate control system status is displayed. To operate the climate control system, refer to

“Climate Control System”

(page 6-2).

qAudio Display

The audio system status is displayed. To operate the audio system, refer to

“Audio System” (page 6-17).

Cup Holder

WARNING

Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving:

Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. If the contents spill, you could be scalded.

Do not put anything other than cups or drink cans in cup holders:

Putting objects other than cups or drink cans in a cup holder is dangerous.

During sudden braking or maneuvering, occupants could be hit and injured, or objects could be thrown around the vehicle, causing interference with the driver and the possibility of an accident. Only use a cup holder for cups or drink cans.

CAUTION

To reduce the possibility of injury in an accident or a sudden stop, keep cup holders closed when not in use.

6-125

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

qFront

To use the cup holder, push the release button.

Right-side

Black plate (352,1)

qRear

Second-row seat

Cup holders are located in the armrest.

Left-side

í

Third-row seat

Cup holders are located in the third-row seat side trims.

6-126

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (353,1)

Bottle Holder

Bottle holders are on the inside of the doors.

Bottle holder

CAUTION

Do not use the bottle holders for containers without caps. The contents may spill when the door is opened or closed.

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Storage Compartments

WARNING

Keep storage boxes closed when driving:

Driving with the storage boxes open is dangerous. To reduce the possibility of injury in an accident or a sudden stop, keep the storage boxes closed when driving.

CAUTION

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the storage boxes while parked under the sun. A lighter could explode or the plastic material in eyeglasses could deform and crack from high temperature.

qOverhead Console

This console box is designed to store accessories.

Push and release to open.

6-127

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (354,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

qCoin Box

To open, press the release catch down and pull the lid downward.

qCenter Console

To open, push the button.

qGlove Box

To open the glove box, pull the latch toward you.

Insert the key (auxiliary key

*

) and turn it clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to unlock.

* Advanced key equipped vehicle

qArmrest Box

í

To open, pull the release catch.

Unlock

Lock

qCargo Securing Loops

WARNING



6-128

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (355,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Use the loops in the luggage compartment to secure cargo with a rope or net. The tensile strength of the loops is 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force to the loops as it will damage them.

2. Secure the trunk board using the straps on the third-row seatbacks.

qCargo Sub-Compartment

Center cargo sub-compartment

1. Lift the trunk board.

Side cargo sub-compartment

Pull the compartment's strap to open the cover.

Some models.

qShopping Bag Hook

The shopping bag hook can be used for hanging shopping bags.

CAUTION

Do not hang excessive weight on the shopping bag hook as it could be damaged.

6-129

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Black plate (356,1)

2. Put the other golf bag on top of the first bag with its top pointing to the right.

Shopping bag hook

(tensile strength:3 kg

(6.6 lb))

qLuggage Compartment

Golf bags can be carried in the luggage compartment.

To carry two golf bags, use the following procedure:

1. Put one golf bag in the luggage compartment with its top pointing to the left.

NOTE l

Some golf bags cannot fit depending on their size.

l

Golf bags up to nine inches in diameter can be carried.

6-130

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (357,1)

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Accessory Sockets

Only use genuine Mazda accessories or the equivalent requiring no greater than

120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).

Front

The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

Rear

Center/Rear

The accessory sockets can be used regardless of the position of the ignition switch.

Center

CAUTION

To prevent accessory socket damage or electrical failure, pay attention to the following:

Ø Do not use accessories that require more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).

Ø Do not use accessories that are not genuine Mazda accessories or the equivalent.

Ø Close the cover when the accessory socket is not in use to prevent foreign objects and liquids from getting into the accessory socket.

Ø Correctly insert the plug into the accessory socket.

NOTE

To prevent discharging of the battery, do not use the socket for long periods with the engine off or idling.

6-131

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Power Outlet

í

The power outlet is positioned as shown in the figure.

Black plate (358,1)

For more details, refer to

“Auxiliary terminals and power outlet”

(page 6-88).

6-132

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (359,1)

7


Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.

Parking in an Emergency ............................................................. 7-2

Parking in an Emergency .......................................................... 7-2

Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3

Spare Tire and Tool Storage ...................................................... 7-3

Changing a Flat Tire ................................................................. 7-8

Overheating ................................................................................. 7-14

Overheating ............................................................................. 7-14

Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-16

Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-16

Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-17

Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-19

Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-20

Towing Description ................................................................. 7-20

Tiedown Hooks ....................................................................... 7-21

Recreational Towing ............................................................... 7-23

7-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Parking in an Emergency

Parking in an Emergency

The hazard warning lights should always be used when you stop on or near a roadway in an emergency.

The hazard warning lights warn other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard and that they must take extreme caution when near it.

Black plate (360,1)

Depress the hazard warning flasher and all the turn signals will flash.

NOTE l

The turn signals do not work when the hazard warning lights are on.

l

Check local regulations about the use of hazard warning lights while the vehicle is being towed to verify that it is not in violation of the law.

7-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (361,1)


Flat Tire

Spare Tire and Tool Storage

Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.

Spare tire carrier bolt socket

Flat tire belt

Tiedown eyelet

Jack lever

Jack

Lug wrench

7-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (362,1)


Flat Tire

qJack

To remove the jack

1. Open the cargo sub-compartment.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Turn the wing bolt counterclockwise.

Wing bolt

qSpare Tire

Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.

The temporary spare tire is lighter and smaller than a conventional tire, and is designed only for emergency use and should be used only for VERY short periods. Temporary spare tires should

NEVER be used for long drives or extended periods.

WARNING

Do not install the temporary spare tire in place of a driving wheel:

Driving with the temporary spare tire on one of the driving wheels is dangerous. Especially on ice or snow.

Handling will be affected. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Move a regular tire to a driving wheel and install the temporary spare tire to the nondriving wheel.

Jack

To secure the jack

Perform the removal procedure in reverse.

7-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (363,1)


Flat Tire

CAUTION

Ø When using the temporary spare tire, driving stability may decrease compared to when using only the conventional tire. Drive carefully.

Ø To avoid damage to the temporary spare tire or to the vehicle, observe the following precautions:

Ø

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50

Ø mph).

Avoid driving over obstacles.

Also, do not drive through an

Ø automatic car wash. This tire's diameter is smaller than a conventional tire, so the ground clearance is reduced about

25 mm (1 in).

Do not use a tire chain on this tire because it will not fit

Ø

Ø properly.

Do not use your temporary spare tire on any other vehicle; it has been designed only for your Mazda.

Use only one temporary spare tire on your vehicle at the same time.

NOTE

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the temporary spare tire. The warning light will flash continuously while the temporary spare

tire is being used (page 5-29).

To remove the spare tire

1. Have everyone get out of the vehicle and away from the vehicle and traffic.



Cover

4. Attach the socket to the spare tire carrier bolt, the jack lever to the socket, and the lug wrench to the opposite end of the jack lever.

Lug wrench

Jack lever

Socket

Bolt

7-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (364,1)


Flat Tire

5. Slowly turn the lug wrench counterclockwise until the spare tire reaches the ground and the cable becomes loose.

NOTE

A flat tire which has been removed from the vehicle for repair cannot be carried in the spare tire carrier. Secure the flat tire with the flat tire belt in the cargo sub-compartment

(page 7-11).

7. If the temporary spare tire is not reinstalled in the spare tire carrier, tighten the spare tire carrier bolt completely to wind up the spare tire carrier cable.

Spare tire

CAUTION

Do not loosen the cable too much as this may cause damage to the spare tire carrier.

6. Rotate the small lever on top of the retaining plate and pull the retaining plate out from the center hole of the tire.

WARNING

Always tighten the spare tire carrier bolt completely tight and make sure the spare tire is locked in the highest position:

A loose spare tire carrier bolt is dangerous. The cable could be cut causing the spare tire to fall off. This could result in someone being seriously injured or even killed. Use a lug wrench to tighten the carrier bolt and make sure to tighten it until a click sound is heard.

7-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (365,1)


Flat Tire

To secure the spare tire

1. Place the tire with the outer side facing upward, rotate the small lever on top of the retaining plate and slide the retaining plate through the center hole of the tire.

Rotate the small lever into place.

Lever

NOTE

Secure the spare tire as shown below.

Spare tire

2. Raise the spare tire slowly in reverse order of removal.

WARNING

Place the specialized temporary spare tire in the spare tire carrier correctly:

Placing the specialized temporary spare tire in the spare tire carrier wrong side up or using any tire other than the small temporary spare tire designed for use with this vehicle is dangerous. It will result in poor attachment and insufficient ground clearance in the spare tire carrier and the danger of the tire falling off. This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.

Always tighten the spare tire carrier bolt completely tight and make sure the spare tire is locked in the highest position:

A loose spare tire carrier bolt is dangerous. The cable could be cut causing the spare tire to fall off. This could result in someone being seriously injured or even killed. Use a lug wrench to tighten the carrier bolt and make sure to tighten it until a click sound is heard.

CAUTION

If you hear rattling from the spare tire carrier while the vehicle is moving, the spare tire carrier cable may be cut.

Have it repaired at an Authorized


7-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (366,1)


Flat Tire

Changing a Flat Tire

NOTE

If the following occurs while driving, it could indicate a flat tire.

l

Steering becomes difficult.

l

The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.

l

The vehicle pulls in one direction.

If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a level spot that is well off the road and out of the way of traffic to change the tire.

Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a busy road is dangerous.

WARNING

Be sure to follow the directions for changing a tire, and never get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack:

Changing a tire is dangerous if not done properly. The vehicle can slip off the jack and seriously injure someone.

Never allow anyone inside a vehicle supported by a jack:

Allowing someone to remain in a vehicle supported by a jack is dangerous. The occupant could cause the vehicle to fall resulting in serious injury.

CAUTION

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring

System)

The wheels equipped on your Mazda are specially designed for installation of the tire pressure sensors. Do not use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it may not be possible to install the tire pressure sensors.

NOTE l

Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using it.

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System) l

Be sure to register the tire pressure sensor

ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are

changed (page 5-31).

1. Park on a level surface off the right-ofway and firmly set the parking brake.

2. Shift into Park (P) and turn off the engine.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle and away from the vehicle and traffic.

5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire

(page 7-3).

6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. When blocking a wheel, place a tire block both in front and behind the tire.

NOTE

When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in place.

7-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (367,1)


Flat Tire

qRemoving a Flat Tire

1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn each, but don't remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off the ground.

2. Place the jack under the jacking position closest to the tire being changed.

Jacking position Jacking position

WARNING

Use only the front and rear jacking positions recommended in this manual:

Attempting to jack the vehicle in positions other than those recommended in this manual is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and seriously injure or even kill someone. Use only the front and rear jacking positions recommended in this manual.

Use only the jack provided with your

Mazda:

Using a jack that is not designed for your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and seriously injure someone.

Never place objects under the jack:

Jacking the vehicle with an object under the jack is dangerous. The jack could slip and someone could be seriously injured by the jack or the falling vehicle.

3. Insert the jack lever and attach the lug wrench to tire jack.

7-9

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (368,1)


Flat Tire

4. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and raise the vehicle high enough so that the spare tire can be installed. Before removing the lug nuts, make sure your

Mazda is firmly in position and that it cannot slip or move.

qLocking Lug Nuts

í

If your vehicle has optional antitheft wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will lock the tires and you must use a special key to unlock them. This key is attached to the lug wrench and is stored with the spare tire. Register them with the lock manufacturer by filling out the card provided in the glove box and mailing it in the accompanying envelope. If you lose this key, consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's order form, which is with the registration card.

Antitheft lug nut Special key

5. Remove the lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise; then remove the wheel and center cap.

To remove an antitheft lug nut

1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.

2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be sure to hold the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Don't use a power impact wrench.

3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key and apply pressure. Turn the wrench counterclockwise.

7-10

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (369,1)


Flat Tire

To install the nut

1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be sure to hold the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Don't use a power impact wrench.

2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key, apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.

qMounting the Spare Tire

1. Remove dirt and grime from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub, including the hub bolts, with a cloth.

3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled edge inward; tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Make sure the mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean before changing or replacing tires:

When changing or replacing a tire, not removing dirt and grime from the mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts could loosen while driving and cause the tire to come off, resulting in an accident.

2. Mount the spare tire.

WARNING

Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts and bolts and do not tighten the lug nuts beyond the recommended tightening torque:

Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts could loosen while driving and cause the tire to come off, resulting in an accident. In addition, lug nuts and bolts could be damaged if tightened more than necessary.

4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise and lower the vehicle. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts in the order shown.

7-11

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (370,1)


Flat Tire

If you are unsure of how tight the nuts should be, have them inspected at an


Nut tightening torque

N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)

108

―147

(11

―14, 80―108)

WARNING

Always securely and correctly tighten the lug nuts:

Improperly or loosely tightened lug nuts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident.

Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you removed or replace them with metric nuts of the same configuration:

Because the wheel studs and lug nuts on your Mazda have metric threads, using a non-metric nut is dangerous.

On a metric stud, it would not secure the wheel and would damage the stud, which could cause the wheel to slip off and cause an accident.



8. Return the third-row seatback to its original position.

Refer to Fold the Third-Row Seat on

page 2-17.

9. Remove the tire blocks and store the tools and jack.

10. Place the flat tire in the cargo subcompartment.

11. Thread the belt through the wheel as shown in the figure, then attach the belt clips to the hook.

7. Remove the belt for securing the flat tire.

7-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



12. Pull the belt end to secure the flat tire.

Black plate (371,1)


Flat Tire

NOTE

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the temporary spare tire. The warning light will flash continuously while the temporary spare

tire is being used (page 5-29).

NOTE

To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store them properly.

13. Check the tire inflation pressure.

Refer to the specification charts on

page 10-6.

14. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

WARNING

Do not drive with any tires that have incorrect air pressure:

Driving on tires with incorrect air pressure is dangerous. Tires with incorrect pressure could affect handling and result in an accident.

When you check the regular tires' air pressure, check the spare tire, too.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

7-13



Black plate (372,1)


Overheating

Overheating

If the temperature gauge indicates overheating, the vehicle loses power, or you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is probably too hot.

WARNING

Turn off the ignition switch and make sure the fan is not running before attempting to work near the cooling fan:

Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.

Do not remove either cooling system caps when the engine and radiator are hot:

When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause serious injury.

Open the hood ONLY after steam is no longer escaping from the engine:

Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The escaping steam could seriously burn you.

If the temperature gauge indicates overheating:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.

2. Shift into park (P).

7-14

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Turn off the air conditioner.

5. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or from the engine compartment.

If steam is coming from the engine compartment:

Don't go near the front of the vehicle.

Stop the engine.

Wait until the steam dissipates, then open the hood and start the engine.

If neither coolant nor steam is escaping:

Open the hood and idle the engine until it cools.

CAUTION

If the cooling fan does not operate while the engine is running, the engine temperature will increase.

Stop the engine and call an


6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating, then turn off the engine after the temperature has decreased.

7. When cool, check the coolant level.

If it's low, look for coolant leaks from the radiator and hoses.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking:

Stop the engine and call an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

Black plate (373,1)


Overheating

If you find no problems, the engine is cool, and no leaks are obvious:

Carefully add coolant as required (page

8-21).

CAUTION

If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged unless repairs are made. Consult an


7-15

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Emergency Starting

Starting a Flooded Engine

If the engine fails to start, it may be flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).

Follow this procedure:

1. If the engine does not start within 5 seconds on the first try, turn the key to the LOCK position, wait 10 seconds and try again.

2. Depress the accelerator all the way and hold it there.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and hold it there

―for up to 10 seconds. If the engine starts, release the key and accelerator immediately because the engine will suddenly rev up.

4. If the engine fails to start, crank it without depressing the accelerator

―for up to 10 seconds.

If the engine still does not start using the above procedure, have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

Black plate (374,1)

7-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (375,1)


Emergency Starting

Jump-Starting

Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service technician do the work.

WARNING

Follow These Precautions Carefully:

To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.

Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:

Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.

Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:

Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.

Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.

Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:

Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.

Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that could cause sparks:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery.

7-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (376,1)


Emergency Starting

Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.

Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:

Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may rupture or explode, causing serious injury.

Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:

Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the discharged battery is dangerous.

A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.

Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:

Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.

The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in series or a 24 V motor generator set).

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order

Discharged battery

Jumper cables

Booster battery

7-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (377,1)


Emergency Starting

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V and that its negative terminal is grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, don't allow both vehicles to touch. Turn off the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and all unnecessary electrical loads in both vehicles.

3. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence as in the illustration.

l l l l

Connect one end of a cable to the positive terminal on the discharged battery (1).

Attach the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2).

Connect one end of the other cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3).

Connect the other end to the ground point indicated in the illustration away from the discharged battery

(4).

4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then start the engine of the other vehicle.

5. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in the reverse order described in the illustration.

Push-Starting

Do not push-start your Mazda.

NOTE

You can't start a vehicle with an automatic transaxle by pushing it.

7-19

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (378,1)


Emergency Towing

Towing Description

We recommend that towing be done only by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Particularly when towing a AWD vehicle, where all the wheels are connected to the drive train, proper transporting of the vehicle is absolutely essential to avoid damaging the drive system. Government and local laws must be followed.

CAUTION

Don't tow the vehicle pointed backward with driving wheels on the ground. This may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

Wheel dollies

CAUTION

Don't tow with sling-type equipment.

This could damage your vehicle. Use wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.

A towed 2WD vehicle should have its drive wheels (front wheels) off the ground. If excessive damage or other conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.

When towing a 2WD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground, release the parking brake.

A towed AWD vehicle must have all its wheels off the ground.

7-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (379,1)


Emergency Towing

WARNING

Always tow a AWD vehicle with all four wheels off the ground:

Towing a AWD vehicle with either the front or rear wheels on the ground is dangerous as the drive train could be damaged, or the vehicle could trail away from the tow truck and cause an accident. If the drive train has been damaged, transport the vehicle on a flat bed truck.

Tiedown Hooks

CAUTION

Don't use the tiedown hooks under the front and rear for towing.

They are designed ONLY for tying down the vehicle when it's being transported. Using them for towing will damage the bumper.

qTiedown Hooks

1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug

wrench from the trunk (page 7-3).

2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the bumper and open the cap located on the front and rear bumper.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

7-21



Black plate (380,1)


Emergency Towing

CAUTION

The cap cannot be completely removed. Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cap or scratch the painted bumper surface.

3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet using the lug wrench.

4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown eyelet.

Lug wrench

Lug wrench

CAUTION

If the tiedown eyelet is not securely tightened, it may loosen or disengage from the bumper when tying down the vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown eyelet is securely tightened to the bumper.

7-22

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Recreational Towing

An example of

“recreational towing” is towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.

The transaxle is not designed for towing this vehicle on all 4 wheels.

When doing recreational towing refer to

“Towing Description” (page 7-20) and

“Tiedown Hooks” (page 7-21) and

carefully follow the instructions.

Black plate (381,1)


Emergency Towing

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

7-23



Black plate (382,1)

7-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (383,1)

8


How to keep your Mazda in top condition.

Introduction .................................................................................. 8-2

Introduction ............................................................................... 8-2

Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 8-3

Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico) ....... 8-3

Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) ............................................. 8-9

Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 8-16

Owner Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 8-16

Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 8-17

Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 8-18

Engine Oil ............................................................................... 8-19

Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 8-21

Brake Fluid ............................................................................. 8-23

Power Steering Fluid ............................................................... 8-24

Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) ........................................... 8-24

Washer Fluid ........................................................................... 8-26

Body Lubrication .................................................................... 8-27

Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-27

Battery ..................................................................................... 8-31

Tires ........................................................................................ 8-33

Light Bulbs ............................................................................. 8-37

Fuses ....................................................................................... 8-44

Appearance Care ........................................................................ 8-52

How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage .................... 8-52

Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-54

Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-57

8-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (384,1)


Introduction

Introduction

Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.

If you're unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.

Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your

Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.

For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as prescribed.

Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.

Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized

Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.

8-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (385,1)


Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico)

Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply.

l l l

Repeated short-distance driving

Driving in dusty conditions

Driving with extended use of brakes l l l l

Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used

Driving on rough or muddy roads

Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation

Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates

If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).

NOTE

After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-3



Black plate (386,1)



qSchedule 1

Maintenance Interval

Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42

×1000 km

×1000 miles

12

7.5

24

15

36

22.5

48

30

60

37.5

72

45

84

52.5

48

96

60

ENGINE

Drive belts

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

COOLING SYSTEM

FL22 type

*1

Engine coolant

Others

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter

Fuel lines and hoses

*2

Hoses and tubes for emission

*2

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs

CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections

Disc brakes

Tire (Rotation)

Steering operation and linkages

Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel bearing axial play

Rear differential oil (AWD)

Driveshaft dust boots

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body

Exhaust system and heat shields

All locks and hinges

R

R

L

Inspect every 168,000 km (105,000 miles)

Replace every 240,000 km (150,000 miles)

R

R

R

R

C

R

R

I

I

I I I

Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)

I

I

I

*3*4

R

R

R

R

R

R

R


T

Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years

L L L L L L

R

R

Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that, every 2 years

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

T

L

8-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (387,1)





Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42

×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84

×1000 miles 7.5

15 22.5

30 37.5

45 52.5

48

96

60

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Cabin air filter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years

Chart symbols:

I: Inspect and repair, clean, adjust, or replace if necessary.

R: Replace

C: Clean

T: Tighten

L: Lubricate

Remarks:

*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription

“FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.

*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.

*3 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at every 45,000 km (28,100 miles).

a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet condition c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)

*4 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.

8-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (388,1)



qSchedule 2



Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96

×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

ENGINE

Drive belts

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

COOLING SYSTEM

Puerto Rico

Others

FL22 type

*1

Engine coolant

Others

Engine coolant level

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter


*2


*2

IGNITION SYSTEM

Puerto Rico

Others

Spark plugs

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Function of all lights

USA

Others

*3

Inspect every 160,000 km (100,000 miles)


Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months

R R R R R R R R R R R R

R R R R R R R R R R R R

Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after

Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,

I

I

I

I that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

I

C

I

I

C

I

I

I every 2 years

I

R

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

C

I

I



I

I

C

I

I

R

I

I

I

8-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (389,1)





Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96

×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

CHASSIS and BODY


Brake fluid level

Disc brakes

Tire (Rotation)

Tire inflation pressure and tire wear


Power steering fluid level


Rear differential oil (AWD)


I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)

I I I I I I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

*4*5

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I




Washer fluid level

T

Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years

T

L L L L L L L L L L L L

I I I I I I I I I I I I

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-7



Black plate (390,1)





Cabin air filter


Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96

×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years

Chart symbols:


R: Replace

C: Clean

T: Tighten

L: Lubricate

Remarks:



*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.

*3 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the spark plugs at every

96,000 km (60,000 miles) or shorter.

a) Repeated short-distance driving b) Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation c) Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates

*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at every 45,000 km (28,100 miles).

a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet condition c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)

*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.

8-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (391,1)



Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)

Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply.

l l l

Repeated short-distance driving

Driving in dusty conditions

Driving with extended use of brakes l l l l

Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used

Driving on rough or muddy roads

Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation

Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates l l

Driving in extremely hot conditions

Driving in mountainous conditions continually

If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.

NOTE

After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-9



Black plate (392,1)



qSchedule 1


Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

ENGINE

Drive belts

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system

FL22 type

*1

Engine coolant

Others

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter



Fuel filter

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs

CHASSIS and BODY


Brake fluid level

Brake fluid

Disc brakes

Tire (Rotation)









Washer fluid level

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every

60,000 km or 3 years

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

Inspect every 40,000 km or 2 years

Replace every 40,000 km or 2 years

I

*2

I

R

R

I

R

*2

R

I

Replace every 240,000 km

R

I

I

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

I

R

R

I

R

I

*2

*2

R


R

R

I I I I I

Rotate every 10,000 km

I

I I I I I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

I

I

T

I

T

I

T

I

T

I

T

I I I I I I

L L L L L L L L L L L L

I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

T

I

R

R

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

8-10

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (393,1)





Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120


Cabin air filter

Chart symbols:


R: Replace

T: Tighten

L: Lubricate

R R R

Remarks:



*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-11



Black plate (394,1)



qSchedule 2



Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36

×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

ENGINE

Drive belts

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system

FL22 type

*1

Engine coolant

Others


FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter



Fuel filter

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


CHASSIS and BODY


Brake fluid level

Brake fluid

Disc brakes

Tire (Rotation)









Washer fluid level

R

R

I

I

R

R

R

R


I


R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

I

R

R

R

R

R

R




I

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

T

I

L

I

I I

C

I

I

*2

I

I

R

*2

R


I I I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

R

I


I I I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

T

I

L

I

I

I

I

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

R

R

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

T

I

L

I

I

I

I

8-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (395,1)





Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36

×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60


Cabin air filter

Chart symbols:


R: Replace

C: Clean

T: Tighten

L: Lubricate

R R R

Remarks:




Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-13



Black plate (396,1)



(Cont.)



Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72

×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

ENGINE

Drive belts

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system

FL22 type

*1

Engine coolant

Others


FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter



Fuel filter

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


CHASSIS and BODY


Brake fluid level

Brake fluid

Disc brakes

Tire (Rotation)









Washer fluid level

R

R

I

I

R

R

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

R

R

I


I

I


R

R

I

R

R



I I


I I I I I I I I

R

I

*2

*2

R

I

R

R

I

R

R

C

I

R

R

I

R

R

R


I

R

I

I

I I I


I I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

T

I

L

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

T

R

R

I

R

R

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

I

I

R

R

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

I

L

I

I

T

I

I

I

8-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (397,1)





Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72

×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120


Cabin air filter

Chart symbols:


R: Replace

C: Clean

T: Tighten

L: Lubricate

R R R

Remarks:




Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-15



Black plate (398,1)


Owner Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Schedule

The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.

Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible.

qWhen Refueling

l l l l

Brake fluid level (page 8-23)

Engine coolant level (page 8-21)

Engine oil level (page 8-20)

Washer fluid level (page 8-26)

qAt Least Monthly

Tire inflation pressures (page 8-33)

qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)

l l

Automatic transaxle fluid level (page 8-24)

Power steering fluid level (page 8-24)

You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.

l

Engine coolant (page 8-21)

l

Engine oil (page 8-19)

8-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (399,1)


Owner Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for items that are easy to perform.

As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedures can be done only by a

qualified service technician with special tools.

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.

For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an


There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.

We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

WARNING

Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a qualified technician:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.

If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fan which may turn on unexpectedly:

Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.

Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.



8-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Owner Maintenance

Engine Compartment Overview

Black plate (400,1)

Engine coolant reservoir

Power steering fluid reservoir

Brake fluid reservoir

Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick

Battery

Fuse block

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil-filler cap

Relay box

Engine oil dipstick

8-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (401,1)


Owner Maintenance

Engine Oil

NOTE

Changing the engine oil should be done by an


qRecommended Oil

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.

Oil container labels provide important information.

A chief contribution this type of oil makes to fuel economy is reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction.

U.S.A. and CANADA

Only use oils

“Certified For Gasoline

Engines

” by the American Petroleum

Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the

International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.

–30 –20 –10

0

10 20

30

40 50

–20

0 20 40 60

80 100

120

5W-20

Except U.S.A. and CANADA

(ILSAC)

(ILSAC)

8-19

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (402,1)


Owner Maintenance

The quality designation SM, or ILSAC must be on the label.

–30

–20

–10

0

10

20

30

40 50

–20

0 20 40 60

80

100 120

CAUTION

Don't add engine oil over MAX. This may cause engine damage.

6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is positioned properly before reinserting the dipstick.

5W-20

qInspecting Engine Oil Level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level surface.

2. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and reinsert it fully.

Max

OK

Min

5. Pull it out again and examine the level.

It's OK between MIN and MAX.

But if it's near or below MIN, add enough oil to bring the level to MAX.

8-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (403,1)


Owner Maintenance

Engine Coolant qInspecting Coolant Level

WARNING

Do not use a match or live flame in the engine compartment. DO NOT ADD

COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:

A hot engine is dangerous. If the engine has been running, parts of the engine compartment can become very hot. You could be burned.

Carefully inspect the engine coolant in the coolant reservoir, but do not open it.

Inspect the antifreeze protection and coolant level in the coolant reservoir at least once a year

―at the beginning of the winter season

―and before traveling where temperatures may drop below freezing.

Inspect the condition and connections of all cooling system and heater hoses.

Replace any that are swollen or deteriorated.

The coolant should be at full in the radiator and between the F and L marks on the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.



If it's at or near L, add enough coolant to the coolant reservoir to provide freezing and corrosion protection and to bring the level to F.

Do not remove either cooling system cap when the engine and radiator are hot:

When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause serious injury.

NOTE

Changing the coolant should be done by an


8-21

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (404,1)


Owner Maintenance

CAUTION

Ø Radiator coolant will damage paint.

Rinse it off quickly if spilled.

Ø Use only soft (demineralized) water in the coolant mixture.

Water that contains minerals will cut down on the coolant's effectiveness.

Ø Don't add only water. Always add a proper coolant mixture.

Ø The engine has aluminum parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing

Alcohol, methanol, Borate or

Silicate.

These coolants could damage the cooling system.

Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol with the coolant. This could damage the cooling system.

Ø Don't use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze.

This would reduce effectiveness.

NOTE

If the

“FL22” mark is shown on or near the cooling system cap, use FL22 type engine coolant. If engine coolant other than FL22 type is used, the engine coolant must be replaced earlier than the specified replacement interval indicated in the scheduled

maintenance (page 8-3).

If the coolant reservoir is empty or new coolant is required frequently, consult an


8-22

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (405,1)

Brake Fluid qInspecting Brake Fluid Level

Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir regularly. It should be kept at MAX.

The level normally drops with accumulated distance, a condition associated with wear of brake linings. If it is excessively low, have the brake system inspected by an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.


Owner Maintenance

qAdding Brake Fluid

WARNING

Be careful not to spill brake fluid on yourself or on the engine:

Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes, they could be seriously injured. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water and get medical attention.

Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine could cause a fire.

If the brake/clutch fluid level is low, have the brakes and clutch inspected:

Low brake fluid levels are dangerous.

Low levels could signal brake lining wear or a brake system leak. Your brakes could fail and cause an accident.

If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it reaches MAX.

Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the cap.

CAUTION

Ø Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid does get on a painted surface, wash it off with water immediately.

Ø Using nonspecified brake fluids

(page 10-4) will damage the

system. Mixing different fluids will also damage it.

If the brake system frequently requires new fluid, consult an


8-23

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (406,1)


Owner Maintenance

Power Steering Fluid qInspecting Power Steering Fluid

Level

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the power steering pump, don't operate the vehicle for long periods when the power steering fluid level is low.

NOTE

Use specified power steering fluid (page 10-4).

Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at each engine oil change with the engine off and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does not require periodic changing.

The level must be kept between MAX and

MIN.

Visually examine the lines and hoses for leaks and damage.

If new fluid is required frequently, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

(ATF) qInspecting Automatic Transaxle

Fluid Level

The automatic transaxle fluid level should be inspected regularly. Measure it as described below.

The volume of fluid changes with temperature. Fluid must be checked while idling the engine without driving at normal operating temperature.

CAUTION

Ø Low fluid level causes transaxle slippage. Overfilling can cause foaming, loss of fluid, and transaxle malfunction.

Ø Use specified fluid (page 10-4). A

nonspecified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake firmly.

2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal.

3. Move the shift lever through all ranges, then set it at P.

WARNING

Make sure the brake pedal is applied before shifting the shift lever:

Shifting the shift lever without first depressing the brake pedal is dangerous. The vehicle could move suddenly and cause an accident.

4. With the engine still idling, pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and put it back.

8-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (407,1)


Owner Maintenance

5. Pull it out again.

The proper fluid level is marked on the dipstick as follows.

Fully insert the dipstick. When adding fluid, inspect with the dipstick to make sure it doesn't pass full.

NOTE

Inspect the fluid on both sides of the dipstick in a well lit area for an accurate reading.

Full

A

Low

Full

B

Low

Fluid hot scale A

When the vehicle has been driven and the fluid is at normal operating temperature, about 65°C (150°F), the level must be between Full and Low.

Fluid cold scale B

When the engine has not been running and the outside temperature is about 20°C

(70°F), the fluid level should be close to, but not above, the bottom notch on the dipstick.

CAUTION

Ø Use the cold scale only as a reference.

Ø If outside temperature is lower than about 20°C (70°F), start the engine and inspect the fluid level after the engine reaches operating temperature.

Ø If the vehicle has been driven for an extended period at high speeds or in city traffic in hot weather, inspect the level only after stopping the engine and allowing the fluid to cool for 30 minutes.

8-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (408,1)


Owner Maintenance

Washer Fluid qInspecting Washer Fluid Level

WARNING

Use only windshield washer fluid or plain water in the reservoir:

Using radiator antifreeze as washer fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the windshield, it will dirty the windshield, affect your visibility, and could result in an accident.

Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze

Protection in Cold Weather:

Operating your vehicle in temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) using washer fluid without anti-freeze protection is dangerous as it could cause impaired windshield vision and result in an accident. In cold weather, always use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.

NOTE

State or local regulations may restrict the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC content should be used only if it provides adequate freeze resistance for all regions and climates in which the vehicle will be operated.

Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir; add fluid if necessary.

Use plain water if washer fluid is unavailable.

But use only washer fluid in cold weather to prevent it from freezing.

NOTE

Front and rear washer fluid is supplied from the same reservoir.

8-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (409,1)

Body Lubrication

All moving points of the body, such as door and hood hinges and locks, should be lubricated each time the engine oil is changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on locks during cold weather.

Make sure the hood's secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.


Owner Maintenance

Wiper Blades

CAUTION

Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic car washers have been known to affect the wiper's ability to clean windows.

Ø To prevent damage to the wiper blades, don't use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Contamination of either the windshield or the blades with foreign matter can reduce wiper effectiveness. Common sources are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes.

If the blades are not wiping properly, clean the window and blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if necessary.

qReplacing Windshield Wiper Blades

When the wipers no longer clean well, the blades are probably worn or cracked.

Replace them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, don't try to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

NOTE

To prevent damage to the wiper arm blades when raising both the driver and passenger side wiper arms, raise the driver side wiper arm first. Conversely, when setting down the wiper arms, set the passenger side wiper arm down first.

1. Raise the wiper arm.

8-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (410,1)


Owner Maintenance

2. Open the clip and slide the blade assembly in the direction of the arrow.

3. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the clip.

5. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of blade holder.

NOTE

Using a soft cloth-wrapped flathead screwdriver.

4. Tilt the blade assembly and remove it from the arm.

6. Remove the metal stiffeners from each blade rubber and install them in the new blade.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the windshield let the wiper arm down easily, don't let it slap down on the windshield.

8-28

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (411,1)


Owner Maintenance

CAUTION

Ø Don't bend or discard the stiffeners. You need to use them again.

Ø If the metal stiffeners are switched, the blade's wiping efficiency could be reduced.

So don't use the driver's side metal stiffeners on the passenger's side, or vice versa.

Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal stiffeners in the new blade rubber so that the curve is the same as it was in the old blade rubber.

7. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.

Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

1. Remove the cover and raise the wiper arm.

2. Firmly rotate the wiper blade to the right until it unlocks, then remove the blade.

qReplacing Rear Window Wiper

Blade

When the wiper no longer cleans well, the blade is probably worn or cracked.

Replace it.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arm and other components, don't try to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the rear window let the wiper arm down easily, don't let it slap down on the rear window.

8-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (412,1)


Owner Maintenance

3. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of the blade holder.

5. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.

Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

4. Remove the metal stiffeners from each blade rubber and install them in the new blade.

CAUTION

Don't bend or discard the stiffeners.

You need to use them again.

8-30

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (413,1)


Owner Maintenance

Battery

WARNING

Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting to ensure safe and correct handling:

Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:

Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.

Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:

Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.

Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.

Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:

Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.

Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.

8-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (414,1)


Owner Maintenance

Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.

qBattery Maintenance

To get the best service from a battery: l l l

Keep it securely mounted.

Keep the top clean and dry.

Keep terminals and connections clean, l tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately with a solution of water l and baking soda.

If the vehicle will not be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

8-32

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (415,1)

Tires

For reasons of proper performance, safety, and better fuel economy, always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the recommended load limits and weight distribution.

WARNING

Using Different Tire Types:

Driving your vehicle with different types of tires is dangerous. It could cause poor handling and poor braking; leading to loss of control.

Except for the limited use of the temporary spare tire, use only the same type tires (radial, bias-belted, bias-type) on all four wheels.

Using Wrong-Sized Tires:

Using any other tire size than what is

specified for your Mazda (page 10-6)

is dangerous. It could seriously affect ride, handling, ground clearance, tire clearance, and speedometer calibration. This could cause you to have an accident. Use only tires that are the correct size specified for your

Mazda.

qTire Inflation Pressure

WARNING

Always inflate the tires to the correct pressure:

Overinflation or underinflation of tires is dangerous. Adverse handling or unexpected tire failure could result in a serious accident.

Refer to specification charts on page

10-6.


Owner Maintenance

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System

í does not alleviate the need to check the tire condition every day, including whether the tires all look inflated properly.

Inspect all tire pressure monthly

(including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain recommended pressures for the best ride, handling, and minimum tire wear.

When checking the tire pressures, use of a digital tire pressure gauge is recommended.

Refer to the specification charts (page

10-6).

í

Some models.

8-33

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (416,1)


Owner Maintenance

NOTE l

Always check tire pressure when tires are cold.

l l l

Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure.

Underinflation can cause reduced fuel economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear, and poor sealing of the tire bead, which will deform the wheel and cause separation of tire from rim.

Overinflation can produce a harsh ride, uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

Keep your tire pressure at the correct levels. If one frequently needs inflating, have it inspected.

qTire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if irregular wear develops. According to the scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to

Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.

During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.

Forward

Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) spare tire in rotation.

Also, inspect them for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a combination of the following: l

Incorrect tire pressure

8-34 l l l

Improper wheel alignment

Out-of-balance wheel

Severe braking

After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to

specification (page 10-6) and inspect the

lug nuts for tightness.

CAUTION

Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be weakened if rotated from side to side.

CAUTION

Limited-Slip Differential system; don't use the following:

Ø Tires not of the designated size

Ø Tires of different sizes or types at the same time

Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated

If these instructions aren't followed, the rotation of the left and right wheels will be different and will thus apply a constant load on the limitedslip differential.

This will cause a malfunction.

qReplacing a Tire

WARNING

Always use tires that are in good condition:

Driving with worn tires is dangerous.

Reduced braking, steering, and traction could result in an accident.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (417,1)


Owner Maintenance

CAUTION

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring

System)


NOTE

(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System) l l

When tires with steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls are used, the system may not function correctly even with a genuine wheel.

Refer to System Error Activation on page

5-31.

Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors whenever tires or wheels are replaced.

Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.

If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread.

Replace the tire when this happens.

Tread wear indicator

NOTE

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are

6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and year is indicated with 4 digit.

Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.

qTemporary Spare Tire

Inspect the temporary spare tire at least monthly to make sure it's properly inflated and stored.

NOTE

The temporary spare tire condition gradually deteriorates even if it has not been used.

The temporary spare tire is easier to handle because of its construction. It is lighter and smaller than a conventional tire and should be used only for an emergency and only for a short distance.

Use the temporary spare tire only until the conventional tire is repaired, which should be as soon as possible.

Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa (4.2

kgf/cm

2 or bar, 60 psi).

New tread Worn tread

You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.

8-35

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (418,1)


Owner Maintenance

CAUTION

Ø Don't use your temporary spare tire rim with a snow tire or a conventional tire. Neither will properly fit and could damage both tire and rim.

Ø The temporary spare tire has a tread life of less than 5,000 km

(3,000 miles). The tread life may be shorter depending on driving conditions.

Ø The temporary spare tire is for limited use, however, if the tread wear solid-band indicator appears, replace the tire with the same type of temporary spare

(page 8-34).

NOTE

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are

6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and year is indicated with 4 digit.

Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.

qReplacing a Wheel

WARNING

Always use wheels of the correct size on your vehicle:

Using a wrong-sized wheel is dangerous. Braking and handling could be affected, leading to loss of control and an accident.

CAUTION

Ø A wrong-sized wheel may adversely affect:

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Tire fit

Wheel and bearing life

Ground clearance

Snow-chain clearance

Speedometer calibration

Headlight aim

Bumper height

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Ø

Limited-Slip Differential System

Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring

System)

Ø

When replacing/repairing the tires or wheels or both, have the work done by an Authorized

Mazda Dealer, or the tire

Ø pressure sensors may be damaged.

The wheels equipped on your

Mazda are specially designed for installation of the tire pressure sensors. Do not use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it may not be possible to install the tire pressure sensors.

NOTE

Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to

Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.

When replacing a wheel, make sure the new one is the same as the original factory wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.

Proper tire balancing provides the best riding comfort and helps reduce tread wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause vibration and uneven wear, such as cupping and flat spots.

8-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (419,1)


Owner Maintenance

Overhead light (Center)

Overhead light/Map lights (Front)

Vanity mirror lights

Light Bulbs

Overhead light (Rear)

Side turn signal lights

Headlights (High beam)

Fog lights

High-mount brake light

Luggage compartment light

Courtesy lights

Front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

Headlights (Low beam)

Taillights

License plate lights

Reverse lights

Rear turn signal lights

Rear side marker lights

Brake lights/Taillights

Some models.

8-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (420,1)


Owner Maintenance

WARNING

Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs yourself:

Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs yourself is dangerous. Because the xenon fusion bulbs require high voltage, you could receive an electric shock if the bulbs are handled incorrectly. Consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer when the replacement is necessary.

Never touch the glass portion of a halogen bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around the bulbs:

When a halogen bulb breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass.

If the glass portion is touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit.

Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children:

Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking it some other way.

qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs

Replacing a headlight bulb

High-beam bulb

1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned off and the headlight switch is off.

2. Lift the hood.

3. Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling the connector downward.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to remove it. Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out of the socket.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

8-38

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (421,1)


Owner Maintenance

NOTE l

To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

l l

If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used.

Use the protective cover and carton of the replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly out of the reach of children.

Low-beam bulb

(Xenon fusion bulb)

You cannot replace the low beam bulbs by yourself.

The bulbs must be replaced at an


(Halogen bulbs)

1. Make sure the headlight switch is off.

2. Lift the hood.

3. Remove the attachment bolts and the coolant reservoir before replacing the light bulb.

4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it.


6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to remove it. Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out of the socket.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I


8-39



Black plate (422,1)


Owner Maintenance

8. Install the coolant reservoir. If you are unsure of how tight the bolts should be, have them inspected at an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

Bolt tightening torque


6.9

―11.8

(0.7

―1.2, 5.1―8.7)

NOTE l


Mazda Dealer.

l l


Use the protective cover and carton for the replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly and out of the reach of children.

Front side marker lights, Front turn signal lights


2. Lift the hood.

3. Remove the attachment bolts and the coolant reservoir before replacing the light bulb.

Front side marker lights


4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it.

5. Remove the bulb by pushing it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.

8-40

í

Some models.


7. Install the coolant reservoir. If you are unsure of how tight the bolts should be, have them inspected at an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

Bolt tightening torque


6.9

―11.8

(0.7

―1.2, 5.1―8.7)

Fog lights

í


2. Turn the screws counterclockwise and remove them.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (423,1)


Owner Maintenance

3. Turn the screws and the center section of the plastic retainers counterclockwise and remove them, then remove the mudguard.

Removal

Installation



Carefully remove the bulb from its socket in the reflector by gently pulling it straight backward out of the socket.

NOTE l


Mazda Dealer.

l l


Use the protective cover and carton for the replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb promptly and out of the reach of children.


í

, Brake lights,

Taillights (Rear combination light side),


Due to the complexity and difficulty of the procedure, the LED bulbs should be replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTE

LED bulb replacement is not possible. The rear combination component must be replaced.

Rear turn signal lights/Rear sidemarker light

1. Turn the bolts counterclockwise and remove them.


Form No.8V83-EA-06I

í

Some models.

8-41




Owner Maintenance

2. Pull the unit rearward to remove it.

Black plate (424,1)

Taillights (Liftgate side), Reverse lights



Rear direction indication light

Rear side-maker light


3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.

4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.


Reverse light

Taillight


NOTE


Mazda Dealer.


1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the lens and remove the lens by carefully prying on the edge of the lens with a flathead screwdriver.

8-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (425,1)

2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.


Owner Maintenance

Overhead light (Center, Rear)


qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs

Overhead light/Map lights (Front),

Overhead light (Center, Rear), Luggage compartment light, Courtesy lights,


1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the lens and remove the lens by carefully prying on the edge of the lens with the flathead screwdriver.

2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.

Overhead light/Map lights (Front)


Edge

Courtesy lights

8-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (426,1)


Owner Maintenance



Fuses

Your vehicle's electrical system is protected by fuses.

If any lights, accessories, or controls don't work, inspect the appropriate circuit protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside element will be melted.

If the same fuse blows again, avoid using that system and consult an Authorized


qFuse Replacement

Replacing fuses located behind the glove box

If an electrical system is inoperative, inspect the fuses located behind the glove box.

1. Turn off the ignition switch and other switches.

2. Open the glove box.


8-44

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (427,1)

Fuse

4. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse puller provided on the fuse block located in the engine compartment.


Owner Maintenance

6. Push in a new fuse of the same amperage rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it doesn't, have an expert repairer install it. We recommend an


If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same rating from a circuit not essential to vehicle operation, such as the ROOM circuit.

CAUTION

Always replace a fuse with one of the same rating. Otherwise you may damage the electric system.

Replacing the fuses under the hood

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced. Follow these steps:

1. Turn off the ignition switch and all other switches.

2. Remove the fuse block cover or the relay box cover.

Fuse block

5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's blown.

Normal Blown

8-45

Form No.8V83-EA-06I




Owner Maintenance

Relay box

3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is blown, replace it with a new one of the same amperage rating.

Normal

Blown

WARNING

Do not replace the main fuse by yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda

Dealer perform the replacement:

Replacing the fuse by yourself is dangerous because the MAIN fuse is a high current fuse. Incorrect replacement could cause an electrical shock or a short circuit resulting in a fire.

8-46

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

Black plate (428,1)



qFuse Panel Description

Fuse block (Engine compartment)

Black plate (429,1)


Owner Maintenance

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

16

DESCRIPTION

MAIN

ENGINE

R HEATER

P.SEAT R

HEATER

IGKEY2

FAN1

P.SEAT L

DEFOG

BTN

FUEL PUMP

IGKEY1

FOG

ABS (SOL)

D/L

ROOM

FUSE

RATING

PROTECTED COMPONENT

150A For protection of all circuits

20A Transaxle control system

40A

30A

50A

Heater

Power seat (RH)

Heater

í

For protection of various circuits 40A

30A

í

40A

í

40A

30A

40A

Cooling fan

Power seat (LH)

í

Rear window defroster

For protection of various circuits

30A

30A

15A

30A

25A

15A

Fuel pump

For protection of various circuits

Fog lights

í

ABS solenoid

Power door locks

Overhead light

í

Some models.

8-47

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (430,1)


Owner Maintenance

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

29

30

31

32

33

24

25

26

27

28

34

35

DESCRIPTION

OUTLET CTR

OUTLET RR

AC PWR

S.WARM

A/C MAG

BOSE

FAN2

ABS

IG COIL

H/L LOW L

H/L LOW R

H/L HIGH

HAZARD

ENG +B

HORN

STOP

EGI INJ

ENG BAR

ENG BAR 2

FUSE

RATING

15A

15A

15A

15A

10A

25A

30A

í

40A

í

50A

25A

15A

15A

20A

15A

10A

15A

7.5A

10A

20A

7.5A

PROTECTED COMPONENT

Accessory socket (Center)

Accessory socket (Rear)

Moon roof

í

, DC/AC inverter

Seat warmer

í

Air conditioner

Audio system (Bose

®

Sound System-equipped model)

í

Cooling fan

ABS

Ignition system

Headlight-left (Low beam)

Headlight-right (Low beam)

Headlight-high (High beam)

Hazard warning flashers

PCM

Horn

Brake lights

Engine control system

Air flow sensor, EGR control valve

PCM

8-48

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Relay box (Engine compartment)

í

Black plate (431,1)


Owner Maintenance

1

2

3

DESCRIPTION

INJ

―

―

FUSE

RATING

7.5A

―

―

Injectors

PROTECTED COMPONENT

―

―

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

í

Some models.

8-49




Owner Maintenance

Fuse block (Glove box)

Black plate (432,1)

16

17

18

19

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

6

7

10

3

4

1

2

5

DESCRIPTION

OUTLET FR

MIRROR

―

METER

SAS

ENG.IGA

STA

―

A/C

R.WIPER

―

P.LIFT GATE

SUNROOF

AUDIO

M.DEF

―

TAIL

ILLUMI

INJ

8-50

í

Some models.

FUSE

RATING

15A

7.5A

―

10A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

―

7.5A

15A

―

20A

15A

10A

10A

―

10A

10A

7.5A

PROTECTED COMPONENT

Accessory Socket (Front)

Power control mirror

―

Instrument cluster

ABS, Air bag

Engine control system

Ignition system

―

Air conditioner

Rear window wiper and washer

―

Power lift gate

í

Moonroof

í

Audio system

Mirror defroster

í

―

Taillight


Injectors

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (433,1)

20

21

22

23

24

DESCRIPTION

―

―

―

WIPER

P.WIND


Owner Maintenance

FUSE

RATING

―

―

―

30A

30A

PROTECTED COMPONENT

―

―

―

Windshield wiper and washer

Power windows

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

8-51



Black plate (434,1)


Appearance Care

How to Minimize

Environmental Paint Damage

The paintwork on your Mazda represents the latest technical developments in composition and methods of application.

Environmental hazards, however, can harm the paint's protective properties, if proper care is not taken.

Here are some examples of possible damage, with tips on how to prevent them.

qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or

Industrial Fallout

Occurrence

Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions drift into the air and mix with rain or dew to form acids. These acids can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates, the acid becomes concentrated and can damage the finish.

And the longer the acid remains on the surface, the greater the chance is for damage.

Prevention

It is necessary to wash and wax your vehicle to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section. These steps should be taken immediately after you suspect that acid rain has settled on your vehicle's finish.

qDamage Caused by Bird

Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap

Occurrence

Bird droppings contain acids. If these aren't removed they can eat away the clear and color base coat of the vehicle's paintwork.

When insects stick to the paint surface and decompose, corrosive compounds form. These can erode the clear and color base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if they are not removed.

Tree sap will harden and adhere permanently to the paint finish. If you scratch the sap off while it is hard, some vehicle paint could come off with it.

Prevention

It is necessary to have your Mazda washed and waxed to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section. This should be done as soon as possible.

Bird droppings can be removed with a soft sponge and water. If you are traveling and these are not available, a moistened tissue may also take care of the problem.

The cleaned area should be waxed according to the instructions in this section.

Insects and tree sap are best removed with a soft sponge and water or a commercially available chemical cleaner.

Another method is to cover the affected area with dampened newspaper for one to two hours. After removing the newspaper, rinse off the loosened debris with water.

8-52

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (435,1)


Appearance Care

qWater Marks

Occurrence

Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can contain harmful minerals such as salt and lime. If moisture containing these minerals settles on the vehicle and evaporates, the minerals will concentrate and harden to form white rings. The rings can damage your vehicle's finish.

Prevention

It is necessary to wash and wax your vehicle to preserve its finish according to the instructions in this section. These steps should be taken immediately after you find water marks on your vehicle's finish.

qPaint Chipping

Occurrence

Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown in the air by another vehicle's tires hits your vehicle.

How to avoid paint chipping

Keeping a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of having your paint chipped by flying gravel.

NOTE l

The paint chipping zone varies with the speed of the vehicle. For example, when l l traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).

In low temperatures a vehicle's finish hardens. This increases the chance of paint chipping.

Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the damage by using Mazda touch-up paint according to the instructions in this section.

Failure to repair the affected area could lead to serious rusting and expensive repairs.

8-53

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (436,1)


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Follow all label and container directions when using a chemical cleaner or polish.

Read all warnings and cautions.

qMaintaining the Finish

Washing

To help protect the finish from rust and deterioration, wash your Mazda thoroughly and frequently, at least once a month, with lukewarm or cold water.

If the vehicle is washed improperly, the paint surface could be scratched. Here are some examples of how scratching could occur.

Scratches occur on the paint surface when: l

The vehicle is washed without first l rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.

The vehicle is washed with a rough, dry, or dirty cloth.

l l

The vehicle is washed at a car wash that uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff.

Cleansers or wax containing abrasives are used.

NOTE l

Mazda is not responsible for scratches caused by automatic car washes or l improper washing.

Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles with darker paint finishes.

To minimize scratches on the vehicle's paint finish: l

Rinse off any dirt or other foreign matter using lukewarm or cold water before washing.

8-54 l l l l

Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth when washing the vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.

Rub gently when washing or drying the vehicle.

Take your vehicle only to a car wash that keeps its brushes well maintained.

Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax that contain abrasives.

CAUTION

Ø Don't use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may damage the protective coating; also, cleaners and detergents may discolor or deteriorate the paint.

Ø To prevent damaging the antenna, remove it before entering a car wash facility or passing beneath a low overhead clearance.

Pay special attention to removing salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign material from the underside of the fenders, and make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial fallout, and similar deposits can damage the finish if not removed immediately. When prompt washing with plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap made for use on vehicles.

Thoroughly rinse off all soap with lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap to dry on the finish.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (437,1)

After washing the vehicle, dry it with a clean chamois to prevent water spots from forming.

WARNING

Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly and applying the brakes lightly until brake performance is normal:


Waxing

Your vehicle needs to be waxed when water no longer beads on the finish.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body, wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.

1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.

Waxes containing abrasive will remove paint and could damage bright metal parts.

2. Use a good grade of natural wax for metallic, mica, and solid colors.

3. When waxing, coat evenly with the sponge supplied or a soft cloth.

4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.

NOTE

A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar materials will usually also take off the wax.

Rewax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle doesn't need it.


Appearance Care

qRepairing Damage to the Finish

Deep scratches or chips on the finish should be repaired promptly. Exposed metal quickly rusts and can lead to major repairs.

CAUTION

If your Mazda is damaged and needs metal parts repaired or replaced, make sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to all parts, both repaired and new. This will prevent them from rusting.

qPaint Damage Touch-up

Repair damage to the finish caused by stone chipping, damage during parking etc., by using Mazda touch-up paint before rust begins to form. First, remove the dirt and grease with a clean soft cloth.

If rust has already begun to form:

1. Remove rust completely with sandpaper.

2. Wipe with a clean soft cloth.

3. Apply rust preventive primer to the area.

4. After drying it completely, apply a suitable top coat material to the area.

Of course there will be no problem if you assign the work to an Authorized Mazda

Dealer.

8-55

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (438,1)


Appearance Care

qCavity Protection

Cavities are treated for protection at the factory, but additional protective treatment after the vehicle has been put into use will extend the life of the body.

We recommend that you consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer concerning this additional precaution.

qBright-Metal Maintenance

l l l

Use tar remover to remove road tar and insects. Never do this with a knife or similar tool.

To prevent corrosion on bright-metal surfaces, apply wax or chrome preservative and rub it to a high luster.

During cold weather or in coastal areas, cover bright-metal parts with a coating of wax or preservative heavier than usual. It would also help to coat them with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or some other protective compound.

CAUTION

Don't use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

qUnderbody Maintenance

Road chemicals and salt used for ice and snow removal and solvents used for dust control may collect on the underbody. If not removed, they will speed up rusting and deterioration of such underbody parts as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system, even though these parts may be coated with anti-corrosive material.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and wheel housings with lukewarm or cold water at the end of each winter. Try also to do this every month.

Pay special attention to these areas because they easily hide mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be clogged. Water trapped there will cause rusting.

WARNING

Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly and applying the brakes lightly until brake performance is normal:


8-56

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (439,1)


Appearance Care

qUndercoating

This special coating is applied to the critical parts of the underside to protect vehicles from damage caused by chemicals or stones. This coating is liable to be damaged with time. Check this coating periodically.

An Authorized Mazda Dealer are well informed on how repairs should be made.


qAluminum Wheel Maintenance

A protective coating is provided over the aluminum wheels. Special care is needed to protect this coating.

NOTE l

Don't use a wire brush or any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on l l l aluminum wheels. They may damage the coating.

Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent and always use a sponge or soft cloth to clean the wheels.

Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on dusty or salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.

Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash that uses high-speed or hard brushes.

If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax the wheels.

Interior Care qDashboard Precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oils from contacting the dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.

If these solutions get on the dashboard, wipe them off immediately.

CAUTION

Do not use glazing agents.

Glazing agents contain ingredients which may cause discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and peeling.

qCleaning the Upholstery and

Interior Trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl cleaner.

Leather

í

Real leather isn't uniform and may have scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it with a leather cleaner or mild soap.

Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry and buff it with a dry soft cloth.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean it with a mild soap solution good for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner.

í

Some models.

8-57

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (440,1)


Appearance Care

To keep the fabric looking clean and fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color will be affected, it can be stained easily, and its fire-resistance may be reduced.

CAUTION

Use only recommended cleaners and procedures. Others may affect appearance and fire-resistance.

Piano black panel

í

The following parts are fitted with panels that have been treated with a special coating that resists scratching.

l

Center panel l l

Steering wheel (partial)

Shift lever panel l

Door trim panel

When the panel needs to be cleaned, use a soft cloth to wipe off dirt from the surface.

NOTE

Scratches or nicks on the panels resulting from the use of a hard brush or cloth may not be repairable.

qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt

Webbing

Clean the webbing with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.

After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry the belt webbing and make sure there is no remaining moisture before retracting them.

WARNING

Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer replace damaged seat belts immediately:

Using damaged seat belts is dangerous. In a collision, damaged belts cannot provide adequate protection.

qCleaning the Window Interiors

If the windows become covered with an oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the container.

CAUTION

Don't scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. You may damage the rear window defroster grid.

8-58

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (441,1)

9

Customer Information and Reporting

Safety Defects

Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

Customer Assistance ............................... 9-2

Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 9-2

Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 9-4

Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) .... 9-7

Customer Assistance (Mexico) ........... 9-8

Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 9-10

Importer/Distributor .......................... 9-10

Distributor in Each Area ................... 9-10

Warranty ................................................ 9-12

Warranties for Your Mazda ............... 9-12

Outside the United States and

Canada .............................................. 9-13

Outside the United States .................. 9-14

Outside Canada ................................. 9-15

Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign

Country (Except United States and

Canada) ............................................. 9-16

Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and

Accessories ....................................... 9-17

Cell Phones ............................................. 9-18

Cell Phones Warning ......................... 9-18

Type Approval of Equipment ............... 9-19

Type Approval of Equipment

(Mexico) ............................................ 9-19

Uniform Tire Quality Grading System

(UTQGS) ................................................ 9-21

Uniform Tire Quality Grading System

(UTQGS) .......................................... 9-21

Tire Information (except Canada) ....... 9-23

Tire Labeling ..................................... 9-23

Location of the Tire Label

(Placard) ............................................ 9-29

Tire Maintenance .............................. 9-32

Vehicle Loading ................................ 9-35

Steps for Determining the Correct Load

Limit: ................................................ 9-42

Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 9-43

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 9-43

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 9-44

Service Publications .............................. 9-45

Service Publications .......................... 9-45

9-1

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (442,1)


Customer Assistance

Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All

Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.

If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following steps:

NOTE

If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue.

l

If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, l

SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.

If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.

qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations

If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda North American

Operations by one of the following ways.

Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com

Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in the U.S., can be found here.

E-mail: click on

“Contact Us” at the bottom of the page at www.mazdaUSA.com

By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500

9-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (443,1)


Customer Assistance

By letter at:

Attn: Customer Assistance

Mazda North American Operations

7755 Irvine Center Drive

Irvine, CA 92618-2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623-9734

In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following information:

1. Your name, address, and telephone number

2. Year and model of vehicle

3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver's side corner of the dash)

4. Purchase date and current mileage

5. Your dealer's name and location

6. Your question(s)

If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-3



Black plate (444,1)


Customer Assistance

Customer Assistance (Canada) qSatisfaction Review Process

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized

Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your

Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:

qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General

Manager.

qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office

If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda

Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address

and phone numbers are shown (page 9-6).

qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department

If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda

Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)

263-4680.

Provide the Department with the following information:

1. Your name, address and telephone number


3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the

“Vehicle Identification Labels” page of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.

4. Purchase date

5. Present odometer reading


7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction

The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.

9-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (445,1)


Customer Assistance

Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence for most effective results.

qMediation/Arbitration Program

Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer

Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.

Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding arbitration.

Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.

Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.

qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)

If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,

Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with

CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.

9-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (446,1)


Customer Assistance

CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.

Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the

Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300

North York, Ontario

M2J 4Y8 http://camvap.ca

Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:

Province/Territory

British Columbia & Yukon Territories

Alberta & Northwest Territories

Saskatchewan

Manitoba

Ontario

Atlantic Canada

Quebec

qRegional Offices

REGIONAL OFFICES

MAZDA CANADA INC.

WESTERN REGION

8171 ACKROYD ROAD

SUITE 2000

RICHMOND B.C.

V6X 3K1

(604) 303-5670

MAZDA CANADA INC.

CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION

55 VOGELL ROAD,

RICHMOND HILL,

ONTARIO, L4B 3K5

(905) 787-7000

MAZDA CANADA INC.

QUEBEC REGION

6111 ROUTE TRANS

CANADIENNE

POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC

H9R 5A5

(514) 694-6390

CAMVAP Number

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

1 (800) 207-0685

AREAS COVERED

ALBERTA,

BRITISH COLUMBIA,

MANITOBA,

SASKATCHEWAN,

YUKON

ONTARIO

QUEBEC,

NEW BRUNSWICK,

NOVA SCOTIA,

PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,

NEWFOUNDLAND

9-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (447,1)


Customer Assistance

Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized

Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.


qSTEP 1

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,

SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL

MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.

qSTEP 2

If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).

Please help us by providing the following information:






6. Your question(s)

9-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (448,1)


Customer Assistance

Customer Assistance (Mexico)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All

Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.


qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue.

l

If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,

SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of l the dealership or the OWNER.

If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.

qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda Motor de Mexico

If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda Motor de Mexico by one of the following ways.

Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx

Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in

Mexico, can be found here.

E-mail: click on

“Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx

By phone at: 1 (866) 315 0220

By letter at:

Attn: Customer Assistance



Irvine, CA 92618-2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623-9734

9-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (449,1)


Customer Assistance

In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following information:






6. Your question(s)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-9



Black plate (450,1)


Mazda Importer/Distributors

Importer/Distributor qU.S.A.



Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.

TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)

(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)

Distributor in Each Area qCANADA

Mazda Canada Inc.

55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,

Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada

TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)

(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)

qPUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island

Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto

Rico)

P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00936-2722

TEL: (787) 641-9300

qMEXICO

Mazda Motor de Mexico

Circuito Guillermo Gonzalez Camarena N

1500 Col. Centro de Ciudad Santa Fe.

01210, Mexico, D.F.

TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:

01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico

qGUAM

Triple J Motors

157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,

GUAM 96911 USA

P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931

TEL: (671) 649-6555

qSAIPAN

Pacific International Marianas, Inc.

(d.b.a. Midway Motors)

P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950

TEL: (670) 234-7524

9-10

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Triple J Saipan, Inc.

(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)

P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487

TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051

Black plate (451,1)


Mazda Importer/Distributors

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-11




Warranty

Warranties for Your Mazda

l l l l l l l l l

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)

Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty

Anti-perforation Limited Warranty

Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only) l l

Emission Defect Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)

Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)

Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

Tire Warranty

NOTE

Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.

Black plate (452,1)

9-12

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (453,1)


Warranty

Outside the United States and Canada

Government regulations in the United States and Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the

United States, its territories, and Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.

The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your

Mazda outside these areas.

You may have these problems if you do: l l

Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.

Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be available.

The Mazda warranty applies only to Mazda vehicles registered and normally operated in the United States, its territories, and Canada.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-13



Black plate (454,1)


Warranty

Outside the United States

Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United

States may differ from those sold in other countries.


Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).

NOTE

The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on vacation.

You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United

States: l

Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will l affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.


Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.

9-14

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (455,1)


Warranty

Outside Canada

Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.


Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the

United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).

NOTE

The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on vacation.

You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada: l

Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.

l


Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-15



Black plate (456,1)


Warranty

Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except

United States and Canada)

Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific emission and safety standards.

Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another country.

The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.

Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.

There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your vehicle.

The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.

9-16

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (457,1)


Warranty

Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories

Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.

These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

WARNING

Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or accessories:

Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an accident.

Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:

Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.

Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.

9-17

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (458,1)


Cell Phones

Cell Phones Warning

WARNING

Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country:

Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.

Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a handsfree system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

9-18

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (459,1)



Type Approval of Equipment (Mexico)

Immobilizer system

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-19





Keyless entry system

Black plate (460,1)

9-20

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (461,1)


Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)


This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and temperature performance.

qTread Wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

qTraction-AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

qTemperature-A, B, C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

9-21

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (462,1)



WARNING

Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:

Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.

The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary with respect to grade.

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND

TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

qUniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

UTQGS MARK (example)

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

9-22

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (463,1)


Tire Information (except Canada)

Tire Labeling

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires

Please refer to the diagram below.

1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number

2. Passenger car tire

3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters

4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

5. Radial

6. Rim diameter code

7. Load index & speed symbol

8. Severe snow conditions

9. Tire ply composition and materials used

10. Max. load rating

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-23



Black plate (464,1)



11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades

12. Max. permissible inflation pressure

13. SAFETY WARNING

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and load index rating may be different from the example.

P

Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).

NOTE

If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO

(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).

215

“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.

65

“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.

R

“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.

15

“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.

95

“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire can support.

9-24

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (465,1)



H

“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of the tire is rated.

Letter Rating

Q

R

S

T

U

H

V

W

Y

Speed Rating

99 mph

106 mph

112 mph

118 mph

124 mph

130 mph

149 mph

168

* mph

186

* mph

* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow

AT: All Terrain.

AS: All Season. The

“M+S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in mud and snow.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)

This begins with the letters

“DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers

457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire defect requires a recall.

Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used

The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and other.

Maximum Load Rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions.

9-25

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (466,1)



Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades

Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Snow Tires

In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.

Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other tires on your vehicle.

SAFETY WARNING

The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.

SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM: l

EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-

MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)

TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT

TIRES.

l

TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-

FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY

CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.

9-26

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (467,1)

qInformation on Temporary Tires

Please refer to the diagram below.



1. Temporary tires

2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters

3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

4. Diagonal

5. Rim diameter code

6. Load index&speed symbol

T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and load index rating may be different from the example.

T

Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).

115

“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.

9-27

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (468,1)



70

“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.

D

“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.

16

“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.

90

“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire can support.

M

“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of the tire is rated.

Letter Rating

M

Speed Rating

81 mph

9-28

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (469,1)



Location of the Tire Label (Placard)

You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.

SAMPLE

qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure

On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.

You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is maintained.

Refer to Tires on page 10-6.

NOTE

Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.

9-29

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (470,1)



WARNING

Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the information in this owner's manual:

Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result in severe cracking, tread separation or

“blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!

It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them.

qChecking Tire Pressure

1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold

―meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.

3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.

4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.

5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

6. Replace the valve cap.

7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.

NOTE

Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.

8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.

9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

NOTE

Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure.

Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.

Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

9-30

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (471,1)



qGlossary of Terms

Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.

Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of manufacture.

Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.

psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.

B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.

Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.

Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and cargo.

Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's mounted on the vehicle.

Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity is described on the tire label.

Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace, and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

9-31

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (472,1)



Tire Maintenance

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are some important maintenance points:

qTire Inflation Pressure

Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.

qTire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.

Forward

Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) spare tire in rotation.

Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a combination of the following: l

Incorrect tire pressure l l

Improper wheel alignment

Out-of-balance wheel l

Severe braking

After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 10-6) and inspect the lug nuts

for tightness.

CAUTION

Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be weakened if rotated from side to side.

9-32

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (473,1)



qReplacing a Tire

WARNING

Always use tires that are in good condition:

Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could result in an accident.

If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace the tire when this happens.

Tread wear indicator

New tread Worn tread

You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.

NOTE

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and

year is indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.

qSafety Practices

The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate good driving habits for your own benefit.

l

Observe posted speed limits l l l

Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

Avoid potholes and objects on the road

Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking

9-33

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (474,1)



CAUTION

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

9-34

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (475,1)



Vehicle Loading

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Safety

Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:

WARNING

Overloaded Vehicle:

Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure, handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.

Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation pressure.

Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.

Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

PAYLOAD

9-35



Black plate (476,1)



Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load

Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for

“THE

COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER

EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs

” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be accurate.

SAMPLE

9-36

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (477,1)



CARGO

Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.

The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from the

“combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire label.

Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg, and a value of 385 kg for the

The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg

_

68 kg = 317 kg

The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg _ (68 × 2) kg = 249 kg

If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

9-37

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (478,1)



GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

9-38

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (479,1)



SAMPLE

WARNING

Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:

Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling, performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, or loss of control.

Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.

Do not taw a trailer with this vehicle:

Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle damage.

9-39

Form No.8V83-EA-06I





Black plate (480,1)

GCW

GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle's braking system is rated for operation at GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers weighing more than 1,500 lbs). The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of 10_15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15_25%

(fifth-wheel trailer), and driver only (150 lbs). Consult your dealership (or the RV and

Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for more detailed information.

Tongue Load or Fifth-Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5000 lb conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lbs. For an 11,500 lb fifth-wheel trailer, multiply by

0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875 lbs.

9-40

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (481,1)



WARNING

Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:

Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.

Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or damage to the vehicle.

Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

9-41



Black plate (482,1)



Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:

(1) Locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs

” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400_ 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

9-42

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (483,1)


Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor

Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda

Importer/Distributor).

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

NOTE

If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:



Irvine, California 92618-2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623-9734

Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500

If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-10) in

this booklet.

9-43

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (484,1)


Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect

Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact

Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330

Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm

9-44

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (485,1)


Service Publications


Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.

When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the chart below.

If they don't have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.

PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER

9999-95-003B-07

9999-MX-003B-07

9999-95-009G-07

9999-MX-009G-07

9999-95-011C-07 (U.S.A. only)

9999-EC-011C-07 (Canada only)

9999-PR-011C-07 (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)

9999-95-011C-07QT

9999-95-001F-07

9999-95-011C-07NAV (U.S.A. only)

9999-EC-011C-07NAV (Canada only)

PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION

2007 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)

2007 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)

2007 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)

2007 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)

2007 OWNER'S MANUAL

2007 OWNER'S MANUAL

2007 OWNER'S MANUAL

2007 QUICK TIPS

2007 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS

2007 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL

2007 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL

qWORKSHOP MANUAL:

Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and chassis.

qWIRING DIAGRAM:

Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system.

qOWNER'S MANUAL:

This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.

This is not a technician's manual.

qQUICK TIPS:

This guide contains quick and concise information regarding proper operation of your vehicle and it's many features. This is not a technician's manual.

9-45

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (486,1)



qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:

Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.

qNAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:

This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation system. This is not a technician's manual.

9-46

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (487,1)

10

Specifications

Technical information about your Mazda.

Identification Numbers ............................................................... 10-2

Vehicle Information Labels ..................................................... 10-2

Specifications ............................................................................... 10-4

Specifications .......................................................................... 10-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

10-1



Black plate (488,1)

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Information Labels qVehicle Identification Number

The vehicle identification number legally identifies your vehicle. The number is on a plate attached to the cowl panel located on the left corner of the dashboard. This plate can easily be seen through the windshield.

qChassis Number qVehicle Emission Control

Information Label qMotor Vehicle Safety Standard Label

10-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



qTire Pressure Label (Except Canada)

Black plate (489,1)

Identification Numbers

qEngine Number

Forward

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

10-3



Black plate (490,1)

Specifications

Specifications qEngine

Type

Bore×Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Item Specification

DOHC-24V 60°V Duratec 35, 6-cylinder

92.5 × 86.7 mm (3.64 × 3.41 in)

3,496 ml (3,496 cc, 213.3 cu in)

10.3

qElectrical System

Item

Battery

Spark-plug number

Spark-plug gap

*1 ex factory

Classification

12V-55AH/5HR MF

ZZJ1-18110

*1

1.29

―1.45 mm (0.051―0.057 in)

CAUTION

When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

qLubricant Quality

Lubricant

Engine oil

Automatic transaxle fluid

Transfer case oil

Rear differential oil

Power steering fluid

Brake fluid

Classification

Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 8-19.

JWS3309

API Service GL-5 (SAE 75W-140)

API Service GL-5 (SAE 80W-90)

ATF M-III, M-V, or equivalent (e.g. Dexron® II)

SAE J1703, or FMVSS116 DOT-3

10-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (491,1)

Specifications

qCapacities

(Approximate Quantities)

Item

Engine oil

With oil filter replacement

Without oil filter replacement

With Towing Package

Coolant

Without Towing Package

Automatic transaxle fluid

Transfer case oil

Rear differential oil

Washer fluid

Fuel tank

Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.

qDimensions

Item

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

qWeights

Item

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Front

Rear

Capacity

5.2 L (5.5 US qt, 4.6 Imp qt)

4.7 L (5.0 US qt, 4.2 Imp qt)

11.7 L (12.4 US qt, 10.3 Imp qt)

11.1 L (11.7 US qt, 9.77 Imp qt)

7.0 L (7.4 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt)

0.532 L (0.562 US qt, 0.468 Imp qt)

1.0 L (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)

4.5 L (4.8 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt)

76.0 L (20.1 US gal, 16.7 Imp gal)

Vehicle specification

5,074 mm (199.8 in)

1,936 mm (76.2 in)

1,728 mm (68.0 in)

1,654 mm (65.1 in)

1,644 mm (64.7 in)

2,875 mm (113.2 in)

2WD

2,633 kg (5,805 lbs)

1,271 kg (2,802 lbs)

1,390 kg (3,064 lbs)

Weight

AWD

2,733 kg (6,025 lbs)

1,307 kg (2,881 lbs)

1,456 kg (3,210 lbs)

qAir Conditioner

Item

Refrigerant Type

Classification

HFC134a (R-134a)

10-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (492,1)

Specifications

qLight Bulbs

Exterior light

Headlights


Front side-marker lights

Fog lights

í


í


*1

Rear turn signal lights

Brake lights

*2

Light bulb

High beam

Low beam

Halogen

Xenon fusion

LED bulb

*1

Wattage

60

55

35

27

5

51

2.26

2.4

21

5.4

Taillights

Rear combination light side

*2

Liftgate side

0.7

Reverse lights


Rear side-marker lights

3.8

21

5

5

*1 Bulb replacement is not possible because it is built into the unit. Replace the unit.

*2 Bulb replacement is not possible. The rear combination component must be replaced.

Category

ECE R (SAE)

HB3 (HB3)

H11 (

―)

D2S (D2S)

― (#1156NA)

WY5W (

―)

HB4 (#9006)

― (―)

― (―)

WY21W (32CP)

― (―)

― (―)

― (#194)

W21W (#7440)

T10 (

―)

W5W (4CP)

Interior light

Category

Light bulb

Overhead lights/Map lights (Front)

Overhead light (Center)

Overhead light (Rear)

Courtesy lights


í


Wattage

8

10

10

5

2

10

ECE R

―

―

―

T10

―

―

qTires

NOTE

The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.

When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted to your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

10-6

í

Some models.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (493,1)

Specifications

Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.

Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 8-33.

Standard tire

Inflation pressure

Tire size

P245/60R18

P245/50R20

Front

250 kPa (36 psi)

230 kPa (34 psi)

Rear

250 kPa (36 psi)

230 kPa (34 psi)

Temporary spare tire

T155/90D18

Tire size Inflation pressure

420 kPa (60 psi)

qFuses

Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-44.

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

10-7



Black plate (494,1)

10-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



11

Index

Black plate (495,1)

Form No.8V83-EA-06I

11-1



Black plate (496,1)

Index

A

Accessory Socket ............................ 6-131

Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and

Accessories ....................................... 9-17

Advanced Key ..................................... 3-2

Advanced key maintenance ......... 3-5

Advanced key suspend function ...................................... 3-16

Auxiliary key .............................. 3-15

Locking, unlocking with request switch ........................................... 3-8

Operational range ......................... 3-7

Remote control function ............. 3-13

Service ......................................... 3-6

Setting change ............................ 3-19

Warning and beep sounds .......... 3-16

When warning indicator/beep is activated ..................................... 3-20

Air Bag Systems ............................... 2-50

All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) Operation ............................. 5-16

AWD Warning light ................... 5-17

Ambient Temperature Display ........ 6-124

Antenna ............................................. 6-17

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-7

Warning light ............................... 5-7

Appearance Care ............................... 8-52

Armrest Box .................................... 6-128

Audio

Audio control switch .................. 6-46

Audio System ................................... 6-17

Audio set .................................... 6-27

Auxiliary input ........................... 6-48

Operating tips for audio system ........................................ 6-17

Safety certification ..................... 6-50

A

Automatic Transaxle

Driving tips ................................ 5-15

Fluid ........................................... 8-24

Manual shift mode ..................... 5-12

Shift-lock system ....................... 5-12

Transaxle ranges ......................... 5-11

B

Battery

Emergency starting .................... 7-16

Maintenance ............................... 8-31

Specifications ............................. 10-4

Beeps

Ignition key reminder ................. 5-52

Lights-on reminder ..................... 5-52

Parking brake reminder .............. 5-52

Seat belt warning beep Sounds ... 5-52

Tire inflation pressure warning beep ............................................ 5-52

Before Starting the Engine .................. 4-5

After getting in ............................. 4-5

Before getting in .......................... 4-5

Bluetooth Hands-Free ..................... 6-103

Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free

Operation ................................. 6-106

Convenient Use of the Hands-Free

System ...................................... 6-109

Hands-Free Telephone

Setting ...................................... 6-113

Safety certification ................... 6-119

When the Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used .......................... 6-118

Body Lubrication .............................. 8-27

Bottle Holder ................................... 6-127

Brake

Fluid ........................................... 8-23

11-2

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (497,1)

Index

B

Brakes

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-7

Brakes assist ................................. 5-8

Foot brake .................................... 5-5

Pad wear indicator ........................ 5-9

Parking brake ............................... 5-5

Warning light ............................... 5-6

Break-In Period ................................... 4-6

Bulb Replacement ............................. 8-37

C

Capacities .......................................... 10-5

Carbon Monoxide ............................... 4-4

Cargo Securing Loops .................... 6-128

Cargo Sub-Compartment ................ 6-129

Catalytic Converter ............................. 4-3

Cell Phones ....................................... 9-18

Center Console ................................ 6-128

Child Restraint

Child restraint precautions ......... 2-34

Installing child-restraint systems ....................................... 2-38

LATCH child-restraint systems ....................................... 2-45

Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ... 3-28

Climate Control System ...................... 6-2

Gas specifications ...................... 10-5

Clock ............................................... 6-124

Coin Box ......................................... 6-128

Courtesy Lights ............................... 6-122

Cruise Control ................................... 5-19

Cup Holder ...................................... 6-125

Customer Assistance ........................... 9-2

D

Dashboard Illumination .................... 5-36

D

Daytime Running Lights ................... 5-56

Defroster

Rear window .............................. 5-61

Dimensions ....................................... 10-5

Door Locks ....................................... 3-25

Driving In Flooded Area ................... 4-11

Driving Tips ........................................ 4-6

Automatic transaxle ................... 5-15

Break-in period ............................ 4-6

Driving in flooded area .............. 4-11

Hazardous driving ........................ 4-7

Money-saving suggestions ........... 4-6

Rocking the vehicle ...................... 4-9

Winter driving .............................. 4-9

Dynamic Stability Control

(DSC)/Roll Stability Control

(RSC) ................................................ 5-25

TCS/DSC/RSC Indicator light.... 5-26

E

Emergency Starting ........................... 7-16

Flooded engine ........................... 7-16

Jump-starting .............................. 7-17

Push-starting .............................. 7-19

Emergency Towing ........................... 7-20

Emission Control System

(Gasoline Engine) ............................... 4-3

Engine

Coolant ....................................... 8-21

Exhaust gas .................................. 4-4

Hood release .............................. 3-43

Oil .............................................. 8-19

Overheating ................................ 7-14

Starting ......................................... 5-4

Engine Compartment Overview ........ 8-18

Engine Coolant

Overheating ................................ 7-14

11-3

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (498,1)

Index

E

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge ................................................ 5-35

Exhaust Gas ........................................ 4-4

Exterior Care ..................................... 8-54

F

Flasher

Hazard warning .......................... 5-63

Headlights .................................. 5-53

Flat Tire ............................................... 7-3

Changing ...................................... 7-8

Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3

Fluids

Classification .............................. 10-4

Owner maintenance ................... 8-16

Fog Lights ......................................... 5-57

Front ........................................... 5-57

Foot Brake .......................................... 5-5

Front Seats

(Electrically Operated Seats) ............... 2-5

Front Seats

(Manually Operated Seats) ................. 2-2

Fuel

Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-42

Gauge ......................................... 5-36

Requirements (Gasoline engine)... 4-2

Tank capacity ............................. 10-5

Fuses ................................................. 8-44

Panel description ........................ 8-47

Replacement ............................... 8-44

G

Glove Box ....................................... 6-128

H

Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 5-63

Hazardous Driving .............................. 4-7

Headlights

Control ....................................... 5-53

Flashing ...................................... 5-55

High-low beam .......................... 5-55

Leveling ..................................... 5-55

On reminder ............................... 5-55

Hood Release .................................... 3-43

Horn .................................................. 5-62

I

Ignition

Keys ........................................... 3-21

Switch .......................................... 5-2

Illuminated Entry System ............... 6-121

Immobilizer System

(with Advanced Key) ........................ 3-50

Immobilizer System

(without Advanced Key) ................... 3-52

Indicator Lights ................................. 5-37

Cruise ......................................... 5-51

Headlight high-beam .................. 5-50

Security ...................................... 5-49

Shift position .............................. 5-50

TCS OFF .................................... 5-51

TCS/DSC ................................... 5-50

Turn-signal/hazard warning ....... 5-51

Information Display ........................ 6-123

Ambient temperature display .... 6-124

Audio display ........................... 6-125

Climate control display ............ 6-125

Clock ........................................ 6-124

Information display functions... 6-123

Instrument Cluster ............................. 5-33

Interior Care ...................................... 8-57

Interior Lights ................................. 6-121

11-4

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (499,1)

Index

J

Jump-Starting .................................... 7-17

K

Keyless Entry System ....................... 3-22

Keys .................................................. 3-21

L

Label Information ............................. 10-2

Lane-Change Signals ........................ 5-56

Liftgate .............................................. 3-28

Light Bulbs

Replacement ............................... 8-37

Specifications ............................. 10-6

Lighting Control ............................... 5-53

Lubricant Quality .............................. 10-4

Luggage Compartment Light .......... 6-122

M

Maintenance

Introduction .................................. 8-2

Owner maintenance precautions ................................. 8-17

Owner maintenance schedule ..... 8-16

Scheduled ..................................... 8-3

Map Lights ...................................... 6-122

Mirrors

Outside mirrors .......................... 3-57

Rearview mirror ......................... 3-58

Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 4-6

Moonroof .......................................... 3-44

O

Odometer and Trip Meter .................. 5-34

Outside Mirrors ................................. 3-57

O

Overhead Console ........................... 6-127

Overhead Lights .............................. 6-121

Overheating ....................................... 7-14

Overloading ...................................... 4-11

P

Paint Damage .................................... 8-52

Parking Brake ..................................... 5-5

Parking in an Emergency .................... 7-2

Power Door Locks ............................ 3-27

Power Liftgate ................................... 3-30

Power Outlet ................................... 6-132

Power Steering .................................. 5-16

Fluid ........................................... 8-24

Power Windows ................................ 3-35

Push-Starting ..................................... 7-19

R

Rear Door Child Safety Locks .......... 3-28

Rear Entertainment System ............... 6-51

Before operation ......................... 6-63

Country code list ........................ 6-94

Language code list ..................... 6-92

Sound output .............................. 6-69

Rear Window Defroster .................... 5-61

Rear Window Washer ....................... 5-61

Rear Window Wiper .......................... 5-61

Rearview Mirror ................................ 3-58

Recreational Towing ......................... 7-23

Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign

Country ............................................. 9-16

Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 4-9

Roll-over ............................................. 4-8

11-5

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (500,1)

Index

S

Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 9-43

Seat Belt System

3-point type ................................ 2-22

Automatic locking ...................... 2-21

Belt minder ................................. 2-32

Center-rear lap/shoulder ............. 2-27

Emergency locking .................... 2-20

Extender ..................................... 2-30

Pregnant women ........................ 2-20

Pretensioner and load limiting .... 2-24

Seat belt precautions .................. 2-18

Warning light/beep ..................... 2-32

Seats

Front seat

(Electrically operated seats) ......... 2-5

Front seat

(Manually operated seats) ............ 2-2

Seat warmer ................................ 2-10

Second-row seats ........................ 2-11

Third-row seat ............................ 2-16

Second-Row Seats ............................ 2-11

Security System

Immobilizer system

(without advanced key) .............. 3-52

Immobilizer system

(with advanced key) ................... 3-50

Theft-deterrent system ............... 3-55

Service Publications .......................... 9-45

Shopping Bag Hook ........................ 6-129

Side Extention Sunvisors ................ 6-120

Spare Tire and Tool Storage ................ 7-3

Specifications .................................... 10-4

Speedometer ...................................... 5-34

Starting the Engine .............................. 5-4

Steering Wheel .................................. 3-57

Horn ........................................... 5-62

S

Storage Compartments .................... 6-127

Armrest box ............................. 6-128

Cargo securing loops ................ 6-128

Cargo sub-compartment ........... 6-129

Center console .......................... 6-128

Coin box ................................... 6-128

Glove box ................................. 6-128

Overhead console ..................... 6-127

Shopping bag hook .................. 6-129

Sunshade ........................................... 3-49

Sunvisors ........................................ 6-120

T

Tachometer ........................................ 5-35

Temporary Spare Tire ....................... 8-35

Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 3-55

Third-Row Seat ................................. 2-16

Tiedown

Hook .......................................... 7-21

Tire Information ................................ 9-23

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 5-27

System error activation .............. 5-31

Tire pressure monitoring system warning light .............................. 5-29

Tires and wheels ......................... 5-31

Tires

Flat Tire ........................................ 7-3

Inflation pressure ........................ 8-33

Replacement ............................... 8-34

Rotation ...................................... 8-34

Snow tires .................................... 4-9

Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3

Specifications ............................. 10-6

Tire chains .................................. 4-10

Uniform tire quality grading system

(UTQGS) ................................... 9-21

Tool ..................................................... 7-3

11-6

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (501,1)

Index

T

Towing

Description ................................. 7-20

Emergency towing ..................... 7-20

Recreational towing ................... 7-23

Trailer towing

(Except Mexico) ......................... 4-12

Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 5-22

TCS OFF indicator light ............ 5-23

TCS OFF switch ........................ 5-24

TCS/DSC indicator light ............ 5-23

Trailer Towing .................................. 4-12

Trip Meter ......................................... 5-34

Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 5-56

V

Vanity Mirrors ................................. 6-120

Vehicle Information Labels ............... 10-2

W

Warning Lights ................................. 5-37

ABS ............................................ 5-39

Air bag system ........................... 5-42

Automatic transaxle ................... 5-45

AWD .......................................... 5-45

Brake system .............................. 5-39

Charging system ......................... 5-40

Check engine .............................. 5-41

Check fuel cap ........................... 5-43

Door-ajar .................................... 5-45

Engine oil pressure ..................... 5-41

Front seat belt pretensioner system ........................................ 5-42

KEY Warning Light

(Red)/KEY Indicator Light

(Green) ....................................... 5-48

Low fuel ..................................... 5-43

Low washer fluid level ............... 5-45

Powertrain malfunction/reduced power .......................................... 5-42

Seat belt ...................................... 5-43

Tire pressure monitoring system ........................................ 5-46

Warranty ............................................ 9-12

Washer Fluid ..................................... 8-26

Weights ............................................. 10-5

Wheel Replacement .......................... 8-36

Windows

Power windows .......................... 3-35

Windshield Washer ........................... 5-60

Windshield Wipers ............................ 5-58

Blades replacement .................... 8-27

Winter Driving .................................... 4-9

11-7

Form No.8V83-EA-06I



Black plate (502,1)

11-8

Form No.8V83-EA-06I